Autodesk Revit 5.

1 Tutorials

Copyright © 2003 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future. Autodesk Trademarks The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects. Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing. Third Party Trademarks All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2003 GlobalCAD Consultants Ltd. Hatch Manager and Linetype Wizard are trademarks of GlobalCAD Consultants Ltd. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpellô Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShieldô 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE Æ Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONEidentified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Æ and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002

2

Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut f¸r G¸tesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream Æ typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved. GOVERNMENT USE Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

3

Table Of Contents

AUTODESK REVIT 5.1 TUTORIALS ............................................ 7 USING THESE TUTORIALS ........................................................ 8 CONCEPTS AND PRINCIPLES .................................................. 12 EXPLORING AUTODESK REVIT - EXERCISE ............................. 18 SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS........................................................ 73 SETTINGS EXERCISE .............................................................. 76 TOOLTIPS AND SNAPPING ..................................................... 85 CREATING YOUR 1ST MODEL .................................................. 90 WALLS, DOORS AND WINDOWS ............................................. 96 DIMENSIONS ........................................................................ 117 ALIGNMENTS ........................................................................ 125 COMPOUND WALLS............................................................... 131 VERTICALLY COMPOUND WALLS .......................................... 145 SLOPED GLAZING AND NON-RECTANGULAR CURTAIN WALLS ............................................................................................. 155 CURTAIN WALL ENHANCEMENTS .......................................... 161 WALL, FLOOR AND ROOF JOINS ........................................... 167 WALL FUNCTIONS AND WRAPPING ...................................... 169 WALL TOP/BOTTOM ATTACHMENTS ..................................... 174 CREATING ROOFS ................................................................. 176 MODIFYING ROOF CONSTRAINTS......................................... 191 CREATING FACIA, GUTTERS AND SOFFITS ........................... 194 CREATING CEILINGS ............................................................ 202 CREATING COMPOUND CEILINGS ......................................... 205 CREATING STAIRS................................................................ 208 STAIR CALCULATOR ............................................................. 225 CUTTING OPENINGS IN ROOFS, FLOORS, AND CEILINGS ..... 231
4

CREATING DRAWINGS.......................................................... 243 DETAILING ........................................................................... 257 DETAIL VIEWS AND VISIBILITY SETTINGS .......................... 274 DRAFTING VIEWS................................................................. 279 TYPE AND INSTANCE SCHEDULES......................................... 291 DEFINING SCHEDULES & COLOR DIAGRAMS ........................ 296 SCHEDULES & UNIFORMAT ................................................... 307 SHARED PARAMETERS & SCHEDULES ................................... 313 PROJECT PARAMETERS ......................................................... 323 EXPORTING PROJECT INFORMATION VIA ODBC................... 327 SETTING A PROJECT'S BASE ELEVATION .............................. 331 ANNOTATION AND DIMENSION ENHANCEMENTS ................. 335 KEYNOTING AND NOTEBLOCKS ............................................ 341 VIEWING THE DESIGN.......................................................... 346 CONTROLLING FILL PATTERN COLORS ................................. 350 RAYTRACE & RADIOSITY ...................................................... 354 ADDING ACCURENDER DECALS............................................. 369 WALKTHROUGHS .................................................................. 372 THE REVIT FAMILY EDITOR .................................................. 379 CREATING NESTED FAMILIES ............................................... 381 CONTROLLING PARAMETERS IN NESTED FAMILIES.............. 384 ADDING FORMULAS TO FAMILIES ........................................ 388 ADDING MATERIAL PARAMETERS TO A FAMILY.................... 392 APPLYING MATERIAL PARAMETERS ..................................... 394 WINDOW FAMILY EXERCISE................................................. 398 DOOR EXERCISE ................................................................... 418 CREATING A LIGHTING FIXTURE .......................................... 427

5

CREATING A FURNITURE FAMILY ......................................... 434 CREATING TITLE BLOCKS ..................................................... 445 CREATING A DETAIL COMPONENT ........................................ 457 CREATING AN ANNOTATION SYMBOL................................... 462 CREATING A ROOM TAG........................................................ 465 CREATING IN-PLACE FAMILIES ............................................ 469 CREATING A BALUSTER FAMILY ........................................... 482 CREATING PROFILE FAMILIES.............................................. 486 PROJECT SHARING ............................................................... 496 MODEL LINKING ................................................................... 513 SHARED COORDINATES ........................................................ 524 PHASING .............................................................................. 534 MASSING .............................................................................. 540 USING SITE TOOLS............................................................... 555 ADDITIONAL SITE TOOLS: BUILDING PADS, PROPERTY LINES, AND SITE COMPONENTS ....................................................... 566 USING STRUCTURAL TOOLS ................................................. 573 AREA ANALYSIS TOOLS ........................................................ 585 GROUPING ........................................................................... 594 SAVING & LOADING GROUPS ............................................... 603 CREATING 3D SWEEPS ......................................................... 605 CREATING A RADIAL ARRAY................................................. 607 EDITING A CUT PROFILE ...................................................... 610 UPDATE TUTORIALS ............................................................. 613 WALL JOINS AND ATTACHMENTS ......................................... 613 DETAILING AND VISIBILITY SETTINGS................................ 619

6

Autodesk Revit 5.1 Tutorials
These self-paced tutorials are designed as an introduction to Autodesk Revit functionality and techniques. In most instances, the tutorials and project files utilize Metric units of measurement. There are some cases however, especially when units of measurement are not relevant to the learning objectives of the tutorial, the exercise may use an imperial template and/or components. Whenever units of measurement are necessary, both the imperial and metric units are supplied with the imperial unit followed by the metric in brackets. Units may or may not be the result of a direct conversion. For example, 30' 0" [10meters]. If necessary, you can set the projects units of measurement by selecting Units from the Settings menu.
If you would like to provide feedback regarding these tutorials, please email us at: revit.documentation@autodesk.com

Publication Date: 26 March, 2003

7

Using These Tutorials
These tutorials have been designed to run concurrently with your Autodesk Revit software. Tutorials open on the upper-right section of your screen and allow you to run both the tutorial and the software simultaneously. In the instructions that follow, you will learn how to navigate through the tutorials, print the tutorials, and view the table of contents.

Training File Location
Many tutorials require you to open an Autodesk Revit training file. These files were installed with your software in the directory chosen at the time of installation. Because some exercise files can be used with both Metric and Imperial exercises, there is a Common directory where some of the files are located. The tutorial will point you to the Common directory when necessary.

Tip: Unless you changed the directory location during installation, the default location of the training files is:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit\Training When opening a file, you can utilize the icons located on the left side of the Open dialog. If you scroll to the bottom of that section of the dialog, you will find an icon named, Training Files; this link will open the Training directory. Once you select it, you can then navigate to the folders underneath it, Common, Imperial, and Metric.

Navigating within the Tutorials
The tutorial home page provides all the navigational tools you need.

8

Tip: If you place the cursor over a heading, a screen tip will appear with a synopsis of the tutorials you will find on that page. At the bottom of each tutorial, there are additional navigation tools. Click on the Home icon to return to the tutorial home page. If there are related tutorials, forward and back buttons may appear.

Tip: Once again, if you place the cursor over one of the arrows, a screen tip will appear indicating where the link leads to. In addition, you can use the <Backspace> key on your keyboard to return to the previous page.

Printing the Tutorials
Many users find it helpful to print the tutorial rather than work with tiled windows. To print a tutorial, select Print from the toolbar at the top of the screen.

Printing a Tutorial

When printing, you may want to use the print option, Print all linked documents. This can save significant time when printing tutorials, such as Exploring Autodesk Revit, where the tutorial consists of more than one html page.

9

Printing All Linked Documents

Printing a Tutorial Manual
If you would like to view and print the tutorials as a complete or partial manual, select Documents on the Web from the Help menu.

Note: You must have a .pdf reader in order to view the file.

Viewing the Table of Contents
By default, the table of contents is not visible in order to conserve screen space. If you would like to see the tabs in order to navigate through the tutorials using the table of contents, search, or index tools, select Show from the Toolbar. You can also select Options and choose Show Tabs.

Showing the Table of Contents

Once open, you can navigate through the tutorials by opening each book. You will find that navigating through the table of contents is identical to using the navigation pages.

10

Tutorial Table of Contents

Tip: At any time within the tutorials, you can select Locate from the tutorial Toolbar and the table of contents will open to the page you are in.

11

Getting Started

Concepts and Principles
Introduction
Autodesk Revit is the most revolutionary architectural product on the market today, offering considerable advantages over traditional CAD software packages. A true parametric building modeler that allows architects to create designs in ways never before possible, Autodesk Revit contains intelligent building components, views, and annotations, all both parametric and bidirectionally associated. Within Autodesk Revit, each component is linked through a high performance change propagation engine, allowing a single change in any model view to be propagated throughout all views, both parametrically and bi-directionally. Autodesk Revit gives you the tool that makes more projects happen than ever before!.

Concepts and Principles of the use of Autodesk Revit software can be broken down into the following three areas:

Administrative Structure & Build up
Reference Planes (Datum Lines) Categories and Sub-Categories Components Attributes (display controls) Family Editor Flexibly Imported data

Navigation and Display
Views – Plan, Sections, Elevation, 3D

12

Scale attribute of views Level of detail Output Drawings Callouts Perspective Views Schedules 13 .

provided greater flexibility. 14 . objects are not layered as in traditional CAD packages. medium and fine level of detail. building levels are defined as planes. As with traditional CAD. Not only do you use these for switching components on and off in a view. Revit objects can be displayed at coarse. but also for scheduling quantities and areas from your model. or as with Revit family objects be toggled on or off depending upon their viewing direction in Plan. so that changes to a level's height automatically propagate changes to the linked objects. Within Revit. medium or fine levels of detail.Concepts and Principles Administrative Structure and Build-up Within Autodesk Revit. Objects are associated to these levels. Reflected or 3D with the option of a coarse. but are controlled using subcategories. objects can simply be toggled on or off for visibility purposes.

Revit is able to read and import data from a wide variety of foreign CAD packages. to detailed design.Within Revit. 15 . allowing the building’s width to be adjusted while Revit automatically adjusts the positions of intermediate members. including construction documentation. such as DXF. These components are called families and there are several different types. walls and floors. A Standard Family can be created by defining the geometry and parameter in the family editor. and Families In Place. As such. There are System Families. are predefined within Revit. site information or to link to standard details. A System Family. Such data can be used to provide underlays of existing conditions. For example you. Revit provides the user with the basic building components enabling the creation of a functional Single Building Model. the user. A Family in Place is created within the project is dependant upon the model geometry. Many different types can be made for this family and used throughout the project. Standard Families. You can modify and define new types by modifying the parameters. Objects such as doors and windows are examples of these. Revit can export to a variety of industry standard CAD file formats. allowing changes of basic parametric characteristics to be propagated throughout. a building can be taken from schematic concept. DWG and DGN. objects can be defined as mutually dependant (eg doors and windows are dependant on walls). have the ability to specify a component such as trussed rafters. such as levels. As well as importing foreign data. or stand-alone (eg: furniture). The user has the ability to create their own parametric objects. maintaining flexibility throughout the process.

The browser provides views of your Single Building Model. while the fine level of detail (at 1:50) would enable display of the external cavity walls with all components detailed and appropriately filled / hatched. for example a general arrangement drawing of the ground floor plan at a coarse level of detail at 1:500 scale. and 3D views. walls would be displayed with a user specified fill style (eg. Drawing view scales and levels of detail are specified individually for each view of the model. in plan. Within the coarse level of detail (at 1:500). sections.Navigation and Display The Revit project browser displays the model files in a logical tree structure. elevations. solid fill). while a copy of that view could display at 1:50 scale with a fine level of detail. enabling. 16 .

perspective and clipped model views may also be assembled. for example. Hence. Three-dimensional shaded. Once complete. sheets can be output to plotting using standard printer/plotter drivers. we create drawing sheets containing titleblocks. the detail element of a slab junction in the 2D specification would automatically update. upon which we assemble our various views and call-outs (enlarged details).Output The Autodesk Revit “Single Building Model” philosophy enables rapid and efficient progress from the 3D model to begin detailing in 2D to commence creation of the detailed construction documents. Within Autodesk Revit. 2D detailing may either be standalone or locked to the 3D model. 17 . Schedules are specified as views and can either be displayed on drawing sheets or export as text files to external programs. should a floor level increase in the 3D model.

we will demonstrate: • • • • • The ease of use of Autodesk Revit Ease of making major design changes Design Associativity Single Model. In this exercise.Exercise The purpose of this exercise is to demonstrate some the benefits of Autodesk Revit's Parametric Building modeller. Single Data Source Custom Building Components The final design is shown in the figure below. 18 .Project Based Training Exploring Autodesk Revit .

This file is essentially new with only slight modifications made to it in order to facilitate training. 1. two storey building. From the File menu. you will create a new.. A DWG file containing site information will be imported before you begin the design. open Getting Started. From the Metric folder.rvt. Begin the Design In this exercise. scroll down the icons and select Training Files. which you will then modify. Opening the Training Files Folder 3.. select Open. choose Import/Link. DWG/DXF/DGN. select Training Files. Use an Existing Site Plan A DWG file containing a simple site plan will be used to locate the building. 2.Autodesk Revit User Interface The following image outlines the basic user interface for Revit. In the lower left corner of the dialog.. Creating a New Project 1. The shape of the floor plate will begin as an L shape. 19 . From the File menu. We will use the Link command to import the site plan. On the left side of the dialog.

Select the file. To view the entire site plan. select from the design bar and select the imported geometry. choose from the toolbar and select Zoom to Fit from the pulldown menu .Open the Metric Folder.dwg. 2. 20 . The new building will be designed in the lower left site boundary. choose Link and Current View Only. Select Lock Objects from the Edit menu to lock the imported geometry in place. The site plan should appear as shown. Getting_Started_Site. Import/Link Options 3. Also select Preserve Colors and then click Open to link to the DWG file. In the lower left corner of the dialog. 4. To keep the imported geometry stationary. This will prevent the imported geometry from moving.

21 .dwg' directory tree so that you see all of the layers from the original file that are available for selection. Select the DWG/DXF/DGN Categories tab. Choose OK to set the visibility. To do this. To make it from the toolbar and choose the option easier to sketch in this area.5. (do not uncheck the 'Getting_Started_Site. select Zoom In Region. The exterior walls will be added to the site-plot in the lower left corner. This will zoom you into this square. 6. choose Visibility/Graphics from the View menu. The imported geometry should appear as shown below.dwg. we will display only the entities created on the layer called SITE_BOUNDARIES. except the layer called 'SITE_BOUNDARIES'. Move the cursor to the upper right corner of the lot and click the left mouse button again. Move the cursor to the lower left corner of the site-plot and click with the left mouse button to begin creating a window to define the region to zoom around. indented under Getting_Started_Site. Uncheck all of the layers.dwg'). Expand the 'Getting_Started_Site. To clear the display of unnecessary clutter.

select the type of wall to be created as Basic Wall : Generic . Modify the wall so the distance of the wall is 30000mm as shown below.Sketch the Outer Walls 1. end points aligned to other segments. from the Design Bar on the left 2. etc. From the Options Bar. at the bottom of the view. Select the wall to be created from the drop-down list below the standard toolbar. Set the Height to Explicit and set the value to 7000. 5. Do not worry about the initial size. Your dimensions values may differ from the figure. 3. Sketch the walls as shown below. To 22 . the second pick is the end point. the exterior face of the wall will most often be in the correct position. choose the hand side of the Autodesk Revit window. Notice the system will assist you in sketching by snapping and adding temporary dashed lines to indicate when sketching horizontally. as shown. Pick a start point of the wall using the left mouse button to begin creating the walls. Choose the button and select lower horizontal wall. if you sketch clockwise. 4. vertically. select Chain and to create straight walls that are chained together as they are being sketched. Tip: When sketching walls. perpendicular to other segments.200mm. 6. The first pick is the start point. This will display the temporary dimensions which locate the wall. To begin laying out the walls.

vertical wall segment and set the dimension to 30000mm. left. 7. drag the wall to the desired location. This will be changed in the next section. 23 . You can also pick the wall and holding the left mouse button down. horizontal wall shown below and modify the dimension to 15000mm. Enter the dimension value in millimetres. select the dimension text and edit the value. Select the upper.modify the dimension value. Note the position of your walls with respect to the site boundaries may be slightly different. choose the middle. Next. 8.

To place the dimension. To capture our design intent. vertical wall and modify the dimension to 15000mm as shown below. 24 . we will create dimensions to control the wall size and placement. 2.9. Capturing Design Intent 1. move the cursor above the top horizontal wall and pick with the left mouse button. select the middle. Choose from the Basics tab of the design bar to create dimensions. Select the two vertical wall segments shown below using the left mouse button to dimension the length of the top horizontal wall. Next.

If the lock symbol is not displayed.Notice the dimension text appears small. (wall centreline to centreline). These will be discussed later. 4. The size displayed on screen is dependent on the scale of the view. Permanent dimensions are displayed at their specified height (4mm is the default). The text of the dimension will become large. (like the text of the temporary dimensions). Because the overall dimension. There are also lock symbols which appear. Create a dimension for the right side vertical wall and place the dimension as shown. 25 . when it is modifiable. must remain at 30000mm we will use the lock function to maintain the dimension. 3. Select the symbol on the dimension just created to lock it. which we will modify later. select and then select the dimension to display the lock.

Move the mouse to a location where the dimensions should be placed and pick with the left mouse button to place the dimension as shown below.5. 26 . To lock the dimension length of the top horizontal wall. 6. choose and select the dimension to display the lock symbol. Now the dimensions to control the rest of the model will be created. then select the unlocked icon to lock it. Choose and select the three horizontal walls.

7. The unlocked symbols. Once the dimension values are correct we will lock the lower 15000mm value. When it is blue. Select the symbol to lock the dimension as shown. it means it can be modified. Notice the dimension text becomes larger and turns from black to blue. should appear. Choose and select the middle horizontal wall. modify the dimension value as shown. If necessary. 27 . 8. (one for each dimension). Choose and select the dimension leader line.

Create a dimension string for the three vertical walls as shown below. Check the dimension values and modify if necessary.9. Lock the 15000mm dimension value as shown. 28 . 11. 10.

select the upper horizontal site boundary. then select the upper horizontal wall. Create another dimension to locate the right vertical wall to the right vertical site boundary as shown.12. 13. 29 . Next the walls will be located with respect to the site boundary. with the left mouse button. With selected. Move the mouse to the location to place the dimension.

Choose and select the upper horizontal wall. meaning it is modifiable. Select the rightmost vertical wall and modify the distance from the this wall to the right site boundary to 3000mm. The value of the two new dimensions locating the walls to the site boundaries will be modified. Modify the value to 3000mm by selecting the dimension text with the left mouse button. Notice the dimension text becomes larger and is now blue. then entering the new value followed by a carriage return. 15. 30 .14.

dwg and choose OK.dwg". This will be done using the Visibility/Graphics command. select Tag from the Drafting menu. 3. 2. click the DWG/DXF/DGN Categories tab and scroll to the DWG file "Getting_Started_Site.Controlling the Display To simplify the display we will turn off the site boundaries. Choose View and then select Visibility/Graphics. Uncheck the entry for Getting_Started_Site. Determine the Room Area We will now add a Room Tag to the design. 2. 1. From the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 1. The Room Tag will give us the properties of the room. When the View Visibility/Graphics dialogue box appears. including the room area. or choose Room 31 . Select a location within the walls to place the room tag.

do not worry. The current room area will display in the dialogue box. 5. The Element Properties dialogue box will appear. If your value is different. 32 . we will make changes to the design and modify dimensions shortly. Select and then select the room tag. Choose Properties from the popup.3. 4. Press the right mouse button (right-click) to display the popup menu.

Create a Room Area Schedule A Room Area schedule will be created. 'Number'. then holding the <Ctrl> key. Choose 33 . to add these fields to be displayed. and 'Name'. From the menubar. Choose Rooms and click OK. Schedules are live parametric views of our project and update when the model geometry is updated. Choose to close the dialogue box. 1. choose View. Select 'Department'. select 'Level'. Schedule/Quantities. 3. New. 'Area'. 2. The Schedule Properties dialogue box will appear. The default tab to appear is the "Fields" tab. From here we must define what fields our schedule will display.6. The New Schedule dialogue box will appear.

5. to Choose to add the new field. 34 .Rearrange the fields as shown below. select the field and choose either or . A new custom field called "Construction Phase" will be created. The order in which the fields will appear on the schedule (from left to right) is the same as the order they appear in the right column (top to bottom). Choose create a new field. 6.4. Enter the name as 'Construction Phase' and the set type as Text. To change the position of a field.

Next. The schedule will be set up to display the grand totals for all rooms and will be grouped by Floor. Select the field. To do this.7. Make sure the Header and Grand Totals boxes are checked. 35 . choose the Formatting tab. Area and select Calculate totals. choose the Sorting/Grouping tab and select 'Level' from the Sort by: pulldown list. 8.

11. (since we are grouping by levels. choose the Level field.9. Next. 36 . and check Hidden Field. we will not need to see this as a scheduled column) 10. Choose to create the schedule view. Activate the view Floor Plan: Level 1 by selecting it from the project browser or by selecting it by name from the Window menu.

13. 15. 37 . View the schedule by choosing it in the Project Browser. Choose and select the dimensions between the three horizontal walls. The final values are shown in the figure below. Look at the room schedule and notice how the room area has updated. Modify the 20000mm dimension back to 15000mm. 14. Select the middle horizontal wall and modify the dimension shown to 20000mm.12. The room area should be approximately 663 square meters. Unlock the dimension between the middle horizontal wall the lower horizontal wall.

38

Change the Design
An entrance will now be added to the design. 1. Within the Floor Plan: Level 1, select and use the Basic Wall : Generic 200mm to add the walls for the entrance as shown. Both walls are 9000mm long. Wall lengths may be modified after they are completed.

2. 3.

To split the walls, choose Split Walls and Lines from the Tools menu or from the Toolbar. The cursor will change to indicate the split tool. Select the horizontal wall at the intersection with the newly added wall as shown in the next figure. The cursor will snap to the intersection.

4.

With the split tool active, split the vertical wall as shown below.

39

5.

Select the button and choose the two wall segments to be deleted. Use the <Ctrl> key to select multiple segments. Choose the to remove the two segments of wall as shown. When you delete the small wall segments, your dimensions may lose some of the dimension segments. We will re-edit the dimensions later.

6.

7.

Look at the room schedule, you will notice the area is now updated. Return to the Floor Plan: Level 1.

8.

Choose the button and select the dimension shown below (highlighted in red). Your dimensions may look different because of the segments deleted.

40

9. Click the right mouse button to activate the popup menu. Select Re-edit Witness Lines to add more witness lines to this dimension string. Deleting the wall segments in the previous steps may cause some of the dimension segments to also delete. If this is the case, simply add the witness lines to create the dimension shown. A left mouse click in "space", (somewhere off the geometry), will complete the editing of the dimensions.

10. Repeat this process for the dimension shown below.

11. Choose

and modify the dimensions as shown if necessary. 41

12. To fillet the walls, select the button and then select the Fillet arc from the sketching options. Select the two walls as shown, then slowly move the mouse to form the desired radius.

13. Modify the radius to 8000mm as shown.

14. Look at the Room Area Schedule view. Notice the area has now updated.

42

Create New Floor Levels
The building will be two storeys high. The exterior walls will rise 1200mm above the roof. A level will be added to control this height. 1. Levels must be created in an elevation view. To open the South elevation view, double pick the view by it's name in the Project Browser. You can also select the view name from the project browser and press the right mouse button to display a popup menu of options (open, rename, delete, etc.) for the view.

2.

The south elevation view will appear. The extents of the levels will be modified.

3.

There are currently two levels in the design called Level 1 and Level 2. To change the extents of the levels, choose and place the cursor over the level. When the level pre-highlights, press the left mouse button to select it. A blue dot will appear at each end of the level. Select one of the dots and drag the endpoint (horizontally) to the desired location. Notice the Level 2 endpoints also move because the two levels are locked together. Repeat for both ends.

4. Select the height tag of the Level 2 or the dimension between the two levels to modify the level's height to 3500mm as shown below.

5.

To create another level, choose from the Basics toolbar and sketch the level. Click once for the start point and then again for the end point (text end).

43

6.

Modify the height of the level to 3500mm above the Level 2, (7000mm above Level 1), by selecting the height dimension. Also change the name to Roof by selecting the level id tag. Note: After renaming the Level, Revit will prompt you to rename all corresponding views; click Yes.

7.

Create the final level 1200mm above the Roof level and name it Parapet. When prompted, choose Yes to rename all corresponding views.

Modify the Wall Properties
To control the height of the exterior walls so they extend to the level Parapet, the height constraint (Top Constraint) for these walls will be modified. 1. Activate the Floor Plan: Level 1 view by selecting the view from the Project Browser. You can also go to this view by double picking on the level target or choose Window from the menu and select the view to be active by name. Choose and create a window around the entire model by pressing and holding the left mouse button, drag the mouse from one corner of the model to the other and release the mouse button. All entities should highlight.

2.

3.

Choose from below the standard toolbar. The filter dialogue box will appear as shown below.

44

4.

Uncheck all categories except Walls and choose except walls. Choose the

to filter out all objects

5.

button to display the wall properties.

Note: If you included other items in the selection, such as the dimensions or the room tag, the properties button will not be available.

6.

Select in the Value cell for Top Constraint. A pull down list will appear.

45

7. 8.

Select the option, Up to level: Parapet. Choose

to update the properties.

Activate the South Elevation view. Notice the walls now extend to the level Parapet.

9.

Choose and select the level Parapet. Modify the height of the Parapet level to 2500mm above Roof. The walls will update to the new height. to restore the height to1200mm above the level Roof.

10. Choose

11. To quickly go to the floor plan view of Level 2, double click on the level target symbol in the South elevation view. The Floor Plan: Level 2 view will now be open and active. 12. From the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, choose tag to the second floor. and add a room

13. Activate the view Room Area Schedule to see the updated room area.

14. Change to the view Floor Plan: Level 2. Choose tag and choose .

then select the room

15. In the Properties dialogue, change the Name from "Room" to "Open 2" and choose to update. 16. Notice the name has changed in the Room Area Schedule. 17. In the Room Area Schedule, select the Name cell for Room 1 and change the name to "Open 1" .

46

18. Activate the view Floor Plan: Level 1 to see the tag update.

47

Interior Layout
We will now add the interior walls to the design. The wall type will change from the Basic Wall : Generic - 200mm wall to Basic Wall : Interior - 135mm Partition (2-hr). 1. 2. The first set of walls will be created on the ground floor. Activate the plan view, Floor Plan: Level 1 by choosing Window and select the view by name. Select the and then choose the wall type Interior 135mm Partition (2hr) from the pull down list. This is a 135mm thick wall whose height property is up to Level 2. Sketch the wall segment shown below.

3.

Add two horizontal walls to divide the new space into three rooms as shown.

4. 5.

Check the Room Area Schedule. Notice the area for "Room" has updated. Choose and create dimensions as shown. To create the dimension string, select the first wall then the second, third and last wall. Then place the dimension.

6.

To make the three rooms equal widths, select the symbol. The symbol will change to and the three distances measured by this dimension will be equal. 48

7.

In the plan view of the first floor, add a room tag to each of the new rooms. The Room Area Schedule view should now update as shown.

Adding Components to Level 2
1. 2. 3. 4. Activate the view Floor Plan: Level 2 to add walls to this level. Choose the view by double picking the name from the Project Browser (or from the Window menu). Notice you can see the walls from the lower level. This geometry can be referenced when adding new walls to this level. Choose and make sure the Basic Wall : Interior - 135mm Partition (2-hr) wall is the active wall type. Sketch a wall as shown.

5.

Our intent is to have this wall and the first floor wall below it, always be in the same plan location. To do this we will use the Align command. Choose Align from from the Toolbar. the Tools menu or by selecting Move the cursor to the right (outside) face of the wall on level 1. The wall face will pre-highlight as shown. If you are not sure you have the correct face, press the <Tab> key to toggle through all possible selections. Select the outer face.

6.

49

Choose and select the wall just created on level 2. 8.7. 50 . select the symbol . Move the wall. to lock which will now appear as 9. Modify the wall position back to 4000mm from the left outer wall. notice how the wall on floor 1 also moves. Move the cursor to the right face (outside) face of the wall added to the second floor and select. 10. The second wall should now appear directly over the first wall. The symbol will appear. 11. To permanently lock the two walls. Add two more walls on the second floor as shown.

Save the model. from the toolbar and save the file as. 1. Check the updated room schedule. Getting 51 .Add room tags to the three new rooms. Select Started..rvt.

Interior walls have been added to both levels 5. Open the Model 1.rvt. From the Metric folder. To retrieve this model. 3. and select the Training Folder icon from the 2. 52 .Adding Components In this portion of the exercise. Choose from the object tool bar and then select M_Sgl Flush : 914mm x 2134mm from the pulldown list. To open the new model. click on the name of the model. Getting_Started_Components. To do this. Expand the view to fill the view window. choose left side of the dialog. 5. along a more complete model has been created for you. a door will be added to the north face of the building near the stairs. To maximize the view. Most of the windows have been added to the exterior walls Stairs have been added at two locations First. Open the view Floor Plan: Level 1. such as doors and windows to the design. 7.rvt and save it to your working directory. Click Open. Some of the additions to the design include: 3. pick the icon in the upper right corner of the window. Choose Close from the File menu. Move the cursor to the wall the door will be added to. close the current project. we will add some standard components. To avoid confusion with the old model. select Getting_Started_Components. In order to speed things. Doors have been added to most interior rooms and some exterior exits 6. you can select the view window on screen or choose the view by name from the Window menu or from the Project Browser. As the cursor moves. Floors added to the levels Ground floor and Floor 2 4. 4.

doors and windows can be added in plan. walls. using the button to see it's placement. Activate the 3D View: V1. Zoom To Fit to enlarge the image. elevation. 1. Move the cursor to the wall shown below and click once to place the door in the position shown. 4. 3. select the control arrows to flip the door hand or facing. locating the door. section or 3D views. Zoom In Region command under the 53 . 2. Activate the view Floor Plan: Level 2. Choose from the design bar and then select M_Sgl Flush : 914mm x 2134mm from the pulldown list. Zoom in around the new door. If the door is not positioned correctly. Place the door as shown. Adding Components in a 3D View In Revit. Zoom. Use View.temporary dimensions will appear.

2. Sections are created much Sketch the section as shown. (either Floor Plan: Level 1 or Floor Plan: Level 2). Adding Components in Section Views A section view will be added to the design. (You may also use the blue directional arrows which appear above the section head when the section is selected to flip the section. 4. To change the door type. The section arrow will change direction. Select the option Flip Section.) 54 . To flip the direction of the section. from the Basics tab of the design bar. Choose like a level. 3. 1. Select the drag handle on the right vertical line and drag it to include the far right walls as shown. Press the right mouse button to activate the popup menu. activate a plan view. Choose the new door type from the pulldown list. choose and select the section line. The section head will be at the first pick point. Change the direction as shown in the image above.5. After creating the section you must define the area you would like in the view. Change the door to M_Cased Opening: 914 x 2134 mm. simply pick and select the new door in any view. To add the section view.

simply select and choose the door type as M_Sgl Flush : 914mm x 2134mm from the pulldown list. To add components in this view. you can double pick on the section head or choose Goto Section View from the popup menu. To view the section view.5. Move the mouse in the section view window and place the door. 6. (The actual door position does not matter). 55 . Go to the section view. 7.

a green dashed line will appear. Notice the copy command can be executed using the standard Windows Ctrl + C accelerator key combination. With the 3D View: V1 active. To paste the windows. To select multiple items. From the Edit menu. press and hold the <Ctrl> key. use Ctrl + V. we will begin by copying the existing windows to new locations. choose Copy to Clipboard to copy the windows to the clipboard.Copying Components Since some windows have already been added. choose Paste from Clipboard from the Edit menu (or Ctrl + V). The copied windows will appear at the tip of the cursor. Components can be copied from one view to another. 56 . Move the mouse until the windows reach the target wall. while holding the <Ctrl> key. Copy the six windows to the clipboard. Select the six windows (the 3 original and the 3 copied). Choose and select each of the three windows on that wall. The system will display the windows in a plan view symbol. Move the cursor to the second level and when the windows are at the default elevation (915mm above the floor). Activate the Floor Plan: Level 1 view and zoom in around the corresponding wall to the right of the entrance. To paste all six windows. zoom in on the exterior wall to the left of the curved entrance. Place the windows as shown by clicking the left mouse button. using Ctrl + C. Place the windows as shown.

We will use arrays to add the remaining windows to the south face of the building. click Tag All Not Tagged from the Drafting tab of the Design bar. Choose Array from the Edit menu or select directly from the Toolbar. Creating Arrays of Components Components can also be arrayed. Use the Copy to Clipboard command from the edit menu (or Ctrl + C) to copy them to the clipboard. select the two windows on the south wall as shown. From the options bar set the Number of Copies to 3 and set the option Move to Last. Activate Floor Plan: Level 1. Select Windows and choose OK. Uncheck the option Group and Associate from the options bar.Note: To display the window tags. 4. Activate the view 3D View: V1 to see the results. The resulting array is shown below. 1. Click one of the selected windows and move the mouse to the position of the last member of the pattern. 2. 3. Copy the arrayed windows to the second level. 8. Click the left mouse button again to place the windows. Select the six windows from the array in the plan view of the ground floor. 57 . Using the <Ctrl> key.

Activate either the 3D view or the Floor Plan: Level 2 view. to the west wall. This is a precaution built into Autodesk Revit to prevent the incorrect placement of components. Use the Copy command from the edit menu (or Ctrl + C) to copy them to the clipboard. Under normal circumstances. 58 . Use Paste from the Edit menu (or Ctrl + V) to paste them on the second floor. Use Paste from the Edit menu (or Ctrl + V) to paste them on the west wall. Note: A warning box may appear to inform you that a window conflicts with an existing wall. For the purpose of this exercise. the designer would have to redesign the facade or the wall layout to resolve the conflict. Copy the windows on the south wall. Hold the <Ctrl> key and select the 12 windows from the 3D View: V1. 6.5. this warning can be ignored.

Note: The legend appears with values because the attribute of Department for the room tags has been assigned to several rooms. 5. With the view.). If the linked site plan is visible. If no values were assigned to the attributes. choose OK to continue. right click the view. Floor finish. Topography. right click on the view Floor Plan: Copy of Level 1. Now the room fill will be added. 4. 3. 2. Floor Plan: Colour Fill Level 1 from the Drafting tab of the design bar. First we will make a copy of the view Floor plan: Level 1. and Site visibility has been disabled. the warning message appears indicating Floors. Floor Plan: Level 1 and choose Duplicate from the popup menu. 6. choose View. Choose OK to continue. 1. etc. From the project browser. 59 . Choose Rename from the popup menu and change the name to "Colour Fill Level 1". Select a location and place the legend with the left mouse button. choose appear at the cursor.dwg from the list. Department. A view named Copy of Level 1 will be created. From the project browser.Colour Filled Areas In this section. we will demonstrate how to copy views and apply colour filled areas to the rooms. Visibility and uncheck Getting_Started_Site. The room fill view should appear as shown. The user would then have to choose what criteria to use in the room fill (Wall finish. A legend will active. the legend would appear without pre-selected values. When the legend is placed.

60 . Choose to update. Choose to edit the default values for the room fill.7. 8. Select the cell for Fill Pattern for Marketing. These values were selected by default based on the 'Department' attribute. Change the fill pattern from Solid Fill to Diagonal up. Choose and select the legend.

Notice a new color appeared for this new department. . In the Properties dialogue box. Open the view Floor Plan: Level 1. create a new value for Department to "Open". Now select the room tag in the large open area (Open 1) and choose 11.9. 10. 12. Switch back to the Floor Plan: Color Fill Level 1. then choose . 61 .

7. Select the Activate View command from the View menu.Drawings A drawing sheet will be added to the project. Choose Visibility/Graphics from the View menu and make sure the imported DWG file (Getting_Started_Site. the drawings will also update. Select the view. New.dwg) is unselected. When the design updates. then choose . and Sheet. Move the mouse to the desired location and left click to place the view as shown. The red outline will appear showing the extents of view. choose View. 3. 5. 6. choose View Properties from the View menu. 2. then choose OK to add the title block to the sheet. This view is now active and can be modified just as if you were working on the view Floor Plan: Level 1. 62 . Next. Choose A0 metric from the list. The viewport will highlight in red. choose Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. Floor Plan: Level 1 from the View dialogue box. Use Zoom to Fit and the sheet with the title block should appear as shown below. 1. Select and then select on the view. creating a drawing of the design is a simple matter of adding views to drawing sheets. Since Revit projects are stored in a single data source. 4. To add a view. so it will not display in the drawing sheet. To create the drawing sheet view.

Make sure the View Scale is set to 1 : 100 and choose OK to change the scale of the view. Position the view as shown below. 11. Position the view as shown below then press the left mouse button. As you move the view within the sheet. Choose Deactivate View from the View menu or from the right-click popup menu. 12.8. click and hold down the left mouse button while the pointer is over Level 2 in the Project Browser. To do this. dashed-line appears when the two views are aligned. The same red outline will appear. Release the mouse button when the pointer is in the viewing window. Add the Room Area Schedule to the sheet. 63 . Select the view from the Project Browser and drag it directly into the sheet. 9. You will now add the Floor Plan: Level 2 view directly from the Project Browser. notice a green. 10.

Column widths move by dragging the blue control arrows. 1. To do this choose View Properties from the View menu. The column 'Construction Phase' will be removed from the schedule. Right click the schedule and select Edit Structure . Resize each column so the schedule appears as shown below. 64 . Select and zoom around the schedule on the drawing sheet.13. Split the Schedule The schedule layout will be split to better utilize the available space. 2.

. Open the View Sheets: A101-unnamed. Select 'Construction Phase' from the right column list and choose Remove.. Select the Edit. Now the schedule will be split into two parts. 4. 65 . Select the schedule on the drawing sheet. The schedule will highlight as shown. 7. Choose to close the dialogue box. button for Fields to access the fields tab of the Schedule properties. 5.3. 6.

9. The table should look something like this. on the right side of the table where the split should occur. Position the new bottom half by selecting blue dot in the middle of the schedule and dragging it into position. To split the table select the break "Z-break" symbol. 66 .8.

1. Modify the view extents as shown below.Curtain Walls A design change will be made to the front entrance. 7. A section of Basic Wall : Generic . 2. Activate the Floor Plan: Level 1. 5. To do this we will first add a new elevation view to make the splitting easier. A curtain wall will be added from Level 2 to the Roof level. Move the mouse towards the double glass door in the arc wall. 3. This will display the view extents for this elevation view. You can also use the project browser to open the view. The round entrance wall will be split (horizontally) into three walls. Choose and select the arrow of the elevation symbol.200mm will be added from the roof to the parapet levels. The middle wall will be replaced by curtain wall. 67 . 4. Double click on the arrow to open the view. Left click to place the elevation tag as shown. Zoom in and rotate the elevation symbol so that it faces the double doors. 6. The round Basic Wall : Generic 200mm will be changed to rise only to Level 2. Choose from the View tab of the Design Bar.

Split the wall again at the Roof level. 10. move the pointer over the curved wall until the edge of the curved wall prehighlights. move the mouse until the cursor snaps to Level 2 and left click to split. The type of the middle curved wall. 11. 9. will be changed. choose Curtain Wall: Curtain Wall 1 to change the type. 10. (between Level 2 and Roof). The curved wall will now be split at level 2 and then at the roof level. Click the left mouse button to pick the wall section. From the or choose Split Walls and Lines from the Tools menu. Open the 3D view: V1.8. From the type list. To select the middle wall section. Adding the Curtain Grid will cause the wall to conform to the round wall. 68 . toolbar. 12. The curtain wall currently consists of one panel which is why the wall appears as a straight segment. choose With the cursor on the curved wall. Choose and select the middle curved wall.

69 . 15. choose design bar. Pick with the left mouse button to place two vertical grid lines. change the type from M_empty panel to M_glass panel. First you will change the curtain wall panel from an empty panel to a glass panel. Add a horizontal grid line to divide the panels in half. From the Options Bar. the system will automatically snap at the 1/3. 17. To add the mullions. The Curtain Grid will be created. All grid line segments should highlight.13. then the Mullions will be added. dividing the panel into thirds as shown. Divide the three panels in to thirds again to produce the following: 18. not on the existing panel. Click the left mouse button to add the mullions. From the type drop-down menu. Move the mouse pointer on a grid line. Pick the straight panel. Choose Curtain Grid from the Modelling tab of the design bar (or from the Modelling menu). 16. Notice the grid lines appear on the radius of the defining curve. 14. or Mullion from the Modelling tab of the 20. When creating the curtain grid. 19. 1/2 and 2/3 points along the wall but the grid lines can be placed at any location. select All Empty Segments.

The design should look like the figure below. 70 . choose Shading from the View menu. To see the model shaded.21.

Do not forget the two small wall segments adjacent to the round wall. choose Roof. from the project browser. The view. Roof by Footprint from the Modeling tab of the design bar. 1. 71 . Floor Plan: Roof. To begin the roof creation. Select all of the remaining exterior walls to form a closed loop. On the Option bar. From the Sketch options. 2. A footprint roof is defined by sketching the boundaries of the roof (similar to a floor). Move the mouse to the north exterior wall. select . must be the active view. 3. uncheck the Defines Slope option. Floor Plan: Roof. (if necessary). and select the wall to draw a line on the wall. Use the control arrows to flip the line to the inside edge of the wall.Adding A Roof A flat roof will be added to the design. 4. Select the view.

Choose below. The new roof is shown in the 3D view 72 . to complete the roof.5.

sheets. schedules. Take a minute to examine the application window when it appears. Status Bar .Contains options for the currently selected object.Where commands can be accessed via pulldown menu.This area displays project views. will appear in the titlebar of the main window. Project1.This is the vertical toolbar on the left of the screen containing the available building components. The User Interface has the following main areas: • • • • • • • • Menu Bar . There can be several viewing windows open at any time. View Window . Start Autodesk Revit.System Fundamentals This exercise will introduce the novice user to the User Interface (UI) of Autodesk Revit and how to use it.This is where the model is displayed. Exercise 1. For many users this will be a review of commands that are found in other software products that use the Microsoft® Windows UI. 2. Toolbar . The default name of the project. families. Design Bar . Project Browser . The User Interface The Autodesk Revit User Interface has a layout similar to many Windows applications.This is where you specify the object type.This area displays a short summary of a menu item or button the pointer is over. Options Bar .This contains common commands often used when working with Revit. and groups. Type Selector . An empty project file is automatically opened when the application is started. 73 .

Commands can be executed by simply clicking on the menu name and then clicking on the command in the menu. you will notice a fly out menu appear with additional commands on it. Note: There are two sets of window control icons. Across the top of the screen are the menus. When the dialog box appears for a file name type in a name such as “exercise1”. 7. A list of commands on that menu will appear. Select the View menu. Choose Save to save the file to the folder. For some commands there are accelerator keys which are shortcuts to executing the command. If you place your cursor over the command and pause it there for a minute. in the upper right corner of the viewing window. 6. The three icons on the top are to control the entire application window. This indicates there are additional commands under the New command. you will notice that some of the commands have accelerator keys to the right of the command name. To display the view in a smaller window. Try this now.3. Move your cursor down the menu and notice that the commands highlight as the cursor passes over them. choose the restore icon . Save or you can simply press and hold the <Ctrl> key on the keyboard and then hit the <S> key on the keyboard. This view is currently maximized. Save has an accelerator command of Ctrl+S. The three below control the viewing windows. That means that to save a file you can either choose File. Notice that the command New has an arrow to the right of it. If a command is not accessible at that point in time then the command will appear as dimmed out. These three are only visible when the current view is maximized. Click on the File menu. The default view is Floor Plan: Level 1. If you look at the figure above. 74 . If you look at the previous figure you will notice that Activate View is not an active choice. 4. For example. 5.

the save command you executed in earlier could also be executed by choosing the button from the toolbar. and select an open view of the project to activate it. To exit the session. 13. As you do this notice in the lower left corner of the window a one line message appears for each command on the Status Bar. Again. Move your cursor over the menu items. The other way is to use the Project Browser. That concludes this exercise. The buttons represent another method of choosing a command. This is a one line help message that tells you what that highlighted command does. choose File and Exit. You can customize the display of these toolbars. 9. There are 2 ways to open or set active existing views of the project. If you look at the application window you will notice there is a window for the current design project. Along the top of the window and along the left side of the window you will notice toolbars with buttons. One way to do this is to remove the command names from the buttons. You can do that by choosing Window and then clicking on Status Bar. Notice the icons remain on the buttons but the names go away. Try removing one of the toolbars now.8. Try that now. This is useful when you become more experienced with the software because it reduces the amount of space needed for the toolbars and gives you more space for actual design work. The window can be resized to fit in the application window by clicking on the maximize icon in the upper right corner of the view window. Click your right mouse button on the view Level 2 and click on Open from the popup menu. Expand the area of the project browser tree called Views by clicking on the plus sign. for the purpose of this exercise bring the toolbar back by choosing Window. 11. It can be identified by the title in the Title bar on top of the window. Level 2 is now open and the active view window. Toolbar and then clicking on the removed toolbar name. and deactivate (check mark off) Text Labels. You can remove any of the toolbars by choosing Window. Do that now by choosing Window\Toolbar. 10. is to use the Window menu. place your cursor on Toolbar. You will see how to get complete on line help later in this exercise. For example. For the purpose of the exercise you should turn the text labels back on by choosing Window. The top toolbar is the Standard toolbar and the left side toolbar is the Design Bar. Click on the menu View. After using the software for a while you may want to turn off the status bar. Now we will change views of the project. 75 . Toolbars and select (check mark on) Text Labels. 12. One. and then click on any of the toolbar names to add/remove them. 14.

You can set the display of the components and sub-components through the use of Colors. and their effects through the Object Styles area. Components and sub-components can have different line colors and materials assigned to them. Snap settings and Dimensioning Styles. Hidden Line). Fill in the Line Style Properties dialog 76 . Click New and enter the name "Roof line". you will learn how to: • • • • Create Create Modify Modify and Apply Line Styles and Apply Material Unit. scroll down the icons and select Training Files. Project Settings are saved in a default project template that you can use to set up the environment of your projects in the future. In the next few steps you will see how to do perform those tasks 5.Settings Exercise You can control your project environment using the Settings menu. First you will create your own line style. Change the view display to Hidden Line (View. 6. Settings. line colors. From the File menu. You can also change the project Units. select Open. On the left side of the dialog. You can create and assign your own line styles. 4. To do this choose Line Patterns from the Settings menu. open the project.rvt. and materials to any of the components and sub-components. Fill Patterns. Opening the Training Files Folder 3. Line Styles and Render Styles. From the Metric folder. 2. In this exercise. Snap and Dimension Settings Accurender Materials Creating a Line Style 1. Click Open.

You will now modify the line color by selecting in the Line Color column. Notice the new line style in the list of defined lines. 77 .box as shown in the next figure. locate the Roof category. 7. Select OK to return to the Object Styles Dialog. 2. When the Object Styles dialog appears. Choose OK to define the line style. Notice the change to the roof's display. This will be done with the Object Styles command. Choose OK to close the Pantone dialog box. This will then select the color numbered bring up the color dialog box. Choose Settings and Object Styles. Choose Ok to exit the dialog and change the image to a Wireframe image. 1. 3. You now have the oak color for the lines and the new line style for the lines. Applying Styles Now that you have defined your line styles you will apply them to the model. Change the settings for the Roof category by selecting "Roof line" for the line pattern. Select 7530.

Change the line color for the subcategory Trim to the Pantone Color 7530 as done in the previous steps. Choose Ok to see the difference. Locate the Window category. 6. Choose Settings and Object Styles. 5. Zoom in on the windows and notice that the line colors for the trim and sash are black. Change the View back to Hidden Line. 78 .4.

Next. This is because the inside trim is the subcategory called Frame/Mullion. Set the image display to Shading (View. The color of the shading does not depend on the line color but rather the material that is assigned to the family type or instance parameter. 8. 79 . Shading).7. Notice the outside trim of the window is brown but the inside window is still black. Go back and change the line color for that subcategory to the Pantone Color 7530. you will define and set some materials. If no material is set then the system uses the default color of grey (for example the floor).

White\Stained. click Edit/New. Dark and click OK. Within the Materials dialog. 13. and click OK. assign the roof material. 14. In the value field for the Structure parameter. 16. 80 . This will be done in a different manner. set the Material to Exterior Window Trim. In the Materials dialog choose Duplicate. click Duplicate once again and create the material.Solid\Oak. click Edit. Set the AccuRender texture to: ACCURENDER\Wood. Next. Exterior Window Trim. From the Settings menu. Choose Modify and select the roof within the 3D view. Expand the ACCURENDER tree and select Roofing\Composition Shingle\Brown. 10. In the Element Properties dialog box. select Roof from the Material drop-down list. Click OK until you return to the view window. 11. Expand the Window branch and for the subcategories of Frame/Mullion and Trim. Assign the material for the exterior trim of the window by selecting Settings/Object Styles.Dark. Click OK. choose Materials.9.No Gloss. 12. Click Select in the AccuRender Texture section of the dialog box. To define the roof's structural material. name the material Roof. 15. Then select Properties.

Note: For some objects. 17. The roof now displays with the new roof material. Modify the material roof so that you can see through the roof inside. If the material is defined in the properties dialog. it overrides the material in the Object Style. Choose Ok.Click OK and return to the viewing window. Choose Settings and Materials. Change the transparency to 50. You can do this by setting the transparency for the material. 81 . the material can be set in the Object Style area or in the Element Properties. Notice in the image you can see through the roof although you can also see it is still there. Choose 'roof' from the Name drop-down menu.

You can do this through category visibility. Delete. 24. You will now delete all of the geometry in the project. Now. Change the transparency back to 0. 82 . From the Model Categories tab. Another way to see through an object is to remove it from display. In this case you will turn off the display of the roof so you can see in the building. This is why you saved everything in the previous step. 20. Select choose Edit.18. Click OK. Choose Ok. 19. Units to bring up the Units dialog box. Choose Visibility/Graphics from the View menu. 22. Roofs. Next. Choose Settings. You need to set the visibility of a category for each view separately. First turn the visibility of the roof back on so that it will also be deleted. Note: Visibility is on a per view basis. Save the project (saves all your work that you have done so far). Now we will set the Units and Dimension settings to be saved into our template for use in future projects. To do this. or 23. Notice the roof disappears from view. return to the Visibility/Graphics dialog and select Roofs. uncheck the category. 21. you will save these settings in a template so you can retrieve them whenever you start a new project. select all components by choosing Modify and clicking in the upper left corner and dragging the cursor and clicking in the lower right corner.

27. 28. When the Save As dialog box appears. to bring up the Temporary Dimension Placement dialog box. Navigate to the Metric Templates directory.. Toggle the options in the following figure: 29. When the Open template dialog appears. Set the Units to Meters and change the Rounding to 3 decimal places. 33. Set the name to Office Template. Choose for Length. 31. you can set the default template. From the File Locations tab. Choose Settings. 32. This will bring up the Format dialog box. Choose Save. set the save as type to Templates Files. select Options. This template would be the default 83 . select the name of your template as the basis for your new project. Select the OK button to save the settings. 30. Choose File and Save As.25. Temporary Dimensions will now reference wall faces by default when drawing walls. Dimensioning and component placement will now be accurate to the nearest 1/1000 of a meter. Select OK in both dialogs to save the settings.. Project (do not use the button). Start a new project by choosing File and New. Tip: From the Settings menu. 26. Temporary Dimensions.

84 .whenever you create a new project.

From the folder. In this exercise. click File. Office Building. Whenever units of measurement are necessary. you can utilize "Jump Snaps" when sketching. ToolTips cooperate with Snapping and provide precise snapping coordinates such as "Endpoint" and "Midpoint". select Open. open the file. Retrieve the Training File 1. scroll down the icons and select Training Files. both the imperial and metric units are supplied with the imperial unit followed by the metric in brackets. Save As. You can set your units preference by selecting Units from the Settings menu. 2. Note: This file is used with several tutorials. 4. On the left side of the dialog. 85 . From the File menu. Units may not be the result of a direct conversion. You can adjust the amount of ToolTip assistance that you receive. If you wish to save your work.rvt. Opening the Training Files Folder 3. In addition. For example. open Floor Plan: Level 1. and save the file with a unique file name. Jump Snaps act as a "snap filter" to increase your sketching accuracy and capture your design intent. Common. you will learn about: ToolTips Controlling ToolTips Snapping Jump Snaps Note: This exercise was created with an imperial template and components. 30' 0" [10meters].ToolTips and Snapping ToolTips provide information about the components within your model. From the Project Browser. In addition.

From the Settings menu. The ToolTip information is identical to the information supplied in the status bar. 3. The ToolTip Assistance options are as follows: None Minim al Norm al No Tooltips are displayed Repetitive ToolTips are not shown. This is the default setting. choose Options. Place your cursor over the double doors. do not select them. Autodesk Revit Options Notice that you can control the amount of ToolTip Assistance that Revit provides you. Repetitive ToolTips continue to display 4. select Normal. Notice that a ToolTip appears. 2. Floor Plan: Level 1 with ToolTip Appearing The ToolTip provides information regarding the preselected component. 86 High . Place your cursor over the west wall until the Tooltip appears. Press <Tab> several times and notice the ToolTip changes as Revit cycles through the selection options. The most repetitive ToolTips do not reappear if they have been shown often and recently. You can control ToolTips as a system option.ToolTips 1. From the ToolTip Assistance drop-down list.

4. the setting is used while working in all projects. In the Floor Plan: Level 1. 2. you can also utilize keyboard shortcuts to override snap settings. From the Type Selector dropdown list. right corner. Use the image below for guidance. select Snaps. click Wall.Click OK. 87 . While sketching.5 1/2" Partition (1-hr). Endpoint ToolTip Notice that the image at the point of the cursor changes to a square and the ToolTip informs you that you are at the Endpoint of the highlighted object. From the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using the image below for guidance. Snapping 1. Move the cursor to the left until you reach the endpoint of the same wall. zoom into the region that includes the room in the upper. Midpoint ToolTip Notice that the image at the point of the cursor changes from an "X" to a triangle when cursor is at the midpoint of the wall. 5. 3. these are called Jump Snaps. select Basic Wall: Interior . A ToolTip also appears informing you that the cursor is located at the midpoint of the highlighted object. Note: If you change the ToolTip Assistance setting. From the Settings menu. place your cursor approximately at the midpoint of the wall shown.

Jump Snap Shortcuts Next to each of the object snap checkboxes is a two-letter acronym. Click Wall and after placing your cursor near the upper.txt. while sketching. This is the keyboard shortcut. 88 . keyboardshortcuts. Using the "SM" Jump Snap 7. 6. type SP. While sketching the wall upwards. This will allow the cursor to snap only to perpendicular points. The cursor will now snap only to the midpoints of lines. or "jump snap". type SC and the cursor snaps to the center points of objects. Finish the wall using the image below for guidance. for that object snap type. For example. type SM and the cursor snaps to midpoints. right room. Tip: The jump snaps are defined and modified within the file. Select the midpoint of the wall shown in the image below. type SM. Click Cancel.

do it now. and do not save the changes made to this file. select File. Otherwise. 89 .Using the "SP" Jump Snap 8. If you have saved the file with a unique name or wish to do so. Close.

for walls. or to the near side of the wall. The fillet is created by clicking the two existing walls and dragging the fillet to the desired location. (Fillet Arc) . Click the button. Options are: • • • Ortho: Used to create sketched entities which are orthogonal. or for family creation. ( Centre-Endpoint Arc) . All lines are created horizontally or vertically. 1. 90 . In this exercise you will create sketches using several different methods.Sketch an arc by defining the both endpoints then a point on the arc. Also notice as you move the cursor to the right and move it up and down a dashed alignment line appears signifying a horizontal line. Drop-down menu allows user to choose if the offset is to the centre. Whenever you need to sketch linear geometry. move your cursor to the right. the rules are the same. Offset: Used to create an automatic offset when drawing lines and walls. (Rectangle) . From the Basics tab of the Design Bar. second for endpoint.Sketch rectangular elements. Requires two left mouse picks. Access the ortho option by holding the Shift key while sketching. Move the cursor away from the end. Chain: Create lines connected end to end.Create an arc tangent to an existing wall by clicking on the wall to start the tangent arc and clicking on the end point of the arc. Hit <Enter> to have the wall length update. Modify the dimension by clicking on it and type in 3m (or 3000).Create an arc by selecting the centre point then the two endpoints.Create lines (default).Create a convex fillet wall between two existing walls. When the fillet is placed the system will trim the existing walls to the fillet. Start a new design. (Circle) .Sketch circles by first selecting the centre point then a point on the radius. one for start point. The fillet will be tangent to the existing walls at both ends. Notice as you move your cursor to the right a temporary dimension appears on the wall so you can see how long it is. As you move your cursor the wall changes in fixed increments. 2. for lines. • • • • • • • 2. select Wall.Creating Your 1st Model Sketching Walls and Lines Knowing the sketching tools and rules in Revit will make your designs easier to create. (Line) . (3 Point Arc) . Notice the dimension remains. First you will sketch the outside walls. (Tangent Arc). When this line appears click to drop the end point approximately as shown. With selected. A toolbar of sketching tools and options will appear once the Wall (or line) has been selected. 1. In this exercise you will create several sketches to learn the tools that you have to use. to the far side.

Place the walls as shown in the next figure. Now try moving the point as you did in the previous step. Click and hold the left mouse button on the circle representing the end point while moving the cursor. notice the walls only move orthographically (horizontal or vertical). Try this. 5. This lock is currently unlocked. even though you used the alignment snap to line them up. notice how the wall joins at the corner. Also.3. Click on the lock to lock it. notice as you bring the cursor up to end the second line. Move the point back so it lines up with the original wall and the alignment line appears. Notice the end point moves and the original line remains. That means you can move the end point of the last wall independent of the first wall. Place the cursor over the right end of the wall and click to start the next wall. Notice two dimensions appear. Choose and select the right vertical line. Move the cursor down so that the alignment line appears signifying a perpendicular wall. The line is finished with a length of 2500mm as shown in the next figure. 7. As you sketch. Notice the horizontal wall and the end point move together. 91 . Also. 4. a horizontal dimension and a vertical dimension. Notice the lock reappears when you click on the endpoint. Notice the lock that appears on the first wall. 6. Turn on the Ortho sketch mode by holding the Shift key down while sketching the two walls as shown in the next figure. 8. an alignment line extends from the first horizontal line when the end point lines up. Type 2500 and press<Enter>. Click there to end the fourth wall.

Choose the 3 Point Arc tool and click on the two open ends of the wall to create a curved wall. enter an appropriate value). the symbol changes to the universal prohibited sign. This will happen in Autodesk Revit when you try to move or place something that is physically impossible. the walls chain together so that the last point of the first line becomes the start point of the next line.9. drop the wall anywhere possible and use the Undo command to go back to the original placement). 11. (If you are not sure where it was originally. Click on the wall shown and move it to the left by placing the cursor over the wall and clicking and holding the left button while dragging the cursor. Notice the wall moves to the left by the incremental value and the other dimension updates accordingly. Lock the lines as shown. Click approximately as shown to complete the wall. 12. After clicking on the second end notice as you move your cursor the wall arc changes gradually. Rather. Use the <Esc> command to stop the wall creation. 10. Sketch the walls as shown in the next figure. Hit <Esc> twice to place you in modify mode. Notice as you pass a point where the configuration of the walls becomes impossible. Select the Chain option. Notice with the poly option as you sketch you do not click a start and an end for each wall segment. Select the wall from the previous step and modify the dimension by clicking on the value and enter 6000 (if your model is not the same size as this. Also notice the wall below that was locked to the first wall moves accordingly. Choose and choose from the Options Bar. Move the wall back to where it was originally. 92 .

93 . Select the two walls as shown below. Make sure the 16. 14. You are now going to remove the corner. Edit menu. To show this first choose Undo to go back to the original shape. Note: Another way to move both of the walls simultaneously is to create a permanent dimension between the two of them and then lock the dimension. To do this choose Trim/Extend from the option is selected in the Option Bar. Now select both walls and modify the dimension as you did in the previous step. Notice that both walls move. First. 17. sketch the diagonal wall as shown below. 15. You are now going to modify the model to cut off a corner. If you wish the two adjacent walls in the previous step to move at the same time you need to select each of them.13. Now select the slanted wall and the horizontal wall to trim.

Select and click on the screen for the start of the box. You can use the sketch tools and trace over the walls. If the sketch lines are on the outside of the walls. 22. Choose from the sketch toolbar. 20. Choose the option and select all of the inside edges of the wall.18. To do this first open the Modelling tab on the Design bar. Choose to see the floor. Choose and . Choose from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19. Another way to easily create the profile collinear with the wall faces is to use the Pick option. Add a fillet wall. With this option instead of sketching each line you pick the wall face and the system creates the line automatically. 23. Now you will add a floor to the walls. This will chain select all walls. Change to a 3D shaded view to better 94 . Delete the arc wall. A floor is a component for which you have to sketch a profile. See if you can identify them. Drag the wall approximately as shown and click to place it. click on the blue controls arrows to flip it inside. An easy way to select all the walls at once is to press the <TAB> key while the cursor is over any wall. Create a rectangular opening for the stairs approximately where shown. Notice as you move the cursor when creating the box all of the different alignment possibilities. Move the corner to the location of the diagonal corner and click again. 21. Click on the top wall and move vertically and pick on the bottom wall. The lines of the floor profile would snap to existing lines and endpoints.

95 .visualize the floor.

the Wall component must be selected. Doors and Windows Exercise Creating a New Project To begin this exercise.Walls. you must create a new Autodesk Revit project. 1. The 'Element Properties' dialogue box should appear as shown below. you should notice the pull down list in the upper left corner of the screen is now active and "Basic Wall: 200mm is the default wall type. Once Wall is active. From the Menu Bar. To begin the wall creation. then add all of the inner walls. select the button to the right of the drop down list. The outer and inner walls will be different wall types. You could also create a new document icon from the toolbar or using the accelerator key Ctrl + N. You may choose Wall from the Modelling menu. by selecting on the Creating Walls To begin the building we will start with the four outer walls. 3. Project. 96 . choose File. To view the properties for this wall type. New. You can select from the Basics or Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2.

You will notice any dimensions should 8. Select one of the two horizontal walls. Using the left mouse button. Use the <Enter> key complete the change. 97 . The size does not matter. To begin creating the outer walls. pick the Zoom button from the toolbar and choose Zoom To Fit. Unconnected Height will be modified from 8000mm to 5000mm. 7. Choose disappear. Press OK to close the dialogue box. Pick a second point to complete the rectangle. Left click the value field for the Unconnected Height and modify the value to 5000. pick a point on the screen to be a corner of the rectangle. we will modify the dimensions. 9. 5. The parameter value. With 'Wall' as the active component. the sketching toolbar appears as shown button from the below. To change the overall size of the building. select the 'Rectangle' toolbar.4. To resize the display. The dimension between these two walls will appear. 6. then move the mouse to see the walls being created. Select the dimension (on the text) and change the value to 10650 mm. from the side toolbar.

Next select on one of the vertical walls and modify the dimension to 12500mm (or 12. This can also be done by right mouse clicking in the window and selecting Zoom To Fit from the pop-up menu. Use 'Zoom To Fit' to view and centre the building.5m).10. 98 . 11.

Notice the Unconnected Height. which indicate the wall's location relative to the existing walls. 2. 3.Sketch Interior Walls To create the interior walls. button from the Option 5. The dimensions do not matter. Using the mouse.135mm Partition (2-hr) as the new wall type. Interior . select the dimension which locates the wall from the top exterior wall and modify it to 3000mm. From the drop down list select Basic Wall: Interior .126mm Partition (2hr). Note: You can modify the dimensions of the last created object without selecting the Modify command if the dimensions for that object are visible. Choose "Cancel" to close the dialogue box. Once the wall has been placed. 1.200mm. To begin sketching the interior walls. 6. which has different properties from Generic. Otherwise. Choose the button from the build toolbar. Notice when the cursor is close to an existing wall. move the cursor along the left vertical wall. Width and Top Constraint are different than the 200mm wall type. Start and end the new wall on top of an existing vertical walls. Sketch the new wall horizontally as shown. we will use a different wall type. you must use the Modify command and select the object to display the dimensions 99 . select the 'Line' toolbar. 4. Pick the Properties button to view the wall properties. dimensions appear.

10. Using the same settings. Choose from the design bar and select the left vertical wall created in the previous step. When multiple items are highlighted. 100 . the temporary dimensions no longer display. Notice when both walls are highlighted. Do not worry about the dimensions. 11. Modify the dimension locating the wall from the right exterior wall. Notice two dimension values locating the wall appear. so the dimensions are disabled. updated when the dimension was modified. This will undo the last step and return the project to the previous values. To cancel the last change. 9. Next select the short vertical wall on the right to modify. sketch two vertical walls from the top exterior wall to the wall created in the previous step as shown. Wall positions can be modified by dragging the wall as well as modifying the dimensions. When modifying dimensions. Change the value to 4m. Select the small. Click Activate Dimensions in the Options Bar to activate temporary dimensions for all selected objects. choose the button from the toolbar.7. the highlighted item. Notice the distance between the two small vertical walls has changed and is no longer 4m. (small vertical wall on the right). any change will affect all highlighted items. Drag the wall horizontally until the wall is 4m from the short vertical interior wall to the right. left vertical wall and the hold the <Ctrl> key down and select the right vertical small wall. 8.

12. Select the dimension locating the walls from the right exterior wall. 101 . Modify the value to 4m. Notice both highlighted walls moved.

Create Walls as shown. Create Walls as shown. Click on image or right arrow to proceed. 102 . Click on image or right arrow to proceed.Create Walls as shown. Click on image or right arrow to proceed. Create Walls as shown. Click on image or right arrow to proceed. Create Walls as shown. Click on image or right arrow to proceed.

Create Walls as shown. 103 . Click on image or right arrow to proceed.

Click and from the Options Bar. The Chain option is available when sketching all line types. means once a line has been sketched. 2.Sketching Chained Lines For the next two walls we will use the Chain option. Note: It is possible to directly enter length dimensions as you draw a line or chained line. the start point for the next entity must be selected manually. Enable the Chain Option 1. select Chain and . select the middle mouse button or right click to bring up the pop-up menu and choose "Cancel" or press the 'Esc' key. 104 . To end the chained line creation. Once a line has been sketched a new line will start from the endpoint of the previous line. Sketch a second wall as shown. Sketch the wall shown below. Notice that a new wall is extending from the end of the previously drawn wall. The default behavior. with Chain not active. After selecting the first point. 3. The length of 5500mm will automatically be created for the wall. When selected. this option allows line entities to be chained together when sketching. type 5500 and press <Enter>.

Notice the cursor symbol has changed to indicate the new command. dimensions to the new wall segments appear. they can be split at this intersection. Choose Split Walls and Lines from the Edit menu.). (walls. 105 . Walls (and Lines) can be split at any point along the wall. Select the intersecting walls as shown. When splitting. When walls intersect other entities. 2. etc. the cursor will change orientation to indicate which items are being split. Once the walls are split. Horizonal wall will be split Vertical wall will be split Spilt Walls In the steps that follow. construction lines. if entities intersect. The next step in our design is to split an existing wall into two. you will split the walls and delete the wall segments as shown below.Splitting Walls 1. The split tool can also be accessed by selecting from the toolbar. 2. 1. This is done using the 'Split Walls and Lines' command from the Tools menu.

Choose "OK' to save. 106 . Use the 'Ctrl' key to select multiple segments.3. Select the two segments shown (in red). choose the Delete command from the Edit menu or the 'Delete' key from the keyboard. When both segments are selected. 4. Save and when prompted give the project the name 'Office'. Save the project. Choose File.

1.Doors In this portion of the exercise we will see how to insert doors into our design. the other controls the door opening in or out. The door opening is controlled by the location of the mouse relative to the wall. that is the side the door will open. the door outline will appear with dimensions. see 'Creating a Door Family'. two sets of control arrows appear. Whichever side of the wall the mouse is on. 2. 4. you will actually place doors into the model. 107 . Inserting a Door (Plan View) Doors must be inserted into walls. For purposes of this exercise we will only use the standard system doors. so there must be at least one wall in your design to place a door. then select the door type UK_Single Flush:SO 810x2110 from the pulldown list. 3. To learn how to create your own custom families. Once the door is placed. Select the button from the design bar or choose Door from the Modelling menu. Once the pointer is in the desired location. In the next section of this exercise. The cursor will change appearance and when the pointer is moved onto a wall. click the left mouse button to place. One set controls if the door opens from the left or right.

Placing Doors in non-Plan Views Doors can be placed in any type of view. not just a plan view. When placing a door in a nonplan view the bottom of the door will snap to the level closest to the pointer. 108 .

select the door M_Double-Glass 1. If necessary. from the Element From the Doors folder. To have more doors available in this project. choose Properties dialogue box. It should look similar to the figure below. Make sure the door type is set to UK_Single Flush: SO 810x2110 from the pulldown list. 2. 1. If you did not do or save the Walls exercise. 4.Exercise: Placing Doors In this portion of the exercise. 109 . Select from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. doors will be added to the "Office" design created earlier. 3. Choose the button to view the door properties. you can use the project.rvt located in the Training Files\Metric folder.rfa and choose Open to load the door. open the "Office" model. Office_1.

Move the cursor along the bottom wall and place the door as shown below. Choose OK.5. 110 . 6. Use the control arrows to control the door opening as shown. The Properties will now update to the default double glass door 1730 x 2032mm.

however these new doors will not be 1730 x 2032mm of the M_Double-Glass 1 door type. Place and arrange the nine other doors as shown below. Now we will place the remaining doors. 9. 8. Choose the M_Single-Flush: 0813 x 2032mm door from the pulldown list as shown. 111 . use the control arrows to rearrange the doors. If the door faces or swing in the wrong direction.7.

The cursor will change appearance and when the pointer is moved onto a wall. the window outline will appear with dimensions. Select the "Window" button or choose Window from the Modelling menu. 112 .Windows In this portion of the exercise. however. so there must be at least one wall segment in your design to place a window. we will see how to insert windows into our design. 2. click the left mouse button to place. A window can be placed at any elevation. we will only use the standard system windows. not just a plan view. When placing a window in a non-plan view the window can be moved freely over a wall surface. then select the window type from the pulldown list. see 'Creating Families'. 1. when the window is moved close to the default elevation a construction line will appear which the window will snap to. Once the pointer is in the desired location. Placing Windows in non-Plan Views Windows can be placed in any type of view. 3. The window will be placed at the default elevation as defined in the properties. To learn how to create your own custom families. Inserting a Window (Plan View) Windows must be inserted into walls. For purposes of this exercise.

Make sure the window type is set to M_Fixed: 900 x 1200mm from the pulldown list. 4. Office_2.rvt located in the Training Files\Metric directory. 1. 113 . Select the "Window" button from the build toolbar. use the control arrows to control the window opening.Exercise: Placing Windows Using the "Office" project created earlier. It should look similar to the figure below. If necessary. we will place three types of windows on our design. If you did not do or save the Walls exercise. 3. open the "Office" model. Place the seven other windows as shown below. 2. you can use the project. Move the cursor along the top wall and place the window as shown below. If necessary.

. however the size of the window will be changed. choose properties dialogue box will display. Choose display the properties dialogue box. and then to 6.5. To create a new window type of the fixed windows. The type 114 . The remaining windows will be the same style window as before.

Choose to create the new window.7. 8. to close the Element 115 . Choose Properties dialogue box. enter 1220 x 1500 mm. Change the Width field in the Type Properties dialogue box from 900 to 1220 and change the Height from 1200 to 1550. Choose to continue. Choose and when prompted for the name of the window.

Notice the 1220 x 1500mm window is now the active window.9. Insert the windows as shown below. 116 .

Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. Click Open. Move the mouse to the wall at the very bottom of the view and pick with the left mouse button. Retrieve the Model 1. In this exercise you will learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your design. 2. To create dimensions. pick the top straight wall with the left mouse button. This is a feature only available with permanent dimensions. choose the dimension button of the Design Bar. however. The new dimension should appear as shown. meaning is locked to the current value.rvt. Permanent dimensions are created explicitly by the user to capture design intent. 4. Move the mouse to the desired location for dimension placement and click the left mouse button. Note that the dimension options appear on the Options Bar. or modifiable. The symbol will change to a locked symbol .Dimensions In Autodesk Revit. Automatic permanent dimensions are also created when you create sketches to define profiles for family creation. These automatic dimensions are not displayed by default. From the Metric folder. 5. Select on the unlock symbol with the left mouse button. Temporary dimensions are the dimensions created by the system when creating and inserting components. Using the defaults. Notice the unlock symbol appears next to the dimension text. This means the dimension value is unlocked. from the Basics tab The default dimension type is Linear. Now we will create dimensions which reference multiple entities. temporary and permanent. there are two types of dimensions. select dimensions. 3. Select the 117 . Creating Permanent Dimensions 1. 2. you can display them by turning on there display using Visibility. The preferred behaviour is to dimension to wall centrelines.

Zoom. we will create a Radial dimension for the arc. This is a feature only available with permanent dimensions. The symbol will present. Use View. Click the left mouse at one corner of the region to zoom in on then click the opposite corner. Notice unlock symbols appear next to each dimension and the symbol is symbol. Choose Radial from the Options Bar. 118 . Move the mouse to the location to place the dimension and click the left mouse button to place. Radial Dimensions 1.button. and the segments will now be equal. 6. Select the curved wall. To set all segment lengths equal. one at a time. The radial dimension will appear. Zoom in around the curved wall. 2. Zoom In Region. select on the change to . Move the mouse to a desired location and place the dimension. Select the four vertical wall segments. Next.

Notice as the mouse is moved. which is controlled by the options. Move the mouse to the curved wall. Notice the dimension is to the wall centre. Choose View. We will delete the dimension and create it again using the option 'Default to wall faces'. Zoom out to view the entire model. different angular dimensions will appear based on where the dimension would be placed. Choose button and select Radial as the dimension type.3. Choose the button and select Angular as the dimension type. Notice the "Default to wall faces" is still the current option. Angular Dimensions 1. Select the inside face and place the dimension. We will create an angular dimension to the slanted wall. 119 . Zoom. 7. Delete or use the <Del> key on your keyboard to remove the dimension. then select the vertical wall adjacent to it. Select the slanted wall with the left mouse button. 2. 4. 5. Choose Edit. Zoom All. 6. Place the dimension as shown. Move the mouse. notice you can select either face of the wall. Now choose "Prefer wall faces" from the options pulldown list. Choose Modify and select the dimension (not the wall).

Choose button and select Linear as the dimension type. Editing Witness Lines The witness lines of dimensions can be modified once they have been placed. 6. Toggle through until the outside face of the wall highlights and click the left mouse button to select. Notice that as the mouse is close to the wall the face nearest the point will highlight. Move the pointer to the top horizontal wall and select the (top) outer face. the default placement (to wall faces or wall centrelines). can be overridden. 3. Select on the dimension witness line shown below. To toggle through all selectable entities near the pointer. press the <Tab> key. then place the dimension as shown. 2. 3. Choose the button from the objects toolbar. 5. This is the face which would be selected. This will toggle through all possible choices. The option "Prefer wall faces" should still be selected. 1. Move the mouse to the bottom horizontal wall but do not select anything. The dimension will highlight and display control boxes on each witness line. 4. 120 . 1.Overriding Dimension Defaults While dimensions are being placed. 2. Move the pointer to the next horizontal wall and <Tab> until the wall centreline highlights and select.

Right click to activate the popup menu. but do not select it. 6. Move the mouse to the top witness line to highlight it. 8. Move the mouse to the control box on the witness line at the top wall. Notice the witness line now moves to the inside face. 5. Click once on the control box. Choose Delete Witness Line from the popup menu.4. The dimension should be deleted. Click the control box again. 7. 121 . The dimension should now be to the wall centreline. Right click to activate the popup menu.

To end editing.9. Select Re-edit Witness Line from the popup menu. Select on the outside face of the top wall. You can now add more segments of the dimension. just click anywhere off the model. 122 .

and Arrowhead to Diagonal 2mm. Choose the button to access the Type Properties dialogue box. dimensions have properties which can be modified.Dimension Properties Like most items. 123 . Select and click on the dimension modified in the previous steps. 1. Change the value of Text Size to 5 mm. 4. to open the The button should now be available. 3. Text Alignment to Right of Vertical. 2. Choose Properties dialogue box.

from the 124 .5. The dimensions should update as shown. from the Type Properties dialogue and the Choose the Element Properties.

Alignments Items can be aligned together to capture your design intent. 125 . Aligning is similar to dimensioning something with a value of zero. Alignments can be made as components are being sketched. Exercise 1. Select Align from the toolbar.rvt. Revit will display a lock symbol allowing you to lock the alignment of these walls. From the Metric folder. For example when sketching walls. select Alignment. will be aligned. To begin. if two or more walls are co-linear. Notice the cursor changes from the Tools menu or choose to indicate the align command is active. Click Open. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. the two uppermost short horizontal walls. Objects which are aligned can also be locked to maintain the alignment if these objects are moved. 2.

Select the short wall to the left as shown below. select the centre wall as the wall to stay fixed. The align command should still be active. 5. Select the upper wall. Now the three short horizontal walls below the two walls aligned in the last step will be aligned together. The the symbol will change to symbol will appear. Move the cursor to the uppermost horizontal wall. (if not select the Align command from the Edit menu). Select the symbol and . Next select the short horizontal wall to the left. Notice the second wall will now move to the height of the first. 3. 4. 126 .The uppermost horizontal wall will stay fixed. indicating the two walls are locked.

Select the symbol to lock the walls. Do not lock the walls. Move the walls to verify the alignment constraint.6. Choose and select the middle wall and drag it down. Notice the wall on or <Ctrl> + the left moves with it but the wall on the right does not. Choose Z to undo the move. 9. 127 . Re-align the right wall with the middle wall and lock the walls. Press and hold the <Ctrl> key and select the short horizontal wall to the right as shown. 7. 8.

2. Select the door to the left. Align the Windows The windows on the north and south walls are to be aligned. The two outside windows on the North wall (top) are dimensioned and locked and another window on the north wall is constrained by a dimension. We will see what happens when an alignment violates a constraint. Lock the constraint. Other components can be aligned as well. Then select the lock to constrain the doors.Aligning Doors 1. Repeat for the last door. door number 3 to align. 3. 1. Move any of the doors to test the alignment. Select the window on the north 128 . (door #4). Select the Align command from the Tools menu. Hold the <Ctrl> key and select the next door. Choose Align from the Tools menu and select the door on the right.

Align and position the remaining windows as shown below. This is because the first item selected in the alignment will remain fixed. 3. The north window becomes unlocked. From the alert window. Do not use the <Ctrl> key. Now select the window on the far left on the south wall.wall on the left. 2. 4. 129 . Now select the far right window on the south wall. alerting you that 'Constraints are not satisfied'. The two windows should align without any problems. violating the constraint. The second window selected was locked. Next select the far right window on the north wall. choose Remove Constraints. A message should appear.

130 .

1.Compound Walls In this exercise we will demonstrate Autodesk Revit's object structure functionality. Open the Floor Plan view Level 1 from the Project Browser. the layers consist of either a single continuous plane of material. To define the structure of the wall. In this exercise you will learn how to define. A new wall type will be defined and applied to this wall. wall structures. choose to open the type properties dialogue. how to define new dimensioning references and apply materials to the layers. 2. Wall structures are Type properties. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. button for Structure. To edit the wall structure.200mm wall shown below.rvt. 7. Choose to display the Element Properties dialogue box. 5. From the Metric folder. floor and roof structures which comprise parallel layers. 6. choose the Edit Wall Structure dialogue box will appear. Select and select the Generic . or they consist of discrete. 3. 4. Click Open. The 131 . This capability allows users to define wall. Choose a name for the new wall type as 200mm Stud Wall and choose and enter . The same principals of defining the structural wall layers apply to floors and roofs as well. repeated materials placed alone or with other interstitial material. select gallery.

We will change the definition of the first layer to be 40mm EIFS. 9. Choose layers. Select from the pulldown list for Material: Finishes .Exterior Insulation and Finish System.EIFS . We twice to add the two will add two additional layers to the wall. 10. 132 .Exterior . After adding the second layer. The wall currently has a single layer 200mm thick with a material of Default.8. Next change the Thickness value to 40. move it to the top of the list by selecting the UP button until it is on top as shown in the next figure. Set the Function to Finish 2 [5].

Stud Layer and modify the thickness to be 140mm.Interior . set the Layer material to be Wood . Set the Function to Structure [1]. Within the Core Boundary. move the second new layer to the bottom of the list. Set the Function to Finish 2 [5]. 12. Next. It should be outside of the core boundary. Modify the interior layer's Material to Finishes .Plasterboard and a thickness of 20mm. 133 .11.

2. choose View and View Properties. To view the layers of the compound wall. From the View Properties dialogue box. change the value for Detail level from Coarse to Medium. Notice that the selected wall appears unchanged. Finally close the Element Properties . dialogue by selecting Setting View Detail Level 1. To preview the new wall structure. choose . Choose to close the Edit Wall Structure dialogue box and then choose from the Type Properties dialogue box.13. 134 . 14.

From the Project Browser. expand the Families. Next expand Walls. Changing Reference Position 135 . Choose pattern. select Basic Wall: 200mm Stud Wall to change all instances to the new the 200mm Stud Wall type. Choose Select All Instances. then expand Basic Walls as shown below. You may need to zoom in to view the cut 4. to update the view. from the Type Selector drop-down list.200mm and press the right mouse button to display the popup menu.3. We will now apply the new wall type to all remaining Generic 200mm walls. Select Generic . 6. 7. 5. Next.

change the dimensioning default on the options bar to "Prefers faces of core.In this portion of the exercise you will change the dimensional reference The reference will be changed from the wall centre to the (inside) face of the stud. Move the selected handle to the line near the face of stud on the outside of the wall. select the handle as shown below and keep the left mouse button pressed. Repeat the process for the other witness line. Zoom in on the model as shown below. 1. The dimension will be from wall centerline to wall centerline. Notice the dimension snaps to the outside face of Core. Choose and add a dimension as shown. 2. 136 . Click to drop the dimension at this point. 3. 6. Choose Modify and select the dimension you just added. 5. With the handles (blue squares) of the dimension visible. To dimension from face of stud. Change the View Properties Detail Level to Course." 4. 7.

137 . 3. 2. Next the Fill pattern for the Plasterboard layer will be changed. Choose Settings and Fill Patterns. Open the view. With the Prefer faces of core value set in the options bar create the following dimension. Editing Fill Patterns 1. 4. Do the same for the other wall. The Fill Patterns dialogue box will appear. Select the Custom option to define the new pattern.8. Choose from the dialogue box to define a new cut pattern. Callout of Section 3 from the Sections branch of the Project Browser.

Next. select and from the Data directory. 6. choose revit. select the Sand pattern The pattern Import Scale should be set to 0. Next.pat as the pattern file. then choose Open. Enter Plasterboard as the name for the pattern. 138 .5.5.

Plasterboard. to close the Materials dialogue box. to complete the new pattern. 139 . 9. The new fill pattern should now Apply Surface Patterns 1. from the Fill Patterns From the pulldown list for Material and select Finishes . Select Choose dialogue to continue. Choose Cut Pattern and change the value to Plasterboard. 8. choose Settings and Materials. 2.7. Choose display. 10. To apply the new pattern. Choose View and select Hidden Line. Change the display to Hidden Line. 11.Interior . Open the 3D view V1.

8. Choose Settings and Materials. 6. 4. Choose twice to close both dialogues.Concrete Blocks. The wall should now appear with the surface pattern as shown below. Select the pulldown list for Surface pattern and select the pattern Block 8 x 16. Select the material Masonry . 140 .Concrete Blocks. 7. View the Wall Structure by selecting Change the value for wall material to Masonry . Choose to access the wall properties and choose . 5.3.Concrete Blocks. Select the 300mm Masonry round wall shown below. Choose to exit the dialogue. Next we will define a surface pattern for the material Masonry . 10. . 9. Choose to update to material.

13. From the option bar change to roof type to Roof: Reinforced Concrete Slab LW Screed .11. Compound materials can also be applied to roofs and floors as well.Asphalt Roofing. 141 . Pick select the to bring up the Element Properties box to bring up the Type Properties box. 12. If the preview box is not visible button. To do this select the roof as shown below. Now select 14.

button Aligning Surface Patterns 1. Select to close the Edit Structure dialog box. To do this open the East Elevation view from the browser. 16. This is an example of a compound roof. We will now align the masonry pattern with the wall. Pick the button to view the structure of the roof Notice the roof that we have selected is comprised of four materials.15. 142 . Finally select twice to close the remaining dialog boxes.

3. 143 . 4. We are now going to align the masonry pattern to the left wall. (you may want to zoom in closer when selecting the wall). Now select the start of the brick pattern. Select Align from the Tools menu. Now select the wall to the left. Select and zoom in around the retaining wall to the right. 5. Click on and select Zoom Out (2x) to see the results.2. You will need to use <Tab> to select the surface pattern line.

144 .

Change the view type to. Also note that they are modifying the wall type only. not a specific wall instance. The tools covered are Modify. Split Region. Wall Sweeps. Townhouse. Notice that the Modify Vertical Structure tools at the bottom of the dialog box are grayed out.rvt. Note that this sample height does not set the height of any walls of that type in the project. From the Common folder. As indicated. In this exercise. Section: Modify Type Attributes from the drop-down view selection below the Preview window. 145 . you will create an exterior wall with a change in brick coursing and a brick ledge. Click Open. 4. Modifying the Vertical Structure of a Wall Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. You can set the sample height to any value you want. 5. The second part of the exercise will focus on adding to and subtracting from the wall layers using the integral Wall Sweep and Reveal tools. In the following example. Sample Height The sample height is a default height set for the wall in the preview pane. The sample model contains additional examples of vertically compound walls. Choose Edit/New to edit the type properties of the wall and then choose Edit next to Structure to edit the Structure of the wall. Stud walls and choose Properties to bring up the Element Properties of the wall. select Townhouse. 2.Vertically Compound Walls This exercise will cover the creation and modification of vertically compound walls.rvt 1. Merge Regions. If not already expanded. choose Preview to view the preview of the wall structure. Select one of the Exterior. 3.Brick on Mtl. and Assign Layers. The Modify Vertical Structure tools should now be active. and Reveals. these tools will only work if the Section Preview is active. The first part of the exercise focuses on modifying the structure of the wall. You should set it to a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. you will accept the default sample height of 20ft. which are reviewed towards the end of the exercise.

prehighlight one of the borders. the new regions assume the same material. 1. 1. Use the Dynamic View Controls to Zoom in on the bottom part of the wall.Brick Finish as the original and that in the table the Thickness for Layer 1 is now Variable. either horizontally or vertically into new regions. Click once more to split the region into three distinct parts stacked one on top of the next. 2. To split a layer or region vertically. In this case. Tip: It is helpful to zoom in on the outer horizontal boundary to split it vertically.Brick layer. a tool tip will appear which will explain what will happen upon selection. When you split a region. dimensions will appear showing where the split occurs. To split a layer or region horizontally. 2. Place your cursor on the uppermost split that was created in the Brick layer. the thickness is no longer recorded as a fixed value. prehighlight a horizontal boundary. Prehighlight a border between regions and click to merge them. the position of the pointer when you prehighlight a border determines which material prevails after the merge. since both regions are composed of the same layer. After merge assign Layer 1” 146 . the message will be: “Border between Layer 1 and Layer 1. Choose the Merge Regions tool. That boundary can be the outside boundary. When you merge regions. or an inside boundary created if you previously split horizontally.Sample Height Split Region Command The Split Region command divides a layer. A preview split line appears when you prehighlight a border. 3. As you split the region. After a layer is split. Choose the Split Region tool. Click to split the region into two parts. Place your cursor along the outside face of the wall along the Layer 1: Masonry . or regions. Merge Regions Command The Merge Regions Tool is used to merge adjacent regions so that they are composed of the same layer material. Notice that all regions acquired the same Layer 1: Masonry . You can also right click to select the Zoom commands. If you leave your cursor for a few seconds.

1. 3. it can also be changed by using the Modify tool. You may need to zoom out to see the temporary dimension. Use the <TAB> key to toggle though until one of the top horizontal edges of one of the layers prehighlights.3. Selecting this arrow will flip the temporary dimension so that it dimensions from the split up to the next parallel line instead of down. Notice that there is a flip arrow at the split line. To change the Sample Height using the Modify tool. 147 . Click to merge the two layers. 2. choose Modify and place your cursor over the top edge of the wall. Modify Tool The Modify Tool can be used to modify the position of vertical and horizontal lines in the wall structure using temporary dimensions to allow you to change the composition of the wall. Notice that there is a temporary dimension from the split line to the base of the wall. Click on the arrow to observe the behavior. Choose the Modify tool. Zoom out so that you can see the entire temporary dimension as well as the split line. 4. 1. In this section. you will be modifying the position of the remaining split. Modifying the Sample Height The Modify tool can also be used to control the Sample Height of the wall. The dimension text will turn blue indicating that it is modifiable. Although this value can be changed by editing this value directly. 2. 3. Click on the temporary dimension text and change the value to 12 ft. Pick the line of the split. Select the line and notice that a temporary dimension will appear from the base of the wall to the top of the wall.

use the Split Region tool to add another split just above the split that was made at 10 ft. First.4. You will now assign Masonry Brick – Soldier Course to this new 8” tall region to create a band of soldier course brick on the exterior. Create a new wall layer by first clicking on Layer 1 and then choosing Insert. Remember to use the flip arrows if necessary to flip the temporary dimensions up or down. This ensures that the wall does not vary in thickness. Use Modify to adjust the to position of the second split so that it is 8 inches above the previous split. 2. This will add a new layer at the top of the list. 1. 148 . you will be creating a new layer and assigning it to a region. see the sections on Integral Wall Sweeps and Reveals. 3. To achieve variations in thickness. Change the value of the dimension to 18' 0". Assigning Layers After a region is split you will need to be able to assign a different layer to one of the regions to change its Material. In this section. Notice that the entire wall height updates and not just the one segment.

4. Change the Function of this layer to Finish 1[4] and change the Material to Masonry Brick – Soldier Course. it will highlight in red in the preview window. To assign this new layer to the 8” region in the preview pane. In the 3D view. When a layer is selected in the table. first click on the layer number for the Masonry Brick – Soldier Course layer. Zoom in on the area with the soldier course brick to observe the change. 5. 149 . 9. 8. 6. Next. This should highlight the entire layer in black in the table. It will immediately highlight in red because it is the selected layer. Click on the 8” tall region to assign the layer to this region. 7. click the Assign Layers button from the Vertical Structure tools at the bottom of the dialog box. Choose OK in all three dialogs to complete the changes to the wall type.

To extend a layer. Chose Edit/New and then Edit the Structure. rather than horizontally. Choose OK in all three dialogs to finalize the changes 150 . you might split finish layer 1 into several regions. For example. You cannot have the same row assigned to regions on both sides of the core. 3. you select the horizontal outer boundary at the top or bottom of the layer using the Modify Tool in the Preview Pane of the Wall Properties Dialog. A padlock will appear. select row numbers sequentially and observe which region is selected in the preview pane.Brick Band Added Tips for Assigning Layers: Rows of the sample wall in the preview pane must remain in a sequential order from left to right. A locked padlock indicates the layer cannot be extended. By toggling the lock to the unlocked state. Access the properties of the Exterior – Brick on Mtl Stud wall by clicking on the wall and choosing Properties. 1. You should familiarize yourself with the layer functions of compound walls. A row cannot be assigned more than one layer. To test your sample wall. Revit cannot produce this wall. Click the padlock to unlock it so that the layer can be extended. such as brick over concrete. Zoom in and click on the horizontal boundary below the Masonry – Brick layer at the base of the wall. 4. Allowing Layer Extension Layer Extension makes it possible to extend specified layers beyond the top or bottom of the wall. If they do not highlight in an order from left to right. 2. Assigning layers to regions works best going vertically. Then you could assign another finish row to some of those regions and create an alternating pattern. you can make that region free to later extend. Choose Modify.

open the Wall Detail view from under the Sections branch. 5. Click to select the shape handle. You can type values for these properties. 151 . Drag the shape handle down so that it extends beyond the top of the foundation wall. 6. Place your pointer at the bottom of the brick layer in the section view and press TAB to prehighlight the shape handle for the extendable brick layer. callout. 3. click on the Brick wall and choose Properties. You cannot have one layer locked between two layers that are unlocked. 7. 4. Change the Bottom Extension Distance to – 0’ – 6”. unlocked layers must be adjacent. 2. Choose Tools/Join Geometry and click on the Brick wall and then the Foundation wall to clean up the join. two instance properties of the wall become enabled: Top extension distance (for layers at the top of the wall) or Bottom extension distance (for layers at the bottom of the wall). or you can drag the unlocked wall layers in a section. To modify the Extension properties from the Element Properties dialog. or elevation view.Although multiple layers can be unlocked. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are prehighlighting the shape handle. Dragging the Extended layers: 1. Modifying Extended Layers When you unlock layers for extension. 3D. From the Project Browser.

1. The steps to add an integral reveal are identical except that there is no material selected for a reveal. 4. the material is determined by the element that is being cut. Adding a Wall Sweep to a Vertically Compound Wall In the following section you will be adding trim detailing to the exterior of the building using an integral Wall Sweep. For those already familiar with wall sweeps and reveals from previous versions of Revit. 3.rft This template replaces the previous Profile-Wall Sweep. From the bottom left hand corner of the dialog. A default profile is selected for you. Note: This is a Profile family created and loaded into this project.rft but is almost 152 . In the case of the reveal. The template used to create this profile family is Profile-Hosted. Choose Add to add a wall sweep. Change the Profile to Sill from the drop down list and change the Material to Concrete – Cast in Place Concrete. choose Wall Sweeps. The wall sweeps dialog will appear offering choices to add wall sweeps to your wall definition. Access the properties of the Exterior – Brick on Mtl Stud wall by clicking on the wall and choosing Properties. Chose Edit/New and Edit the Structure. The following exercise will demonstrate how to add an integral wall sweep. 2.Integral Wall Sweeps and Reveals Integral Wall Sweeps and Reveals are ones which are added to the definition of the wall type so that they become part of the wall section. the basic concept is still the same. A profile from a Profile Family is swept along the path of the wall.

Choose OK in all dialogs to finalize the changes. a footing already attached to the base. 8. 7. Leave the flip option un-checked. The footing is created using an integral Wall Sweep. When multiple wall sweeps have been added. and a cornice. which has.identical. Only the explanatory text differs slightly from the original. The position of the sweep is determined by a distance from either the top or the bottom and a horizontal offset from the interior or exterior side. 6. Basic Wall: Foundation – 12” Concrete is a foundation wall. 153 . This allows you to make corrections without exiting the dialog box. zoom in to look at the wall sweep that has been added to the wall. To view these examples. Set the wall sweep to be 12’ – 8” from the Bottom and -3 5/8” offset from the exterior. a wainscot. highlight the row number to prehighlight a selected wall sweep. Choose apply and notice that the profile is selected in the Preview Pane. Additional Examples: There are various applications for vertically compound walls. In this sample model has been included a few additional examples of ways in which the vertically compound walls can be used. edit the properties of the wall types and look at the preview pane. In a 3D view. 5. Basic Wall – Interior Trim is an interior wall with cove molding.

Basic Wall: Retaining – Stone was created using an integral wall sweep.Basic Wall: Interior Tile Wainscot is an interior bathroom wall whose exterior layer is split so that different tile patterns can be applied. 154 . Open a 3D view to look at the retaining wall. Open the Interior Bathroom Elevation to better view the wall appearance.

Notice that the outline of the floor of the new room has been created in advance. Follow the lines of the floor to sketch the walls. choose . This will involve creating both a Sloped Glazing and Non-Rectangular Curtain Walls. Click Open. 4. From the Basics Design Bar. In this exercise. 2. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. select sun_room_addition. The completed walls should appear as below.rvt. Draw the three walls of the addition. you will learn how to: • Create Curtain Walls • Create a Sloped Glazing Roof • Add Curtain Grid Lines • Add Mullions Retrieve the Model 1. Adding Curtain Walls The sun room addition will be added near the sliding doors. The 3D View : V1 view should appear as shown below.Sloped Glazing and Non-Rectangular Curtain Walls In the following exercise. select Chain and . Select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1 from the drop-down type menu. 2. From the Options Bar. Zoom in on the area where the addition will be added. The start point of the first wall is shown below. 3. Activate the Floor Plan : Level 1 view from the Project Browser. Press <Esc> when finished. From the Metric folder. 155 . you will be adding a sun-room addition to a house. 1. First you will create the walls.

and trim 156 . Roof by Footprint from the Basics Design Bar. 3. 5. Choose the corners as shown. You will now clean up the corners where the lines intersect. Activate the Floor Plan : Level 2 view. Choose Roof. Click on the back wall of the house. Click on the three curtain walls as shown. 5. Choose . Make sure that the Defines Slope option is unchecked and the Overhang is set to 0mm. 1. 2.Adding Roofs You will now create a sloped roof which will then be transformed into a curtain roof. 6.

The Element Properties dialogue box will appear. Choose . Choose option. 157 . Change the value of the Rise/1000 parameter to 200mm. Select the Defines Slope 6. 9. Activate the 3D View : V1 to view the model. 7.5. and click on the roof line on the right. Choose and pick the slope defining line. 8. Choose Choose to complete the change. to complete the roof.

Click to select the walls. Place the cursor over one of the walls and use the <TAB> key to prehighlight the chain of curtain walls. From the type selector list. 1/2 and 2/3 points along the wall but the grid lines can be placed at any location. choose Attach Top/Bottom. 1. the system will automatically snap at the 1/3. Adding Curtain Grid Lines and Mullions 1. 158 . From under the Modeling tab in the Design Bar. 2. Choose and pick the sloped roof. Draw the grid lines as shown below. choose . 3. Select the roof that you created in the previous step to attach the walls to. You will now change the normal roof into a sloped glazing roof. Note: When creating the curtain grid.You will now adjust the walls so that they go up to the roof. change the roof type from Roof : Generic 400mm to Sloped Glazing : Curtain Roof. 2. 1. From the Options Bar.

When you place your cursor over a grid line. choose from the Design Bar or choose Mullion from under Modelling in the Menu Bar. To do so. To rotate. From the Option Bar. select All Empty Segments. You will now rotate the view to add the grid lines to the other wall. Choose from the Toolbar to rotate the view. Rotate the view and complete adding the mullions. Choose and add the remaining grid lines. Choose to create a new 3D view. 4. 5. Repeat for each wall and the roof. 6. all grid line segments should highlight. You may need to use View. Click the left mouse button to add the mullions. 159 . You will now add the mullions to the model. hold down the <Shift> key and the left mouse button and move the pointer slowly in the view window.3. Zoom to Fit. Zoom.

7. 160 . The following is a rendering of the sun room addition.

it now has 2 new options: 1) “One Segment” and 2) “All Except Picked” that allow to create grid without attempting to split particular panel. Go to the South Elevation view. select Condominium. if there are two curtain walls joined at an end and there is no vertical corner mullion at the join. When placing curtain grid. Click Open. you will learn how to create grid and select segments to exclude. click on Curtain Grid. you can now create horizontal mullions to miter to each other automatically across the join. 2. you will learn how to make horizontal mullions miter to each other automatically across the join. 1. Second. From the Common folder. 4. Subdividing curtain wall panels You are now using the Add or remove Segments and One Segment options to subdivide curtain panels of which one will be replaced by a Curtain Wall Sgl Glass door. you will learn how to remove segments from existing grid and to use “One Segment” option to create panels. 3. Exercise: First. Finally. When placing mullions.rvt. From the Modeling tab of the design bar.Curtain Wall Enhancements This exercise will cover enhancements to the curtain grid and mullion. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. 161 . place a horizontal curtain grid line at 7’-0” above the First Floor level line. At the curtain wall.

it should look like the following: 162 . At the curtain wall. place two vertical curtain grid lines in order to create a 3’-0” wide panel located at the center. click on the short portion of the subdivided vertical grid line that you want to remove. 8. press on the Add or Remove Segments button. On the option bar.5. Choose Modify and click one of the vertical curtain grid lines. Use the <Tab> key to cycle through items for selection. With the mouse cursor. 6. Once it’s done. 7.

Subdividing curtain wall panels using All Except Picked We will now use the All Except Picked option to subdivide curtain panels. On the option bar change it to Curtain Wall Sgl Glass door. select One Segment. 163 . Place one segment grid in order to divide the top panel in half as shown. On the Modeling tab of the design bar. 10. 11. 1. Select the middle panel. On the option bar.9. Go to the East Elevation view. click on Curtain Grid. Then add mullions at your desired locations.

place two horizontal curtain grid lines in order to subdivide three curtain panels at equal distance. Create a multi-segment dimension between the new curtain grids and the top and bottom of the curtain wall. 5. as shown.2. At the curtain wall. click on Curtain Grid. Place two vertical curtain grid lines. select All Except Picked. then with the cursor click on the middle portion of the subdivided horizontal grid line that you want to remove. With the Curtain Grid command still active. 4. Place a horizontal grid line. to subdivide the wall into nine curtain panels. Click EQ to constrain the segments to be equal. 6. On the Modeling tab of the design bar. from the options bar. 164 . 3.

Making horizontal mullions to miter each other automatically across the join. Then add mullions at your desired locations. Go to North and South. it should look like the following: 8. Once it’s done. Zoom into curved roof. 1. click on Mullion. 165 . you can now create horizontal mullions to miter to each other automatically across the join. On the Modeling tab of the design bar. If there are two curtain walls joined at an end and there is no vertical corner mullion at the join.7. East and West elevations in order to place a horizontal curtain grid at 2’-3 21/32” above the Parapet level line.

With the mouse cursor. On the Modeling tab of the design bar. you will see that the horizontal mullions are mitering to each other automatically across the join. On the option bar. 3.2. Once it’s done. Mitered Mullions 166 . click on Mullion. Go to the 3D view. 4. click on those horizontal curtain grid lines in order to insert mullions. select “Entire Grid Line”.

Click Open. 3. Notice the lines are not at the wall face. Choose Floor from the Basic (or Modelling) design bar. If objects such as floors and walls intersect. select Floor_Wall_Joins. Picking the Walls 5. Set the floor type to Wood Joist 10". choose Floor Properties from the design bar. This portion of the exercise will demonstrate this functionality. an option for controlling the behavior of this intersection is available. Floor and Roof Joins When defining floors. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. Choose OK to close the properties. Open the floor plan view of Level 2. Select the exterior walls to define the boundary of the floor. Choose Finish Sketch to complete the floor definition. 6. Note: A message stating: Choose Yes to remove a volume from the wall. Before completing the floor. 167 . They are defined at the structural layer of the wall. 1. 2. check the option Extend into wall (to core). you can choose to define the sketch to the face of the wall or to the structural layer.Wall. roofs and ceilings using the pick walls command. From the Common folder.rvt. With the Pick Walls tool selected. Pick Wall Option 4.

Before completing the wall. Next. 12. Choose Finish Sketch to complete the floor.7. Select the four walls on the outside edge of the wall to define the floor. From the Options Bar. Note: If an error message appears. click OK. Click OK. Section 1 8. Open the section view. 10. the floor will be added at level 1. choose Floor Properties and make sure the floor type is Wood Joist 10" and the Height Offset from Level is set to 0' 0". to see the results. Section 1. 11. Section 1. 9. Select Floor from the Design Bar and use the Pick Walls command. Open the section view. This will ensure that the floor extends to the outside of the structural core. "Would you like the walls that go up to this floor's level to attach to its bottom?". Answer "Yes" when prompted. Open Floor Plan: Level 1 from the Project Browser. Section 1 168 . Notice the floor sits within the wall's structural layer. to see the floor wall connection. This will adjust the top of the foundation to the bottom of the floor slab. choose Extend into wall (to core).

rvt. Footing. From the Options Bar: • Set the Depth to T. select T. From the Common folder. you will add foundation walls to an existing structure and modify the end cap wrapping conditions. select Wall Functions. make sure you snap to the corners of the exterior face of the existing walls. This will enable the new wall to be within this view's range.O. Foundation 12" Concrete. Footing • Set the Loc Line to Finish Face: Exterior • Select the sketching tool. 3. Chain 4. Sketch a chain of walls by tracing the exterior face of the building's perimeter walls.O. Note: While sketching the wall chain. Prior to sketching the foundation walls. you need to modify the view's properties so that the walls fall within the views visibility range. From the Underlay drop-down list. open Floor Plan: Level 1. From the Project Browser. Click Open.Wall Functions and Wrapping In this exercise. Right-click in the view and select View Properties from the pop-up menu. From the Design Bar. 2. Choose OK to close the dialog. select Wall and from the Type Selector drop-down list. 3D View 1. select. Foundation Walls Foundation walls are drawn from the wall's top constraint and extend downward to a specified depth. 169 . You will learn: • • • How to create a foundation wall How to assign a wall function How to modify wall wrapping conditions Retrieve the Training File Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog.

make sure Foundation 12" Concrete is selected. find the parameter. 7. select Properties.5.24" Concrete as the name of the new wall type. Floor Plan: T. Editing the Wall Structure Choose OK to close the Edit Structure dialog box. From the Design Bar. Make sure the Wall Function parameter is set to Foundation. From the Options Bar: 170 . Choose Edit/New and then Duplicate to create a new wall type. Click OK.O. select Wall. Footing 6. Open Floor Plan: T. 8. Footing. 9. Choose OK twice and return to the plan view. Within the Type Properties dialog box. From the Type Selector. Type Foundation . Structure and select its Edit button.O. Set the concrete Thickness to 2'-0". From the Options Bar.

10. choose . 11. Chain 13. you will see that the building has a proper foundation and footing.0" 11. In 3D. Select the sketching tool. Set the Loc Line to Finish Face: Exterior 12. make sure you snap to the corners of the exterior face of the existing walls. Note: While sketching the wall chain. Set the Offset to 0' 6" 10. Set depth to Explicit and 1' . From the Toolbar. 3D View 171 . Sketch a chain of walls around the perimeter of the building to add a footing.

4. From the Design Bar. Zoom in on any of the windows in the model. 1. Choose OK to close the dialog box. choose Properties. Open Floor Plan: Level 1. Structure and select its Edit button. 172 . Floor Plan: Level 1— Window 3. or other wall hosted components. Within the Type Properties dialog box. 2. Select Edit/New. choose Modify and select the wall that hosts the window. you can set the wrapping layer to more accurately simulate true construction. door. find the parameter.Wall End Caps and Cavity Closures While inserting a window. From the Options Bar. Editing Structure The wall wrapping at the window should resemble the image below. Change the Default Wrapping — At Inserts to Interior.

Entrance Door 6. From the Wall Closure drop-down list. 173 .Window with Interior Wall Wrapped The wrapping can be controlled at the insert as well. Notice the interior material is wrapping at the door. 5. Zoom in around the double door at the entrance. Door with Wall Wrapping on Exterior Notice that only the exterior layer of the wall wraps around the door. Select Edit/New. Click on the door shown in the next figure and select Properties. Select OK twice and return to the floor plan. select Exterior.

Select the curved. floors and ceilings.rvt.Wall Top/Bottom Attachments In this exercise. In addition. Floors 1. select AttachTopBottom. From the Common folder. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. This tool attaches the top or bottom of walls to other objects. select the Attach Top/Bottom. Select the south wall. From the Options Bar. 174 . you will learn how to use the Attach Top/Bottom tool. in-place floor family. Click Open. If not. Open the view. Elevation: South. from the Selecting the Wall Chain 3. Attached Walls 5. it should prehighlight. choose Attach Top/Bottom the Options Bar. 2. Place the cursor over one of the upper walls. select Bottom. With the Chain of Walls selected. Notice the walls have extended down to attach to the family in-place. open it by clicking Toolbar. Press <Tab> until the entire chain of walls prehighlights and click to select the chain. From the Options Bar. you can also attach walls to 'in place' objects and reference planes. such as roofs. Attach Top/Bottom Options 4. The file should open to the 3D view. 1.

rotate. Select one of the reference planes above the wall. select Attach Top/Bottom. From the Options Bar. 7. Attaching North Wall to Reference Plane As you can see. Take the time to edit the reference planes (move. Select the north wall. Select the other reference plane. 175 . etc. Attaching Wall Top to Reference Plane 6. choose Top. Elevation: North. From the Options Bar. choose Top.) and family inplace and see how the attachments are maintained. it is quite easy to attach walls to in-place families and reference planes. Open the view.From the Options Bar.

How to offset an existing wall for the roof overhang. From the Metric folder. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. How to use Slope Arrows to define a roof slope. How to use the Join/Unjoin Roof command to attach a roof to a wall. 1. How to define a roof slope with the Defines Slope command. How to use the Align Eaves command. How to create a footprint roof. The model is shown below. How to use the Attach Top/Bottom command to attach walls to a roof. we will create several different roofs using both the Roof by Footprint and Extruded roof techniques. The Roof Model 1. then extruded some distance. How to use the Trim command for trimming 2D geometry.Creating Roofs In this exercise. Open Level 1 to begin the first roof. Click Open. Extruded Roofs The first roof we will create is an extruded roof over the breezeway between the house and garage. select Roofs. 176 . How to make an opening in a roof. How to use Reference planes to aid in sketched geometry construction. An extruded roof is one where the top of the roof profile is sketched. In this exercise you will learn the following concepts: How to create an extruded roof.rvt. How to change a roof slope.

A section view parallel to the work plane has been defined. To begin the sketch. From the design bar. named Breezeway. Section1 and choose The section view is automatically cropped around the area of interest. Select the view Section: . 4. To sketch this roof. Choose from the design bar. Sketch the 177 . Next the system will prompt for a view to use while sketching the roof. The section view should appear as shown below. we will define three reference planes to help determine key points on the sketch.2. has already been created for this purpose. 5. A Reference Plane. Roof by Extrusion. 3. a sketching plane is required. choose Roof. Choose to continue. Choose the plane using the Name option from the Work Plane dialog box and select Breezeway from the list as shown.

Choose below. The roof should appear as shown 178 . 6. 7. choose the lines as shown then check the Chain command from the options bar. From the design bar. Sketch the next two reference planes as shown. Now the roof profile will be sketched. Sketch a final reference plane horizontally as shown. Sketch 9. The planes location is 450mm below Level 2. to complete the roof. 8.first reference plane as shown.

Choose Join/Unjoin Roof from the Tools menu. The roof has already been extruded from the work plane (Breezeway). The roof should now appear as shown. in one direction. To select the face of the wall. From the Tool menu. the pick the face of the garage wall to join this end of the roof to the wall. open the 3D View by choosing from the toolbar. choose Join/Unjoin Roof. Next select the edge of the roof to modify. we will use the Join/Unjoin Roof command. Select the edge of the roof then the outside face of the wall as shown.10. 179 . joined to the garage wall. 11. 12. 13. Next we will join the opposite end of the roof to the house. you can use the <TAB> key. To view this. To change the roof extrusion distance.

15. Since the height of a roof defined by footprint is based on a level. 18.14. Choose and select both breezeway walls. Slope of the roof is defined as a property of the lines used to create the roof sketch. (select one wall. open the view. 180 . Select Roof. Gable Roof 1. 16. select Floor Plan: Garage Roof from the list and choose Open View. then select the roof. Roof by Footprint from the design bar. Footprint Roofs We will now create four more roofs using the footprint method. For a better view of this. A roof defined by footprint means it is created by defining the perimeter of the roof from a plan view. hold the Control key and select the other). you can choose the level to define the roof on. The next step is to have the walls extend up to the roof. Open the 3D view for a better look. This will join the tops of these two walls to the roof. 17. choose Attach Top/Bottom. Section: Section 1 from the project browser. From the Options Bar. Make sure the Attach Wall option is set to Top in the Options Bar. 2. The first roof will be a gable roof over the garage. From the dialog box. The roof should update as shown.

From the option bar make sure the Defines Slope option is checked and set the value for Overhang to 600mm.3. Uncheck the Defines Slope option from the Options Bar. 6. 4. 5. Next select the parallel wall on the left. From the design bar. Select the other two wall of the garage to complete the roof footprint sketch. 181 . choose . Select the right vertical wall to define the first Defines Slope line of the roof as shown.

7. choose . To do this. 8. The slope is currently 750mm rise over a 1000mm run. choose and select both Defines Slope lines. To change the roof pitch the properties of the Defines Slope lines must be edited. To complete the roof choose exterior garage walls to the roof. Use the <Ctrl> key to select multiple items. . With both lines selected. Change this value to 500mm and choose . 9. When prompted choose Yes to attach the 182 .

3. This roof will also be a gable roof. 183 . Select the four Masonry walls of the chimney as shown below. 4. If not. Next the opening will be made for the chimney. Repeat this for one of the shorter line segments as shown below. With selected select all of the exterior walls as shown. The options for Defines Slope and Overhang should be the same as when last used. Choose top and check the Slope Define Line option. Adding a Gable Roof The next roof to add is the main roof of the house. Open the 3D view to see the new roof and attached walls. Choose the command and Pick from the options bar. The slope lines will and select the long horizontal line at the now be added. Choose Roof. but this roof must have an opening to accommodate the chimney. Roof by Footprint from the Design Bar. Open the view Floor Plan: Level 3. 2.10. You may need to zoom in closer to select some of the smaller walls. The slope defining lines will be added later. 5. set the overhang to 600mm and uncheck Defines Slope. Use the Zoom To Fit command to view the entire floor plan. 1. 6.

7. Choose and when prompted answer Yes to attach the walls to the roof. defined as a footprint roof over the rear of the house. 184 . Roof by Footprint from the design bar. Hip Roof The next roof will be a hip. 4. Select the exterior edge of the wall as shown below. With the command selected. select the three walls shown below. 8. Then from the Options Bar. 5. Open the 3D view to view the new roof. Specify a 600mm Overhang and check the Defines Slope option from the options bar. If the line is created to the wrong side of the wall click on the Blue control arrows to flip the line to the other side of the wall. choose from the Design Bar. 3. set the offset to 0mm and select the Pick option. uncheck the Defines Slope option. Open the view Floor Plan: Level 2. To close the roof sketch. 1. Choose Roof. 2.

Edit the parameter Base Offset From Level to 0mm and choose . The lines must be closed to be a valid sketch. 10. the roof will be raised 600mm above the level. Select the line just added and the left vertical slope line. 9. When using the Trim/Extend tool. 8. Open the 3D view and rotate the view to see the back of the house as shown. The hip roof will join with the wall and continue into the main roof. To do this. Select Trim/Extend from the Tools menu. Choose from the design bar to access the roof properties dialog. Repeat the trim on the other corner. choose Tools and Join/Unjoin Roof. make sure to select the segment on the side that you want to keep. From the Options Bar make sure the corner option is selected. Select edge of the hip roof and face of the exterior wall as shown. 185 .6. To properly join the new roof to the main building. 7. Choose to complete the roof. Next. the Trim/Extend command will be used.

1. You may have to use the control arrows to offset the lines to the correct side of the wall. Open the view. Roof by Footprint from the design bar. Porch Roof The last roof we will design will begin as a porch roof over the entrance. Choose from the design bar and then set the Overhang to 300mm.11. 3. The resulting join is shown below. Select the three walls as shown below. 2. The Defines Slope should be unchecked. Floor Plan: Level 2. change the Overhang to 0mm and select the outside edge of the main wall as shown. Use the Trim/Extend tool from the Tools menu to close the sketch as shown. 186 . 5. Choose Roof. To close the sketch. 4. 6.

7. Select from the Design Bar and select the line at the front of the roof. Roof pitches can be defined as a rise over a run. . With the line still selected. it is gone by entering the Units dialogue from the Settings pulldown of the Menu Bar. or as an angle. 8. If you want to toggle between them at any point. 187 . choose Choose to close the Properties dialog. Check the option for Defines Slope from the Options Bar (or you can also press the right mouse button and select Toggle Slope Defining). The pitch will be set to 500mm.

then choose . 188 . 11.9. Slope Arrows The next step is to use slope arrows to define additional slope for the porch roof.600mm. Answer Yes when prompted to attach the walls to the roof. Select from the Design Bar and edit the Base Offset From Level parameter to be . Choose to complete the roof. 10. Open the 3D view and rotate the view as shown.

Choose to complete the roof. From the Option Bar select . The slope arrow will snap to the midpoint. 8. To add slope arrows. Open the Floor Plan: Level 2 view and zoom in around the porch roof sketch. and select the middle segment of the Defines Slope line Choose and uncheck the slope defining property. Add the second slope arrow as shown. This will make the roof sketch active. Open the 3D view to see the new roof 189 . Choose and locate them as shown. two reference planes will be added. Slope arrows are sketched like a line. Select and select the porch roof. and sketch the two planes vertically 4. 6. Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the middle of the line.1. Before adding the Slope Arrows we will divide the Defines Slope line into three segments. Choose Edit and Split Walls and Lines and split the Defines Slope where the reference planes intersect as shown. 2. To help locate the position to split the sketch line. 5. Make sure the Draw option is selected from the Options Bar. 9. choose from the Design Bar. tail to head. Next we will change the longest slope line segment to not be slope defining. 3. 7.

design.

190

Modifying Roof Constraints
In this exercise, we will demonstrate how to cut off a roof at a specific level and create a Mansard roof. 1. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog.

From the Metric folder, select restaurant_roof.rvt. Click Open.

2.

Open the North elevation view. Notice there are 4 levels defined in the model.

3.

We will cut off the current roof at Level 3. Choose Choose Properties.

and select the roof.

4.

Change the value of Cutoff Level to Level 3.

191

5.

Choose OK to update the properties.

6.

Open the view, Floor Plan: Level 3.

7.

We will create another roof starting at level 3.

From the Design Bar, choose Footprint. 8.

and select the option, Roof by

Choose from the design bar and then select Pick from the options bar. Make sure the Defines Slope is selected. Select the four edges of the roof at the cutoff as shown.

9.

10. Choose and select all four lines. Use the Control key to make multiple selections. Choose Properties. 11. Modify the Slope angle to 45.00°, then choose OK to close the Properties dialogue box.

192

12. Choose

to complete the new roof.

193

Creating Facia, Gutters and Soffits
This exercise will cover additional features for roofs. After creating a roof, users can easily create its fascia, gutters and soffits. First, you will learn how to create the roof fascia and gutter. Second, you will learn how to add the roof soffit.

Creating roof fascia
The Host Sweep command can be used in order to create the roof fascia. 1. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog.

From the Common folder, select Condominium.rvt. Click Open.

2. 3.

Go to File menu, click on Load From Library and select Load Family. In the Open dialog box, double click on Profiles folder. By holding the Ctrl key on the keyboard, select M_Fascia-Built-Up.rfa and M_Gutter - Cove.rfa and click Open. These files are in the Metric library.

194

4.

On the Modeling tab of the design bar, click on Host Sweep command and select Roof Fascia.

5.

On the option bar, click on Properties button. Within the Element Properties dialog box, click on Edit/New in order to access to the Type Properties of fascia.

195

6.

Within the Type Properties dialog box, click on Duplicate and type “Built-up Fascia” as the name of new fascia type. Press OK.

7.

Within the Type Properties dialog box, from the Profile drop-down list, select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286, and press OK. Press OK again to exit the Element Properties dialog box.

196

8.

Move the mouse cursor to the top edge of the roof.

9.

Click on all the roof top edges to place the fascia.

10. Repeat as necessary to place the facial around the roof

Creating Gutters
The Host Sweep command is also used in order to create the “Roof Gutter”, placing at the bottom edge of the roof. 1. On the Modeling tab of the design bar, click on Host Sweep command and select 197

Roof Gutter. 2. 3. On the option bar, click on Properties button. Within the Element Properties dialog box, click on Edit/New in order to access to the Type Properties of gutter. Within the Type Properties dialog box, click on Duplicate and type “Cove Shape Gutter” as the name of new gutter type. Press OK.

4.

Within the Type Properties dialog box, under Profile parameter, click on the Value pull-down, select M_Gutter – Cove: 125 x125mm. Under Material parameter, select Metal – Aluminum and press OK. Press OK again to exit the Element Properties dialog box.

5. Move the mouse cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.

6. Click on all the roof bottom edges to place the gutter.

198

7.

After selecting all the edges, it should look like the following:

Fascia and Gutters

Creating roof soffit
You are now using the Roof command in order to create the “Roof Soffit”, placed underneath the roof. 1. From the Project Browser, go to Floor Plans – Roof plan view.

199

2. 3.

On the Basics or Modeling tab of the design bar, click on Roof command and select Roof Soffit. From the design bar, click on Pick Roofs command. Prehighlight the roof and click on it to select.

4.

Click Finish Sketch and go to the 3D view.

200

5.

In order to clean up the overlapping geometries, on the Tools menu bar, click on Join Geometry.First, pick the roof and then click on the soffit in order to join them together.

Roof Soffit after Join Geometry

201

However. the boundary of the room will prehighlight. Tip: The default behavior is to automatically define a ceiling for each enclosed area that you select. 3. 1. In order to see the ceilings as you create them. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. 202 . Click once to select it and the ceiling immediately appears. You will also learn how to: • • Create a new ceiling type Apply a material as a ceiling surface pattern. Floor Plan: Level 1 2. Ceiling Plan: Level 1. Creating Automatic Ceilings In the first part of this exercise. From the Modelling tab of the design bar. you will learn how to create ceilings using the AutoCeiling tool. Click Open. however. you will learn how to create several ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. click Ceiling. center room. Place the cursor inside the upper.Creating Ceilings In this exercise. you may choose Sketch Ceiling from the Options Bar and define the ceiling manually. Note: You can create ceilings in Floor Plan views. choose the 2' x 4' grid. you can not see them unless you modify the view range. select Ceiling. open the view. From the Type Selector.rvt. From the Common folder. 4.

select Plain. you will create new ceiling types. Naming the New Ceiling Type 5. Click Duplicate in order to create a new type of ceiling. 203 . Select Edit/New in order to access to the Type Properties box. In the Type Properties box. you will change the existing ceiling grids to other surface patterns.Interior . 3. Tip: You may need to use the <Tab> key to toggle between the ceiling grid lines and the actual ceiling. Name the ceiling. From the Design Bar. 2. 2' x 2' grid. Select the room on the left and the room on the right as shown in the image below. go to the Material drop-down list and select Finishes .Adding a Ceiling 5. Creating 2' x 2' Ceilings 7. located in the room on the left. 4. 6. center room to add the ceiling. select the 2' x 2' grid.Wood Diagonal Strips 6". choose Modify and select the ceiling. Select Properties. 1. From the Type Selector drop-down list. From the Type Selector drop-down list. Click in the lower. Wood Diagonal Strips 6"and click OK. Before doing this. Ceiling Surface Patterns In this part of the exercise.

Ceiling Plan: Level 1 204 . 6. center room. Select the plain ceiling in the lower.Choose OK twice to close the properties dialog boxes. Selecting the New Ceiling Material Notice the change to the selected ceiling. choose Wood Vertical Strips 6". Ceiling Plan: Level 1 Note: If the new ceiling appears as a solid fill pattern. From the Type Selector. zoom in until the diagonal strip pattern becomes visible. The ceiling will update as shown below.

click on Duplicate and type Gypsum board on metal furring channels as the name of new ceiling type. 5. click Ceiling. 1. 3 dimensional. 6. Go to the project browser and open Ceiling Plans – First Floor plan view. Condominium. click on Edit/New in order to access to the Type Properties of Ceiling. 3. click on Properties button. From the Common folder. select Condominium. Within the Structure parameter. compound ceilings are now supported in Autodesk Revit. click Edit button in order to access to the Edit Assembly dialog box of the compound ceiling.rvt 2. Within the Element Properties dialog box. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. On the option bar. Press OK.rvt. Click Open. 205 .Creating Compound Ceilings This exercise will cover expanded functionality for ceiling. On the Modeling tab of the design bar. 4. Within the Type Properties dialog box.

Furring. insert the following layers and assign function. Within the Element Properties. In the Edit Assembly dialog box. pick the 206 . Press OK to exit the Type Properties. 7/8” Metal . 10. press OK again to exit the dialog box.Interior . material and thickness: 1 1/2” Metal .Edit Assembly 7. 9.Gypsum Wall Board. with the mouse cursor. In Ceiling Plans – First Floor plan view. Click the Preview button to display the current layers. 5/8” Finishes . 8.Cold Rolled Channel.

Level 1 11.common area in order to insert Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. 207 . Go to the project browser and open Sections – Section 1 view in order to see the compound ceiling. 12. From the View menu. choose View Properties. Set the Detail Level to Medium and choose OK. Reflected Ceiling Plan .

Change the value of the Underlay parameter in the View Properties dialog to Level Above. please open Floor Plan: Level 1 and zoom in now. you will create a set of stairs from the lobby to the second level landing. First. The project should open with the Level 1 view open and zoomed into the front entryway as shown below. From the Metric folder.rvt. You should now see the outline of the floors and walls from Level 2 as an underlay. Choose OK to close the dialog. 2.Creating Stairs In this exercise you will learn: • • • • • How to create and modify stairs using Run. Boundary and Riser commands How to create different stair types How to create and modify railings How to modify railing types How to create multi-story stairs Creating the Lobby Stairs 1. Click Open. This will allow you to properly place the stairs. If it does not. Before you create the stairs. you will turn on the display of Level 2 in the Level 1 Floor Plan. select Stair_exercise_metric. To do this. choose View and View Properties. 208 . Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog.

6. 4. choose Stairs from the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this case you will use a straight run. 3. On the options bar. This allows you to create the stairs by selecting the start and end of the run.. To start the stair creation. Move the pointer approximately as shown in the next figure so the run is vertical and click to end the run of stairs. 209 . Place the pointer approximately as shown in the next figure and click with the right mouse button to start the stairs. The default stair creation method is to sketch the centerline run of the stairs (Run is selected in the Sketch design bar). The result of the stair run should appear as shown in the next figure. notice you can use either a straight run or a circular run . 5.

7. Choose Finish Sketch. Reopen the view. There is a 3D view already created called Lobby Stair View to help you view the stairs in 3D. You will now properly place the stair up to the landing on Level 2. 210 . To do this choose Align from the options bar and select the front of the level 2 landing floor. Floor plan: Level 1. Your stairs should be completed as shown. Open this view by clicking on the name of the view in the browser. 8.

10. Next. Open the 3D view to see the result.9. Click the center of the wall first and then the center of the stairs. Align the center of the wall under the landing with the center of the stairs. DO NOT lock the alignment. 211 . select the front of the top stair.

The stairs were created using the properties of the default stair type called Stair:190mm Max Riser 250mm Going. change the Type properties of the stairs while defining a new stair type. Choose OK and OK to complete the change of the stairs to the new type with the new parameters.Wood. Notice in the status bar as you pre-highlight the stairs and railings they are considered separate families even though the railings were created with the stairs. To do this.260mm Tread Front Profile. and the Actual Depth (Tread) to be 260mm.Finishes. 14. 15.Carpet 1 Riser Material.Interior. Choose Modify and move the pointer over the stairs and railings. To view these properties.Stair Nosing.11. the Width to be 1200mm. Next.Interior. Give the stairs a new name called Lobby Stairs. 12. Change the following Type Parameters: • • • • • Minimum Depth (Tread). 13. Open the section view called Stair Section by double-clicking on the name of the section in the Project Browser. You will use this stair type in your next run of stairs. 212 .Cherry Click OK to return to the Element Properties dialog. choose Edit/New from the Properties dialog box and Duplicate.Carpet 1 Stringer Material.Pan: Stair Tread Material. Choose OK.Finishes. select the stairs and choose Properties. Change the Tread Thickness to be 25mm.

you will change the shape of the stairs. Choose Modify and select both railings (press and hold the <Ctrl> key when selecting multiple items). 213 . Next. The owner wishes to have a stair that is wider at the bottom and narrower at the top. In the options bar choose Edit Sketch. Open Level 1 and align the floor and the stair again. select the stair and then click and drag the stair away from the landing. 17. You will alter the boundary of the staircase by defining two arcs that form the outside boundary. Now you will be able to select the edge of the stair easier to align it. click the drop-down arrow to list the predefined railing types in the project.16. In the Type Selector. To accomplish this. Open the view. To align the stair it will be easier to select the end of the run if you move the stairs away from the landing. Zoom in on the stairs. open the Level 1 Floor Plan view. Choose Modify and select the stairs. Now you will change the railing type. Lobby Stair View. Notice the railings change. 17. Select Railing: Guardrail Pipe. Notice the stair properties change. Because of the change. To do this. the stairs do not line up with the level 2 floor. Do not lock the alignment.

and select the center run blue line as the mirror axis. To place the second arc endpoint. There will be a green location line to the wall and the riser as shown in the next figure. From the Options Bar. Place your pointer over the left. 19. Delete this line. 20. From the Design Bar. 214 . green boundary line and click on it to select it. choose Mirror from the tool bar. Select the arc boundary you just created. choose the Three Point Arc icon. choose Modify. . To create the boundary for the other side. Move the pointer approximately as shown in the next figure and click to place the arc.18. choose Boundary. click at the left end of the top riser. select the right side boundary and delete it. Start the sketch at the intersection of the bottom riser and the left wall.

Click the arrow to reverse the stairs. To do this open the Level 1 floor plan. 215 . Delete the first riser line as shown. At the bottom of the stairs. Choose Modify and select the stairs. return to Floor Plan: Level 1 and select the stairs.21. 22. Choose Finish Sketch to complete the stairs. Choose Edit Sketch from the Options bar. you will modify the first step profile. Note: If your stairs appear to be backwards or upside down. 23. Next. you will notice a discreet blue arrow that controls the stair direction. Open the Lobby Stair View to see the results.

Choose Finish Sketch and open the Lobby Stair View to see the results.24. 25. This will define a rounded first step. Note: Stairs can actually be created by sketching the boundary and riser lines. Typically. This alternative method of sketching stairs could be useful for irregularly shaped stairs. Zoom in on the area shown. stairs are created as described in the previous steps and modified as needed. From the View menu. Save the file to a new name if you wish. 216 . Open the Level 2 floor plan. Now you will create stairs from the second floor landing to the third floor. Choose Riser and sketch a three point arc as shown in the next figure. select View Properties and set the Underlay to Level Above. Creating the Second Floor Lobby Stairs 1.

Open the Level 2 floor plan view and zoom into the area shown in the next figure. To set the stair type to the same type as used in the previous stair. Align the top step of the stair to the floor above. Change the instance parameters for: • • Tread Thickness.2. When aligning. Change the railing type to Railing: Guardrail-Pipe. 5. Choose Finish Sketch to complete the stairs. 217 . Choose Stairs from the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2. click on the drop down arrow of the type field and select the type from the list. 6.25 mm Width. This will allow you to create the stairs of the same type as before. 4. make sure to select the edge of the floor first and then the top edge of the stair. Adding the Level 2 Landing Railing 1.1200 mm Sketch the stairs as shown below. Lock the alignment. choose Stairs Properties.

Choose Modify and select the right side railing. This is typically done in plan view. To create the railing. place your cursor over the railing to pre-highlight it and look at the status bar in the lower left corner of the window. 3. choose Edit Sketch. 5. Once the railing is selected. Therefore. It should read Railings: Railing: Guardrail-Pipe. you could just sketch the plan view path. Choose Lines from the Sketch Design Bar. To make sure you are selecting the railing.2. the railing is one continuous path from the stair railing around the perimeter of the landing. in this case. For simple railings. If it does not pre-highlight the railing. Check the Chain option and sketch the following line for the extension of the railing. you will edit the profile of the railing and sketch in the required additional path segments. you need to define the path of the railing. 4. Exact dimensions are not critical. 218 . Continue sketching the rail outline as shown below. However. try using the <Tab> key to toggle to the railing.

Zoom into the area shown below. 11.6. You can turn it off by choosing Visibility/Graphics from the View menu. 9. choose Railing Properties and change the type to Railing: Guardrail. Add the railing to the other side of the stair using the same method. Simply butt the railing up against the other stairs to terminate the railing. The "UP" tag may be obscuring where you want to sketch the railing. 10. open the Level 2 floor plan and choose Railing from the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Choose OK. Scroll down to Stairs and expand the Stair subcategories by clicking on the X. In the Sketch Design Bar. 7. Choose Lines and sketch the following line. 8.Pipe. Uncheck UP text. To do this. 219 . Add the remaining rail between the stair and the wall. Choose Finish Sketch and switch to a 3D view to see the results.

you will create a reference plane. Modify the distance from the center of the right wall to be 850 mm. Adding the Emergency Exit Stairs 1. First. To help in placing the stairs. Choose Finish Sketch and change to a 3D view to see the results. choose Ref Plane from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click at each end where shown in the next figure to place the reference plane.12. Now you will add the emergency exit stairs. To do this. 2. Create the second reference plane offset from the left wall 810 mm. 220 . open the Level 1 floor plan and zoom in on the area shown in the next figure.

8. Tread Material. Choose Stairs from the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Change the following parameters: 7. 9. 5. Choose Stairs Properties and change the Width parameter to 915 mm. click on the midpoint of the edge of the platform.Metal-Paint Finish. Move the pointer vertically to a distance of 2080 mm and click to place the first run.Metal-Paint Finish. 7. Exit Stairs. you will need to create a U shaped run. name the new stair type. When prompted. Choose Edit/New and then Duplicate to create a new stair type.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels Riser Material. 6. Dark Grey Matte Stringer Material.Finishes. 6. To start sketching the run. To sketch the run of the stairs.3. Dark Grey Matte Choose OK and OK. There also needs to be a one step offset in the U shape. 221 . 4.

222 . Move the pointer to the right and line it up with the next to last riser line (to form the offset) and the reference plane. Choose Finish Sketch to complete the stairs. 9. 13.8. Move the pointer vertically to the edge of the platform and click to finish the stair run.

To view the stairs in a 3D view. You will temporarily hide two of the walls so you can see the stairs in this orientation. and change the parameter for Multi-Story Top Level to Level 3. 223 . The walls will now be hidden.14. 15. This stair repeats itself on the next floor. Select the two walls of the stair tower. Choose Hide Selected from the Temporary Hide/Isolate dialog. select the stairs. To create this. Orient the view as shown in the next figure and zoom in on the stair area. This is a multi-story stair. Choose View and Hide/Isolate. choose 3D from the Toolbar. Close the Temporary Hide/Isolate dialog box by clicking the X in the upper right corner. choose Properties. 16.

First. click on the row number and choose Delete. Choose Edit from the Rail Structure parameter. For the Baluster Family parameter. 21. The railing on the stair that is against the wall will simply be a pipe that follows the wall. 18. Make sure there is only one row with a Height of 914. From the Properties dialog. select the railing and choose Properties. Choose OK to close the dialog and then close the other dialog boxes to see the result. 20. choose None. choose View. To create this. you will create a new railing type and modify the structure to define it.8 mm. To un-hide the walls you selected earlier.4 mm and an Offset of 50. To delete a row. 224 .17. choose Edit/New and then Duplicate. Hide/Isolate and those walls. Enter a new railing name. 19.

Also. open the Floor Plan – Street Level view and zoom into the exterior main entrance stair.Stair Calculator This exercise will cover a new stair type parameter called “Stair Calculation Rules”. With the mouse cursor. Go to the project browser. Click Open. Originally. within the Element Properties dialog box.rvt. select Condominium. the Actual Depth (Tread) of this stair is equal to the Minimum Depth (Tread) which is 11” as set in the Type Properties box.e. Creating an exterior stair using stair calculator 1. From the Common folder. You are now observing the exterior main entrance stair which was originally created without using “Stair Calculation Rules” parameter. click on this stair and go to its Properties. 3. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. i. 2. Exercise: You will learn how to use the stair calculator in order to compute automatically the actual tread depth of a stair based on the riser height and an equation that links the two. this stair was created using the standard method. the Actual Rise (Riser) is computed automatically to 6 55/64” which is the result of the 225 .

click the Edit button. the tread depth has no dependency or relationship with the actual riser height. In the standard method. 6. It will then lead you to the Stair Calculator dialog box. Put a check in the box of “Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation” in order 226 . 5. Since this stair contains 6 treads. You will now use the Stair Calculation Rules method to create the exterior main entrance stair. 4. the total run length is 6 x 11” = 66” or 5’-6”. click on Edit/New button.Distance between Base and Top Level divided by Desired Number of Risers. In order to access to the Type Properties dialog box of this stair. Within the Type Properties box. in “Stair Calculation Rules” parameter.

Y is a value to multiply the actual tread depth. we will use 26 1/2" or 2' 2 1/2". Where X is a value to multiply the actual riser height as indicated in the Element Properties. Next the Threshold Values range will be set. In the Calculation Rule equation set the values. For this exercise. 8. Press OK button. since the main entrance stair is an outdoor stair. Generally. Z is the result and should be a value within the Threshold Values range. 227 . the Tread = (Z–X*Riser) / Y. for comfort and safety purposes some building codes may suggest this equation to be 2 * Riser + 1 * Tread = 26” to 27”.to activate the Stair Calculator. Autodesk Revit can compute the actual tread depth derived from the Calculation Rule equation: X*Riser+ Y*Tread = Z. when using the Stair Calculator method. Deriving from the Calculation Rule equation. For this example. 2 * Risers + 1 * Tread = 2' 2 1/2". 7. Change the “Maximum Result for Stair Calculator” to 27” (or 2’ 3”) and “Minimum Result for Stair Calculator” to 26” (or 2' 2”). By default. the maximum and minimum Threshold Values range is provided by some design standards or building codes).

Choose OK to ignore this message and choose OK to close the two properties dialog boxes. click on Stair command. 11. 228 . This is because the parameters only take effect when new stairs are created. 10. Select Stair Properties from the design bar and change the stair type to Outdoor stairs. A warning about the actual tread depth and riser height do not match the new parameters. On the Modeling tab of the design bar. select the existing stairs and Delete them.9. Since these parameters apply to new stairs.

13. The actual tread depth is determined automatically by Autodesk Revit using this equation: Tread = (Z–X*Riser) / Y = (2’-2 ½” – 2*6 55/64”) / 1 = 1’-0 25/32” which is now indicated in “Actual Depth (Tread)” parameter within the Element Properties dialog box. 229 . Place dimensions in order to see the new total run length and actual tread depth generated automatically by Revit after enabling the Stair Calculator.12. Redraw the exterior main entrance stair and click Finish Sketch once it’s done.

Also. If the manual value doesn’t meet one of these requirements. for any value that you type in. However. Revit will give you a warning and the stair will be shown in magenta until the error is resolved. Revit will verify if it meets the requirements of “Minimum Depth (Tread)” as set in the Type Properties and of “Threshold Values” as set in the Stair Calculator. 230 .Since this stair contains 6 treads. the total run length is 6 x 1’-0 25/32” = 6’-4 23/32. it is important to know that you can always readjust manually this indicated “Actual Depth (Tread)” value.

Take a moment to spin the model around and familiarize yourself with the project. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. For example. Simple House. When required. 231 . Units may or may not be the result of a direct conversion. or ceilings using the Opening command.Cutting Openings in Roofs. When creating a hosted opening. you will cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut. you will learn how to: Cut and modify openings in a roof • • • • Perpendicular to a selected plane Vertically Cut an opening into a floor Cut an opening into a ceiling Note: This tutorial was designed for both imperial and metric units of measurement. 2. and Ceilings You can cut openings on the faces of roofs.rvt— 3D View 3. Floors. you have the option to cut perpendicular to a selected plane. Open each Floor Plan. select Simple House. In addition. In the exercise that follows. Retrieve the Training File 1.rvt. roof. floors. 30' 0" [10meters]. Section: Section 1. both units will be supplied with the Imperial unit given first and the subsequent Metric unit surrounded by brackets. In this exercise. From the Metric folder. Click Open. you will cut openings in a floor and ceiling that will expose the stairs beneath them. or vertically through a selected floor. Open the view. or ceiling.

3D View: Level 1 Interior View Later in the exercise. The cut on the left is perpendicular to the roof face. the roof shown below is exceptionally thick. 4. floor. you will add openings to both the ceiling and the floor. the cut on the right is vertical through the roof. the differences are more apparent because extrusions have been added to the openings. or ceiling. 232 . Cutting Roof Openings When creating a hosted opening. In the image shown below. Open the 3D View: Level 1 Interior View.Section: Section 1 Notice that a set of stairs exist. Roof with Perpendicular (Left) and Vertical (Right) Openings In the image shown below. This condition is more apparent in one of the preexisting 3D views. For training purposes. notice the differences in the two cuts. you have the option to make the opening perpendicular to the selected plane or you can cut the opening vertically through the selected roof. however. there is no opening in the floor or ceiling.

select . 233 . select 2. Choose Pick a planar face of a roof. Click OK. 4. Place the cursor over the front face of the roof. From the Toolbar. 5. to open a 3D view. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. you will alter your 3D view. 3D View 3. 6. select it. Once it prehighlights. From the Toolbar. Selecting the Roof Face Once you select the plane. you need to sketch the shape of the opening. From the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Roof with Extrusions Penetrating Roof Openings Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening 1. To do this with a greater degree of precision. At this point. choose A dialog will appear asking to to select an option: . Orient the view so it resembles the image below. floor. you will immediately enter sketch mode.

select Finish Sketch. . Select the arrow at the right edge of the dialog. Sketching the Opening 9. 234 . From the Design Bar. select from the Toolbar. After doing so. to spin the New Roof Opening Creating a Vertical Roof Opening 1. Sketch a 5' 0" x 5' 0" [1500mm x 1500mm] square on the right side of the roof. 8.7. model around. Choose Southeast Isometric from the Orient to a Direction drop-down list. Select the arrow at the right edge of the dialog. select South Elevation from the Orient to a Direction dropdown list. The new roof opening will appear. With the 3D View open. From the Design Bar. Use the Dynamic View tool. Use the image below as a guide. Use the image below Step 8 as a guide. click Lines and choose the Rectangle sketching tool from the Design Bar. Reorienting the 3D View You may want to spin the model vertically in order to be perpendicular to the roof face that you selected. Close the Dynamic View dialog when finished.

Select the arrow at the right edge of the dialog. When it prehighlights. Choose the placement option. or ceiling and cut vertically. If it is not. Place the cursor over the roof. select it. Selecting the Roof 5. choose if from the Design Bar. Using the rectangle sketching tool located in the Options Bar. 6. By default. From the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. floor. Setting the Placement Options 4. this is not the case. In the steps that follow. choose . Select from the Toolbar. the Lines tool should be selected. 235 . sketch a 5' 0" x 5' 0" [1500mm x 1500mm] square on the left side of the roof. Pick a roof. 3.Setting the 3D View Direction Close the Dynamic View dialog. Sketching the Vertical Roof Opening Despite the appearance that the square shown in the image above is roughly aligned with the opening you added previously. Click OK. Use the image below as a guide. 2. you will adjust to view in order to precisely place the opening.

floor. 7. 1. Moving the Location of the Opening 6. select the vertically cut opening. Reorienting the 3D View Notice that the location of the sketched opening is not where it appeared when sketching it in the southeast isometric view. Spin the model or reorient the 3D View to a southeast isometric viewpoint. Click Finish Sketch from the Design Bar. or ceiling. Within the 3D View.) 3D View— Oriented to Direction: Top 6. (The exact location of your sketch may vary from the image below. 236 . Notice the new opening and the difference between the perpendicular cut and the vertically cut opening. Select all four sketched lines and move them so that they are aligned with the previously created opening. you can modify the opening itself or move it to a new location.Choose Top from the Orient to a Direction drop-down list. 3D View with 2 Roof Openings Modifying an Existing Opening After adding an opening to a roof.

Use the Dynamic View tool to reorient the direction of the view to Top. 6. 4. 3D View Oriented to Top 7. Select Finish Sketch. 2. Use the Rotate tool and attempt to replicate the rotation in the image below. You may need to use the <Tab> key to toggle to the opening rather than the entire roof. select Edit Sketch. 8. (Hint: After selecting the opening and choosing the Rotate tool. Drag the opening to a new position on the roof. You can use the Align and Rotate tools on an existing opening. Delete the previously sketched lines and sketch a circle on the left side of the roof. place the cursor over the opening until it prehighlights. Within a 3D View. Once the opening prehighlights. select the vertically placed opening that you rotated in the previous step. In the image below.) 3D View: Shaded with Edges 3. 237 .To do this. Use the Dynamic View tool to once again reorient the view to a southeast isometric direction. Notice that this view direction does not offer a good working plane. you may need to go to the Roof floor plan to complete the rotation. notice that the vertically placed opening has been rotated and relocated. From the Options Bar. 5. select it.

Select Reference Plane from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using the image below for guidance. Finding the Proper Head Height 3. From the Toolbar. 1. Section 1. 238 . Adding a Reference Plane to the Section View. Head Height.3D View— southeast isometric Cutting an Opening in a Floor Next. Note: Do not add the dimension. Before adding the opening. 5. select the Tape Measure tool. you will add a reference plane within the section view. choose . which appears in the image above. This dimension was added only as a training aid. you will cut an opening in a floor above an existing set of stairs. Use the tool to find the tread that allows you the proper head height. . Open the Section view. add a vertical reference plane that is aligned to the edge of the stair tread. This plane will become a sketching reference when you draw the opening. From the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This reference plane will be located at the point where you want to set the head height clearance. 4. 2.

Selecting a Sketching View 9. you will be prompted to select a view. Pick a roof. or ceiling and cut vertically. choose Wireframe. This will allow you to snap the opening to the corner of the stairs.6. Click OK. select it. Since the opening will be hosted by the floor on Level 2. Setting the Placement Options 7. Choose the placement option. floor. 239 . From the View menu. Place the cursor over the floor. When it prehighlights. Selecting the Floor 8. Click Open View. select Floor Plan: Level 2. Once you select the floor.

Floor Plan: Level 2 10. you add an opening to the ceiling. 12. select it from the Design Bar. 1. Use the image below for guidance. 240 . Section: Section 1 if it is not already the active view. Open the view. Sketch the rectangular opening from the lower. the Lines tool should be active. Open the view. Section: Section 1 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In the final section of this exercise. By default. Notice the new floor opening. Sketching the Rectangular Opening 11. Section: Section 1. right corner of the stairs to the upper edge of the stairs where it intersects the reference plane you added previously. Select Finish Sketch. If it is not. Choose the Rectangle sketching tool from the Options Bar.

When it prehighlights. 6. Immediately after selecting the ceiling. Selecting the Ceiling 5. or ceiling and cut vertically. floor. Open the view. right corner of the stairs to the intersection of the upper stair edge and the reference plane you added previously. sketch a rectangle from the lower. 8. Section: Section 1. Using the Rectangle sketching tool available in the Options Bar. Select Finish Sketch. Choose Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1 and click Open View. Choose the placement option. Click OK.2. Section 1 241 . 3. Pick a roof. Place the cursor over the ceiling. From the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. choose . select it. Setting the Placement Options 4. Sketching the Ceiling Opening 7. you will be prompted to select a sketching view.

The stairs now rise to the second floor unimpeded. 9.Notice the new opening in the ceiling. Note: This project file is used with several tutorials. Do not overwrite the original project file. select Save as from the File menu and give the project a unique name. Open the view. 3D View: Level 1 Interior View. If you want to save this file. 242 . Level 1 Interior View 10.

rvt. select the view Floor Plan: Level 1 and press the right mouse button to display the popup menu. fixtures. select Drawing_Exercise. we will create a drawing sheet for both a Floor Plan and a Furniture Plan of Level 1. select the view in the Project Browser and press the right mouse button and choose Rename from the popup menu. Click Open. The visibility of all of the furniture. From the Project Browser. copy views to be used on multiple sheets. To rename the copied view. 5. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. and update drawing sheet parameters. The following dialogue box will appear. you will create drawings of an existing project. and electrical equipment will be turned off for this view. • Casework • Furniture • Lighting Fixtures • Speciality Equipment 6. The exercise will show you how to add multiple views to a sheet. 1. select the Model Categories tab and deselect (uncheck) all of the following categories: 4. In this exercise. 2. Choose Duplicate and a copy of the plan view will be created called "Copy of Level 1". From the View Visibility/Graphics dialogue. Activate the Floor Plan: Level 1 view. Choose to update the display of this view. Setting Project Information Editing the Project Information parameters allows the project information to be automatically passed to the titleblock.Creating Drawings In the following exercise. Choose Project Information from the Settings menu. To do this we must copy the view Floor Plan: Level 1. Choose View and select Visibility/Graphics. 3. 243 . 1. From the Metric folder. Rename the view to "Level 1 Furniture ".

3. to display Name the Sheet. Select the titleblock A0 metric from the dialogue and choose OK. Press to accept the changes. New and Sheet. Choose the Properties dialogue box. Edit the other parameters as shown. Edit the address information . Ground Floor Plan as shown in the next figure. 244 . Adding a Titleblock 1. Now the views will be added to the drawing sheets.2. Edit the properties of the sheet to add the values to the tags. Choose and select the border of the sheet. 3. Select as shown and choose to edit the Project Address. Choose and notice the change to the titleblock. To create a drawing sheet choose View. 2.

Now choose View and View Properties. Note: If the View tab is not available on the Design Bar.Adding Views to Sheets 1. The view scale is a property of the view in the model. Select and select the view and move it to the centre of the sheet 245 . To do this. Add the Floor Plan: Level 1 view to the drawing. the view must first be deactivated. right-click the Design Bar and select View from the pop-up menu. From the menu bar. Activate View. choose Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. Deactivate View. Select the name of the view from the list and choose the view by clicking in the center of the sheet. 3. and place 2. choose View. To adjust the position the view on the sheet. To change the scale. The current scale of the view is too small for the sheet. Choose to see the scale change on the sheet. Click in the View Scale value box and select 1:20 from the drop down menu. select the view and choose View.

6. The overall length and width dimensions of the building will be added. Choose and select the door. Select the outer faces of the two outside vertical walls with the left mouse button. Dimensions will now be added to this view. You can also access this command from the popup menu by pressing the right mouse button when the cursor is in the view on a drawing sheet. Click the control arrows until the door is oriented as shown below. Select the view on the drawing sheet and choose View. 4. Select the options of Linear and Prefer wall faces from the toolbar. 2. Annotating the View 1. Choose from the Drafting tab of the design bar (or select Dimension from the Drafting menu. Repeat this for the two horizontal walls as shown below. Next the door in the right corner of the upper. 246 . then place the dimension by selecting the location where the dimension should be placed. Activate View to activate this viewport for modification. 5. 3. exterior wall will be reoriented.as shown below.

such as dimension. 4. Deactivate View.Furniture Ground Floor". Deactivate the viewport by selecting View. Model geometry. Now the view will be added to a sheet. Adding Additional Sheets 1.. Notice the two dimensions have been added to this view and the door has updated. Activate the view Level 1 Furniture by double picking the view by name from the Project Browser. Next open the view Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. only appear on the view where they were created. 6. choose metric titleblock to be added. Annotation objects. You may have to do a Zoom To Fit to see the newly scaled view. will update in every view. Select Floor . To from the View tab of the Design Bar. select the [+] next to Sheets to expand the listing of drawing sheets. notes. Before adding the view to the sheet. etc. 2. because it is already on a drawing sheet. 3. to activate the view. Select "A102 . 5. Plan: Level 1 Furniture from the list and choose Choose Zoom to Fit to see the newly added view. Modify the scale from 1:100 to 1:20 and choose OK to update the view. Choose Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. 7. A new sheet will now be added to the project for the Furniture plan of Level 1.7. Notice the Floor Plan: Level 1 view is not listed. press the right mouse button to display the popup menu and choose Open. 8. Centre the view on the drawing sheet as shown below. but the door is in the correct orientation. Select the A0 do this. Choose View and View Properties. Open the view Floor Plan: Level 1 from the Project Browser. From the Project Browser. 247 . we will modify the scale of the view. Modify the Sheet Properties and change the sheet name to "Furniture Plan Ground Floor" and the sheet number to be "A102". Notice the dimensions do not appear. if modified.

1. Activate View to make this view active.Modifying The Model Objects in the model can be modified directly from the drawing sheets. 248 .and choosing "Activate Viewport" from the popup menu. and zoom in around the lower left corner of the 3. Choose and select lamp (next to the lounge chair). From the Type Selector change the type to M_Floor Lamp1. This can also be done by selecting the view. select building. To do this the viewport must be active. Selector should display 4. we will make changes to the furniture. Once the view is active. 2. right clicking. Select the view on the sheet and choose View. With the A102 Furniture Ground Floor sheet active. The Type .

To create the new view. Choose and select the horizontal. 6. Notice the changes made to the furniture and wall position have updated here as well.rvt Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture" to activate this view. New and Callout. A new Callout view of the room in the lower left corner will be created and be placed on a drawing sheet. chair. We will demonstrate how to add multiple views to the drawing sheet and how to modify view properties. Next. choose Activate Dimensions from the Options Bar. have also moved. If the temporary dimension does not appear after selecting the wall. Modify the 4500mm dimension to be 5200mm. The horizontal interior wall of this room will now be moved. 1. Choose Window from the menubar and select the view "Drawing_exercise. 7. callouts and sections) will be created and added to our drawing sheets. This is because of the "Moves with Nearby Elements" option. Notice the furniture components adjacent to the wall. draw a rectangle around the room as shown to create the callout view. Creating New Views New view types (elevations.5. 249 . desk and file cabinet. interior wall shown below. choose View.

6. We will now add the callout to a new sheet. Choose the view as shown below. To see the new callout view. Change the position of the view tag. To add the view of "Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture". 5. You can also use the "Go to Callout View" option from the popup menu. choose from and position the design bar and select the view from the list. and pick on the dashed 3.2. Select the blue dot adjacent to the view tag and drag the dot to the new position shown below. Select the A0 metric titleblock. 4. 250 . and select . Select border of the callout view. choose and double pick the view symbol. From the design bar. select the View tab.

button from the View tab of the design bar to create a new 10. 8. "Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture" and zoom in around the view tag of the callout. Open the Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture and Zoom to Fit. As the mouse is moved. 251 . Move the cursor to the room in the lower left corner of the building. Open the view. Choose elevation view. Choose and select the arrow portion of the elevation symbol. Notice the Elevation symbol at the end of the cursor. Another view type will be created and then placed on the sheet "A103". Notice the tag has updated with the drawing sheet number and has assigned detail id number. 11.7. This will display the view extents for this elevation view. notice the elevation symbol will point the to closest wall. Place the new elevation as shown below by clicking with the left mouse button. 9.

These views will now be placed on the drawing sheet "A103". Choose Edit/New to access the type properties. 19. Activate the sheet view. Elevation 1:a and Elevation 1:c. 18. 13. use the drag handle to reposition the far clip plane to include the back wall of the room. 15. 252 . 16. 14. select Circle and then choose OK. If necessary. Check the bottom box to create a new view 180 degrees from the first view created. Notice the project browser now displays two new elevation views. The names of the views may differ from this example. Next click on the square portion of the symbol. Next the symbol will be changed from a square to a circle. Elements beyond this line will not be drawn in the elevation.12. The symbol should display as shown below. Choose and select the arrow portion of the new lower elevation . This will display the view extents for this elevation view. This represents the far clip plane of the elevation. From the Shape drop-down list. 17. Choose Properties to display the Properties dialogue box. "A103". Notice the green dashed line towards the bottom of the room. from the Project Browser. Choose OK to update the properties of the view.

20. Choose Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. Select the first of newly created elevation views (Elevation 1:a) to add to the sheet. Position the view as shown.

21. Add the other elevation view (Elevation 1:c) to the sheet and position as shown.

22. Activate the sheet view "A102 - Furniture Plan: Level 1" and zoom in around the elevation tag created in the lower left room. Notice the symbol has updated to reflect the sheet number and detail id's of the views.

253

23. The last view to be created and placed on the sheet will be a section view. Open the view Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. 24. Zoom in around the kitchen in the upper right corner of the building as shown.

25. From the View tab of the Design Bar, choose . Click with the left mouse button once to start the section creation, then drag the mouse to the end and click with the left mouse button again. The first pick is the 'head' of the section.

24. Flip the section to point west (left) as shown. To do this, select then select the section and click the control arrows to reverse the direction.

,

254

25. Next this view will be added to the sheet "A103". Activate the sheet "A103" from the Project Browser. 26. Choose Add View from the View Design Bar and select the newly created section view from the list. Position the view as shown.

27. The scale of this view will be changed. Select the view, click the right mouse button to display the popup menu and choose Activate View. 28. Choose View, View Properties to display the properties dialogue box. Change the 1:20 scale to be 1:50. Choose OK to update the view properties.

29. Choose Deactivate View and reposition the view as shown.

255

30. Choose

to save the project.

256

Detailing
In this exercise we will demonstrate the detailing functionality in Autodesk Revit. The areas this exercise will cover are: Creating Section and Callout views Creating Detail Lines Using Detail Components Manipulating View Properties The exercise will use a small house to demonstrate the detailing functionality. 1. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog.

From the Metric folder, select cape house.rvt. Click Open.

2.

Open the Floor Plan view, First Floor from the Project Browser.

Notice a section has been created through the model. We will modify the properties of and select the section then choose the section line. Choose to open the Element Properties dialogue box.

257

3.

We will add a tail and set the display of the section line to include a gap in the segment. Select the value for End2 mark and change the value to Tail. Also check off the box for Gaps in segments as shown.

4.

Choose to close the Element Properties dialogue box. The section line should now appear as shown below.

258

5.

The extents of the section line can now be modified by selecting on the blue dots (drag handles) for each segment of the section line. Drag the end point for the head and tail sections as shown below.

Adding a Callout View
1. To open the section view, double pick on the section head.

2. 3.

A callout view will be added to the section view at the foundation cill. From the . View tab of the Design Bar, select To create the callout view, pick two points diagonally around the area to be included in the callout. The view should appear as shown below.

259

4. To reposition the callout head, choose and select the border of the callout. The callout view will highlight and display drag handles. Select the drag handle at the callout head and move the head to the opposite side of the view as shown below. Note the head will snap to the drag handles as it is moved.

5. 6. 7.

Open the callout view by selecting and double pick on the callout head (or you may also open the view from the Project Browser). Once the callout view is open, the name and scale of this view will be changed. From the View menu, choose View Properties. Change the View Name to be Section Detail - Foundation Cill and then change the View Scale to 1 : 5. Choose to update the view properties.

8. In the viewing window, press the right mouse button to activate the popup menu and choose Zoom to Fit. 9. Next, the level visible in this view, First Floor will be moved. Select the level and move the ends of the level as shown below.

Detailing the View
Detail objects in Autodesk Revit are view specific. Detail Lines, Detail Components, Filled Region, Insulation and Revision Clouds are objects that can be added to a view and will only be visible in that view.

Adding Filled Regions
1. A filled region will now be added to this view. Filled regions are closed areas which can display fill patterns. Select the Drafting tab from the design bar and choose Filled Region. The region will be created around the foundation wall. Select Lines from the design bar. Change the line type to be drawn as Wide Lines.

2.

260

3.

Choose the

from the options bar. Sketch the rectangle as shown below.

4.

Select Region Properties from the design bar. Choose Pattern value is set to Concrete [Drafting]. Choose values.

then set the Fill twice to update the

5.

Choose

and pick the bottom line of the region.

6. 7.

From the Type Selector, change the line style from Wide lines to <Invisible lines>. Choose to complete the region.

261

8.

Another region showing the ground outside the foundation will be created. Choose Filled Region and sketch the region as shown. The exact dimensions are not important.

9.

Select Region Properties and choose region type.

. Select Duplicate to define a new

10. Accept the default name of the region. Change the Fill Pattern value to EARTH [drafting]. Choose twice to complete the new type. 11. Choose and pick the lines shown below.

12. From the drop-down type menu, change the line style from Wide lines to Invisible lines. 13. Choose to complete the region.

Adding Detail Components
Detail components are 2D family objects which are visible only in the view they are placed. 1. 2. Choose from the Drafting tab of the Design Bar and select from the Options Bar.

Open the folder Detail Components\Structural\Wood and choose the file M_Dimension Lumber-Section.rfa.

262

3.

A table of structural types appears at the bottom of the Open dialog box. This table allows you to select the specific types that you wish to load. Scroll down the list and select the 38x140, 38x235 and 38x286 types by selecting the first, holding down the <CTRL> key, and selecting the others. Choose Open.

4. From the Type Selector choose M_Dimension Lumber-Section: 38 x 235. 5. Place the component as shown below. Place the component, then rotate 90 degrees. Move the component as shown. The Align command can be used to help align the component to the model geometry.

6.

Change the Detail Component type to Dimensional Lumber: 38 x 286.

7. Place a new instance and move the component into position as shown below.

263

8.

Add a final Dimension Lumber component. Select the size of 38 x 140 from the option list and place the component as shown.

9.

Next a detail component for the plywood flooring will be added. This component has been defined using the new 'instance parameter' function. Each instance of components with instance parameters can be modified to any value once placed in the model. Choose and select from the options list. This plywood component is 21mm thick.

10. Place the Plywood component above the last 38 x 286 component added to the model as show.

11. Zoom In around the plywood component. Choose right side of the component.

and select the

264

Drag the end of the component to the right.12. up to the crop boundary as shown. 15. 14. Rotate the plywood and stretch the ends as shown. and select 265 . Add another plywood component. Choose m_anchorbolt from the options list. An anchor bolt will be added as a detail component. Place the component as shown. 13. Select the left side of the plywood and drag it to the edge of the wall as shown.

16. Place the siding as shown. Choose and select m_lap siding from the options list. 266 . To array the siding component. 17. When complete the siding should appear as shown below. Select the Constrain option. Adding Detail Lines 1. Sketch the lines shown to complete the siding. The final detail component will be added and then arrayed. Choose Edit and Array then edit the Number of Copies to 5 in the options bar. select the component by pressing and holding the left mouse button and drag the new copy to the upper end of the first component. 18. To create the rest of the siding. Choose and select Medium Lines from the options list. choose and select the siding component.

Choose OK. floor as shown. Choose Detail Lines from the design bar. Only the detail objects will be displayed when the detail view is complete. Before sketching the new line the model will be displayed as an underlay. A base board (20 x 100 mm) has also been added. 3. 267 . Select and Chain from the options bar and trace over the inside wall. 4. Change the Display model value to As underlay. Since this is the case we will use detail lines to trace over the existing model geometry. Choose View Properties from the View menu.2. Select Medium Lines from the options bar.

Use a fill pattern of Sand to create the region as shown below. Next detail lines will be used to represent a 5 mil vapour barrier. Choose to add the new line.5. 8. We will first create a new line style to represent this. Add additional detail line. select . 268 . using the Medium lines as shown below. Enter a name for the new line style as Vapour Barrier. From the Line Style dialogue box. 9. Choose Settings and Line Styles . Add a filled region using Medium Lines on the inside of the wall to represent the 15 mm plasterboard. 6. 7.

Insulation 1. 269 . Choose Detail Lines and select the new line style Vapour barrier from the options list. 11. 5mm from inside of wall as shown below. Sketch the insulation along the inside edge of the plywood detail component as shown below. 2. 1. Enter a Width of 120mm and an Offset of 60mm in the option bar. Adding Break Lines Break lines will now be added to the drawing. The last detail object representing insulation will now be created. Choose and select M_Break line from the type menu. 3. Place the break line on the wall section as shown. Choose to complete the new line style. Sketch the line. Choose Insulation from the design bar.10. Line Colour to Black and Line Pattern to Dash as shown below. The break line is a detail component which includes the break line itself with an adjustable masking region on one side. Modify the Line Weight to 3.

None of the lap siding should now be visible. and make sure Choose Rotate after placement in the options bar to allow you to immediate rotate the component after it is placed. Rotate the component 90 degrees. 6. 4. Make sure to keep the masking element to the right of the break line. 5. Place the component approximately as shown. Drag the border up by pressing and holding down the left mouse button and moving the pointer upwards. Choose Break line is still selected in the type menu. slowly move the pointer over the masking element until the top border prehighlights. You will now add the break line for the floor. 3.2. You will now adjust the extent of the masking element. To do so. 270 .

You will now add text notes to the detail drawing. Change the Display model value to Do not display.7. Adding Text Notes 1. Choose from the 271 . You will now adjust the extents of the masking element. 8. To view the detailed view without the model geometry. Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the border until the floor lines are properly cut. choose View and View Properties. Place the pointer over the bottom edge of the masking element until it prehighlights. The resulting view should appear as shown below.

You have now completed a detail drawing.100mm WEATHERING as the text and left click in the working window to complete the text. Select Select Edit/New. 7. The Element Properties dialogue box will appear. Enter RED CEDAR LAP SIDING . 272 . 2. Choose to update the changes. From the Options Toolbar. Add the rest of the detail notes shown below. 3. Click a second time to place the starting point of the text. 4. Use the drag handles at the end of the text box to resize the text as shown.Design Bar. Click first to place the head of the leader. 8. 5. select the straight leader option . Change the Type to 4mm text. . Choose and pick the text. 6.

273 .

Note: This file is used with several tutorials. For example. 274 . Click Open. and save the file with a unique file name. you can send an item to the back or bring an item forward. For example. notice that there is a section view cutting through a kitchen sink and cabinet. select Office Building. Open the Floor Plan: Basement. you can now override line styles and detail level settings for each model element category. within each view. both the imperial and metric units are supplied with the imperial unit followed by the metric in brackets. Open the detail view by double-clicking the section head. Detail Views 1. If you wish to save your work. Utilize the new Visibility Settings including: Overriding Line Styles Using Halftone Overriding Detail Level settings Note: This exercise was created with an imperial template and components. you can set only the Doors to appear using Fine detail. 30' 0" [10meters]. In the upper right corner.Detail Views and Visibility Settings Within a detail view. you will learn how to: Arrange Detail Component order within a Detail View. in a view with a Coarse detail setting. Units may not be the result of a direct conversion.rvt. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. You can set your units preference by selecting Units from the Settings menu. For example. you can arrange detail component order. 2. click File. Save As. From the Common folder. Whenever units of measurement are necessary. In this exercise. Your control over Visibility Settings has been enhanced.

With the sink detail component selected. 4. select it. 275 . Place your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component and after it prehighlights. 3.In this detail view. notice that the filled regions do not overlap properly. Notice that the sink detail component is now above the cabinet detail component. click from the Option Bar. Select the sink detail component and in the Option Bar. 5. 3. click .

Click OK. Select the base cabinet and cycle through the various depth options on the Option Bar. furniture within this view will appear in halftone. Visibility Settings 1. From the Project Browser. select Visibility/Graphics.Notice the sink detail component has been sent to the back of the drawing. a cabinet. open Floor Plan: Level 1 and from the View menu. Scroll to the Furniture line and select Halftone. 4. 5. 276 . From the View menu. 2. There are 3 detail components stacked in this drawing. select Visibility/Graphics. 3. 6. Zoom to Fit. and a simple fill pattern. Select the Annotation Categories tab. From the View menu. a sink. 6. select Zoom. Open Floor Plan: Basement and draw a zoom box around the furniture.

9. you will notice that the door tags are no longer visible. If you have saved the file with a unique name or wish to do so. 11. Click OK to close the View Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Door Tags will no longer appear in this view. Click Apply. Scroll to the Door Tags line and remove the checkmark for Door Tags. and set the values using the image 13. Choose Coarse from the Detail Level drop-down list. 10. 8. Select the Wall's Cut Line Style below for guidance and click OK. Click Apply. Notice that the Cut Line Style of the walls is significantly heavier as a result of the visibility setting override. 277 . Walls within this view will display using the Coarse detail level regardless of the settings within view properties dialog box. Notice that the walls within the view now display as course while the rest of the components within the view continue to use the "Fine" setting. If you drag the View Visibility/Graphics dialog box so that you can see the model behind it. 12.7. 14. do it now. Select the Model Categories tab and scroll down to the Walls line.

Close. 278 . select File.Otherwise. and do not save the changes made to this file.

The model is shown below. To create a new drafting view. they can then be referenced within the model and placed on sheets. These standard details are static and do not need to update with changes to the model. choose View. 2. Drafting Views allow the user to create new views for standard details that do not need to be actually generated as callouts from the model. Drafting View from the menu bar. Once these drafting views are ready. Choose to finalize the changes. In this exercise.Drafting Views In this exercise. New.rvt. 3. we will use the functionality called Drafting Views. 2. The new drafting view named Door Detail 279 . you will learn to: • • • • • Create a Drafting View Create a Detail within a Project Import Existing Detail into a Project Create a Reference Callout Place a Drafting View on a Sheet Retrieving the Model: 1. Enter Door Detail as the View name and use the drop down list to select 1 : 5 as the View Scale. Click Open. A dialog box will appear which will allow you to enter the View name and the View scale. From the Metric folder. Creating a Drafting View: 1. You are now in the new Drafting View. Drafting Views address the cases in which standard details are used in a project rather than parametric details. These details can then be created using drafting tools within Revit or by importing completed details from an existing standard detail library. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. select Drafting_Views.

use permanent dimensions to add accuracy to the detail. choose Wide Lines. From the Type Selector. Next. 4. 5. you will adjust the dimensions in the next step. the finished door detail will look like the image below: 3. Add the dimension strings and modify the lines to match the dimensions shown below. Do not worry about precise dimensions. you are now ready to create a detail using the Revit drafting tools. When you have completed this exercise.now appears in the Project Browser by clicking the plus sign next to Drafting Views. 280 . Using the sketching tools available in the Options Bar. draw the lines representing the door jamb. Choose Detail Lines to begin drawing the door detail. 2. Creating a Detail within a Project: With the Drafting View created. Choose the Drafting tab of the Design Bar to bring up the tools that will be needed to create the detail. 1.

Choose Region Properties to select the fill pattern to represent the gypsum wall board. Sketch the two 17mm thick rectangles as shown. 281 . 9. Then choose OK twice to close both dialog boxes and finalize the changes. Next. 7. choose Filled Region from the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Use the drop-down menu to change the Fill pattern to Sand [Drafting].6. Choose Duplicate and name the new region type Sand. 8. The Element Properties Dialog box will appear. Choose to create a new region type. While in sketch mode.Select Lines and use the sketching tools in the Options Bar to sketch areas representing the plasterboard.

Choose now fills the regions. Next choose Detail Lines and add the door architraves and then add the dimensions and modify the moulding to match the image below. to finish the regions. Notice the plasterboard pattern that 11. 282 .10.

Your detail should look like this: 13. choose Detail Lines again and use the Type Selector to change the line style to Medium Lines.12. 14. You will now add the planned timber for the header. Place it in the detail and rotate it until it appears as shown. Draw the lines to represent the door itself. Next. pick the dimension and drag it away from the model. use the drag handle at the head of each the witness line to pull the end away from the model as shown. Next. First. Choose from the Design Bar. You will now adjust the dimensions to pull them away from the detail. Choose Dimension Lumber 38x140 from the Type selector drop down list. 283 .

straight with an elbow. Load Family from Library. you will now annotate the detail. The lower break line will need to be rotated.. 284 .15. or arced. You will now place the break lines... Stack another one directly above it to complete the header. Place the break lines as shown. Note: The detail components used in this exercise were previously loaded into the project using File. To complete the detail. Choose the type of leader you wish the text to have: straight. Choose from the Design Bar to start adding text. 17. Choose and select Break Line from the Type selector drop down list. Place the text and modify the leaders to complete the detail as shown below. 16. 18.

Navigate to the Training\Metric folder and choose Rail Detail. Choose . 285 . Import/Link. we will import an existing detail into a drafting view. Drafting View from the menu bar. and select Open.. In this exercise.Importing an Existing Detail into a Drafting View: The Drafting Views can also be used to place standard details that are already complete. You may need to Zoom to Fit after import.dwg. DWG. choose File. Enter Rail Detail as the View name and use the drop Down menu to select 1 : 5 as the View Scale. DXF. Choose the option. DGN. Preserve Colors. Create a new Drafting View by selecting View. New. 3.. 2. 4. We will now import a completed detail in DWG format. 1. From the Menu Bar.

the text type will be changed to a standard Revit black text type. The explosion process converts the DWG elements into Revit elements. Also notice that the original leaders had been previously deleted. Select the imported detail so that it highlights in red. The lines have all been converted into detail lines and the text has been converted into Revit text. To make modifications the Import Symbol will have to be exploded.The detail will initially come in as an Import Symbol. We will now explode the imported instance. 5. New Revit leaders will now be added. 286 . then right-click it and choose Explode Imported Instance. Note that the text has retained the dwg layer color. 6. Pick all the text blocks by holding down the <CTRL> key. For easier visibility.

287 . From the Options Bar. We will now add the new leaders to the detail. From the Type Selector. 8. Add the rest of the leaders to complete the detail drawing. Use the drag handles the place the leader as shown below. choose Text Note 1 as the text type. choose to the option to add a 2 segmented leader. 9.7. Pick the text block Met Stud Framing.

From the Options Toolbar. instead. select Ref this view and choose Drafting View: Door Detail from the drop-down menu next to it as the view to reference. 4. 2. Pick the callout and use the drag handles to move the callout head to a more appropriate position. Callout from the Menu Bar. The reference callouts appear with a label in their headers that indicates they are reference callouts. choose from the View tab of the Design Bar. 5. Place the pointer in the top left corner of the area at the top of the door and drag toward the lower right corner to create a callout bubble as shown below. From the Project Browser. we will create Reference Callouts that will point to the Drafting View: Door Detail that was created previously. 1. Adding the new callout bubble does not create a view. Now you can use reference callout bubbles that point to one callout or drafting view. or choose View. To create a new callout. it points to the selected callout or drafting view. 3. In the following exercise.Creating a Reference Callout: It is typical to have multiple callout bubbles point to one callout or drafting view in a project. New. 288 . open Section View : Section 1. Notice that the callout head does not yet have sheet information entered.

Choose and double pick on the callout head to go to the view that is being referenced. Zoom on the detail. Choose View. Notice that the View Name and Scale appear in exactly the same way as in ordinary callouts. More than one callout bubble can reference the same view if similar conditions exist throughout a project. New. Placing a Drafting View on a Sheet: 1. either drag the view directly from the Project Browser or choose from the View tab of the Design Bar. Place the detail as shown. 3.6. 289 . Sheet or select Design Bar and select the A0 metric sheet. To do so. It opens the Drafting View: Door detail to which it is referenced. from the View tab of the Now place the Drafting View : Door Detail on the sheet. 2.

See how the callout head has now updated to include the sheet information.4. Open the Section 1 view. 290 .

Click Open. You can also access the command by going to the View menu and choosing New. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. In this exercise. select . 291 . The New Schedule dialog box will appear. the user has the option of either listing each unique element as a separate line item. Schedule/Quantities. From the View tab of the Design Bar. you will learn how to: Create a window schedule Group and sort elements in a schedule Change from an instance schedule to a type schedule Creating a window schedule 1. or grouping objects of the same type into a single line item. 2.Type and Instance Schedules While scheduling most categories of building components in Autodesk Revit.rvt. From the Metric folder. select Schedules.

you will select the fields to be displayed in the schedule. Height. Within the list of available fields. Level. The field will move to the Scheduled fields column on the right. from left to right. 292 . Adding Additional Fields 3. Adding the "Comments" Field 2. Defining the Window Schedule Next. select Comments and choose Add. Accept all other options and choose OK to begin defining the schedule properties. By selecting the fields and using or we can arrange them in the order we want the to appear in the schedule. Continue to add fields to the schedule. Add Count. Move the fields so they appear in the order illustrated in the following figure. Type Mark.3. and Width. 1. Select the category. Windows.

Instance Grouping and Sorting Schedules 1. Window Schedule . Select OK to finish the schedule. In the Element Properties dialog that appears. and in the context menu that appears. 293 . select the Edit button adjacent to Sorting/Grouping. Right-click in the schedule window.Arranging Schedule Order 4. select View Properties 2.

select View Properties. At the top of this dialog is a pulldown list labelled. Sort by:. and OK again to exit the Element Properties. and in the context menu that appears. Pick OK to exit the Schedule Properties.Sorting/Grouping Tab 3. From this list. Right-click in the schedule window. choose Type Mark Sorting by Type Mark 4. 294 . Sorted Schedule Changing from Instance to Type Schedule 1.

At the bottom of this dialog is a checkbox labelled. Creating Type Schedule 4. and OK again to exit the Element Properties. Pick OK to exit the Schedule Properties. select the Edit button adjacent to Sorting/Grouping.2. 3. uncheck it.. Itemize every instance. In the Element Properties dialog that appears. Type Schedule 295 .

select Schedules. You will notice there are already several rooms and room tags added to the model. New. 296 . We will begin by adding a room schedule to the project to display the existing room information. select the field Name and choose the Scheduled fields column on the right. Select Rooms as the Category to be scheduled. From the Metric folder. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. From the Schedule .Defining Schedules & Color Diagrams This exercise will demonstrate creating schedules and schedule keys in Autodesk Revit. The field will move to Properties dialog. Click Open. 3. Create a Color Room Fill Diagram 1. The floor Plan view flr 3 should be the active view. Schedule keys are allow users to define common items which can be used by multiple objects in a schedule. In this exercise. We will first select the fields to be displayed in the schedule.rvt. and Schedule/Quantities. you will learn how to: • • • • • • Create a Room Schedule Add Room Tags Define Room Styles Add a Schedule Key Apply Room Styles to Rooms. The New Schedule dialog box will appear. Choose View. Accept all other options and choose OK to begin defining the schedule properties. 4. 2.

Note: Fields listing from Top to Bottom will be displayed in the Schedule from Left to Right. pick on the Appearance tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 6.5. Select the option for Grand Totals. we will define the text size and font for the schedule. Next. Level. 7. add Number. 297 . To do this. select Number. Select the Sorting/Grouping tab and from the Sort by: drop-down list. and Area fields as shown. Modify the Headers to be Bold by checking the Bold option from the dialog. Next. 8.

Notice that this room (and all subsequent rooms) are added to the bottom of the list and are numbered sequentially. Select Room 29 and modify the name to Conference by typing within the field. Add a second room using the same technique. A new row will be added at the top of the schedule. When new rooms are added from a schedule. Adding New Rooms New rooms can be added directly to the schedule. Notice that it is Room Number 1 and the Level and Area values are ambiguous. With the schedule as the active view. such as room area and floor will display as "Ambiguous". Choose OK to view the schedule. 2. these room will not yet be linked to the rooms of the model. choose from the options bar to add a new row. the names of these two new rooms will be changed from "Room" to Conference. Note: The changes to appearance will only be seen when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. Next. 298 .9. 1. 3. Parameters which obtain their value from the model.

you can either allow Autodesk Revit to automatically define new rooms or you can select a predefined room created in the schedule. Activate the view Floor Plan: flr 3 and zoom in around the right hand side of the building. Adding Room Tags When adding room tags. Before placing the room tag. Place the room tag in the large room in the upper right as shown. None of these rooms have room tags placed in them. Open the schedule to see the updated information.4. From the Menu Bar choose Window and select Schedule: Room Schedule from the list of presently opened 299 . Repeat this for the room number 1. We will add a room tag to the room in the upper right corner of the building. this time selecting room 30 from the list as shown. 2. 1. 3. 4. select 29 Conference from the Room drop down list in the Options Toolbar. Add another room tag. Change the room number to 30 and it will fall into sequential order. 5. Choose from the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice the name of the room has updated to Conference.

views. Notice the name should now read as circulation. Choose from the Design Bar . In the schedule find the room with the area of 91. Parameters which are not model driven.85 square metres and change the name to circulation. Open the schedule view to see the 11 new rooms. Open the flr 3 floor plan and zoom in around the room shown. however your room numbers may differ based on the order you place the room tags. Add room tags to the following rooms. 300 .This time the Room option will be left on Auto. This is room 33 on this schedule. 6. We will now add 11 addition room tags. The order is not important for this exercise. such as the room name and room number can be changed directly from the schedule. 7. 9. 8. Open the flr 3 floor plan view.

New and Schedule/Quantities. from the Menubar. Select and select the seven room tags show. Chose View. 2. Select Properties and change the room Name parameter to read as services. With the seven rooms selected. Use the <Ctrl> key to make multiple selections.10. Choose to begin defining the schedule properties. 12.. select Office. Choose to continue. choose Properties from the Options Bar. From the Room drop-down list. 11. Select Rooms as the Category then select the Schedule keys option. Finally choose the three rooms shown below.. 301 . Adding a Schedule Key A schedule key will be added to define three room styles. 1.

refers to Skirting finishes.3. 6. select the fields Base finish. 5. Floor finish and Wall finish to be added to the schedule. Note: Base in Base Finish. Using the Room Styles The new room styles will now be applied to the Room schedule. from the options bar to Select the Key Name field and enter an name of Std Office. 302 . Floor finish as Carpet 1 and Wall finish as Paint. Now enter as Base finish as Vinyl. Next the three room styles will be defined. Create the additional room styles by choosing twice more from the Options Bar to add two new rows. Choose add a new row. From the Schedule Properties dialog. The new schedule will appear as shown. 4. Add the following information for the new room styles. Choose to create the new Room Style schedule. 7.

7. 5. 303 . 9. Select the room tags in the three offices in the lower right corner and choose Properties. then choose OK. Choose displayed. 3. Choose from the Properties dialog to update the schedule. Change the order as shown below. You can do this either from the Window menu or by selecting it from the project browser. To do this choose View Properties from the View menu. From the properties dialog. 2. 6.1. We must tell the system to display this information. 10. Choose and select the room tag for the large Conference room in the upper right corner. select Exec Office from the Room Style drop-down list and choose . Choose from the options bar to open the room properties dialog. Set the Room Style to Exec Office and choose . Open the Schedule: Room Schedule. You will notice the Room Style information does not appear. 4. Open the flr 3 plan view. for the Fields parameter to access the fields which are 8. Select the field Room Style and add it to the list of displayed fields.

304 . select Room Style for all of the rooms. then choose . Zoom out so the entire model is visible. select the Drafting tab. From the Design Bar. 1. named Services. 2.11. Room Colour Diagrams The next task is to create a room colour diagram based on the room names. Place the legend as shown. a small legend should appear. and set the parameter to Services. From the schedule. Move the cursor into the screen. The rooms should automatically change colours. The schedule should update as shown. Activate the flr 3 plan view.

Select the colour button for Conference. 3. This will open the Colour dialog. The current colour is defined as standard colour. Change the Color by assignment to Name. we will change this to be a from the Colour dialog to open the PANTONE PANTONE® colour. Choose from the options bar to open the Edit Colour Scheme dialog. select OK. Choose Colour Picker.Note: A message may appear informing you that visibility must be turned off for certain components. 305 . 4. The colours selected for some of the rooms will be changed. 5. To do this select from the design bar and select the colour legend.

Open the view Floor Plan: flr 3 and notice the colour diagram has updated to reflect the change. Choose Choose from the Revit Colour dialog box to accept the change. From the Colour Picker. choose the colour Green. from the Edit Colour Scheme to see the updated colour fill diagram. You can enter the name in the Find Colour field if it is not visible.6. 8. Select the room number 10 and change the name from Room to services. 10. 9. Open the Schedule: Room Schedule. 7. Notice that Room is removed from the Key. Finally a change to the single room named "Room" will be made. 306 . Choose OK to select the new colour.

Do the same for Volume. and Floors. 5. So you could. Expand the Schedules branch of the Project Browser and right click on 'Wall Schedule'. (This will take you into the Element Properties of this Wall Schedule. 1. Floors. The Area field is also schedulable for Ceilings. & Ceilings. 4. They behave similar to other Revit schedules. Roofs. 1. 2. Scheduling Walls. Select Properties. Floors. Choose OK to complete the schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes All model elements have two type properties: Assembly Code & Assembly Description. Click Edit under the Fields parameter. Roofs. you will see how the Uniformat Assembly codes are applied to the Autodesk Revit objects. Width and Length. for example. You will now add the Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields to your Wall schedule. click New and then Schedule/Quantities. and Ceilings You can schedule Walls.rvt. 307 . Select Area from the Available fields list and click the Add--> button. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. From the View tab of the Design Bar. Note: Area & Volume fields are schedulable for Walls. select the Category Walls and then press OK. select Sched1. These two parameters are both schedulable fields. You will first create a new Wall schedule for the project.) 2. Also.Schedules & Uniformat In this exercise you will learn about the enhancement to schedules. choose Schedule/Quantities or from the View menu. From the Common folder. Click Open. You will now select the fields you would like to schedule. After selecting Schedule/Quantities. 3. create a schedule that groups all components in your project by Uniformat Code. Roofs.

Selecting from a schedule or by editing the objects properties. Toggle down through the Uniformat codes and choose the highlighted classification as shown. Add Assembly Code & Assembly Description just as you added Volume. You will notice a downward arrow in the selected cell. so in this case you will only see Uniformat codes related to walls. 308 . Left click on the arrow and a dialog will appear containing a hierarchical list of Uniformat codes. By default the list is filtered by category. 6. Click OK. Width. First. 5. In the Wall Schedule. This can be done one of two ways. let's open up our wall schedule with the two new added fields. 4. & Length. Now you are ready to schedule an Assembly Code & Description to any model geometry within your project. left click under the Assembly Code column. Now you will assign an Assembly Code to a wall type in our project.3.

Choose Properties from the options bar. 309 .7.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls as shown below. Click in the Assembly Code value area of the dialog box. Click this button to open the assembly code list. Select the Edit/New button to open the Type properties. 10. Choose OK to assign this assembly code. Navigate to the partition type shown below. Choose OK from both properties dialog boxes to close. Since the Assembly Code and Assembly Description are type parameters. 9. 11. To assign the assembly code for the next wall. A down arrow button will appear. all of the walls of this type will be updated once you press OK. This will open the walls Element Properties dialog box. Select one of the Interior . 8. 12. open the Level 1 floor plan view.

Choose Edit next to the Fields parameter to add new fields using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Right click on the Furniture Schedule from the Project Browser and select Properties. 2. Scheduling Components by Level and Room. and plumbing fixtures. Within the model. 1. electrical equipment. These fields are available in schedules of the following categories: Furniture. Choose OK to update the schedule. mechanical equipment. Room number. Now you will add Room name. and Level. Room number. 310 . When creating schedules. Open the schedule. open the Furniture schedule by double-clicking the Furniture Schedule from the Project Browser. All of the Interior 5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls will now have the assembly code and description defined. you can include the: Room name . and Level to the schedule. 3. lighting fixtures.13.

1. 311 . the row height is changed to accommodate as many lines of text as are needed. Schedules placed on sheets live directly on the sheet as elements of the sheet. create a new sheet. Zoom into it as shown. 2.Functionality of Schedules on Drawing Sheets. 4. From the View tab of the design bar. First. By simply dragging the blue arrows. This means: Schedules do not have view titles or extension lines You don't need to activate a viewport in order to access the schedule controls The same schedule can appear on more than one sheet Schedules are not listed in the Add Views dialog. choose Sheet or from the View menu above. You will now place the Furniture Schedule onto this new sheet. You will now place the Furniture Schedule onto a new sheet. You can edit the appearance of this schedule right on this sheet without having to Activate the viewport. 3. click New and then Sheet. Click OK for 30 x 42" Horizontal Sheet. Drag and drop this schedule from the Project Browser right onto the sheet. nor do they appear as children of sheets in the project browser.

You will now split the schedule into two segments right on the sheet.5. 312 . Note: You can break the schedule as many times as needed by repeating the same process. Simply click on the small blue "break line" on the right side of the schedule once and notice how it instantly divides this into two segments as shown below.

4. After creating the file. In this case we will create a new parameter Group called "Hardware" in which to store all of our hardware-related parameters for future use in our project. These shared parameters can be added to any family regardless of category. 1. you create parameter groups in which to store the individual parameters. 2. 313 . make sure you save this file where all users will have access to it. click New. Type the name of the new parameter group and click OK. and are defined and stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. choose Shared Parameters. The Edit Shared Parameters dialog box appears. Type a file name and save it to the desired location. If you are working on a network. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Autodesk Revit's new Multi-Category Schedules. If a file already exists. The following exercise will demonstrate the solution for this and cover the following processes: • • • • Setting up Shared Parameters Adding Shared Parameters to Families Implementing a Multi-Category Tag Creating a Multi-Category Schedule Setting up Shared Parameters Shared Parameters are saved to an external file. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. From the File menu.Shared Parameters & Schedules Shared Parameters allow users to define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Note: This procedure is for creating a new external parameter file. 3. Click Create to begin creating an external parameter file. An example use of Shared Parameters would be the need to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present initially by default. In the Groups box.

integer. specify its value type (text. create the 4 new Shared Parameters by entering the data into the Field Properties dialog box. Using the values above. we wish to create 4 new parameters. ID & Lock Set will be added for keeping track of the various hardware parameters which might be found in Door and Window components.Now you can create parameters that will be assigned to the Hardware group. 5. 6. 314 . yes/no). length. Hinge. number. In the Parameters box. click New. 7. Type a name for the parameter. When finished creating all 4 parameters select OK to close the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. Closure. From the Parameter group drop-down menu. In this exercise. select the Hardware group.

Adding Shared Parameters to Families You add Shared Parameters to families while in the Family Editor. select Door. From the Common folder. 1. 2. We will later use these new parameters to create a schedule using a Multi-Category Schedule.rfa. Select Family Types from the Design Bar menu to call up the Family Types dialog box which shows the currently available parameters for this family category. 315 . In this exercise. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Click Open. we will add the Shared Parameters we just created while in the Family Editor.

Select Add from the Family Types dialog box to call up the Parameter Properties Dialog 4. Change the selection to Shared parameter and click Select. 316 . Click on the ID Parameter and Choose OK.3.

Multi-category Tags You typically apply tags by Category within a project: You create a tag. From the File menu. 317 . Creating a Multi-Category Tag 1. choose New. 5. 7. Hinge = "Chrome". Choose OK to add the parameter.Toggle the Value stored by to Instance. load it into the project. and Closure = "N/A" for this particular door type and then select OK to close the dialog box. Annotation Symbol and select the MultiCategory Tag. The Family Editor opens. Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of their category. Repeat the above steps for each of the other parameters making them as TYPE parameters. Assign the new parameters the following values: Lock Set = "Yale". 3. and then tag all instances of that category. assign it to a category (such as furniture). Close the properties dialog by selecting OK The Family Types dialog box now shows we have added these Shared Parameters for use in our project. Click in the document window. 6. The Select Parameter dialog box appears. 2. Save this file as 'NewDoor' so that we may use it later in this assignment. This is accomplished by applying a filter parameter during the creation of a Multi-Category Tag.rft template. ID = "1". From the Drafting menu choose Label or click Label from the Design Bar.

6. 318 . Click Select to call up the Shared Parameters. Choose OK to close the Shared Parameter dialog box and OK to close the Parameter Properties box.4. Select Hardware from the parameter group list and then select the ID parameter. 5. Click ADD to display the Parameter Properties dialog box.

7.rvt. which is the value for single-category tags. 9. the tag cannot attach to any component. With this option set.e. 2. this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. Finish creating the tag as you would other annotation symbols and save the file as "HardwareTag" in an appropriate location. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. From the File menu. Note: If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. Using the Multi-Category Tag in a Project 1. 5. Select the multi-category tag. 3. select Load from Library to load the multi-category tag "HardwareTag" and "NewDoor" you just created into the project. Click Open. In the Type Selector. From the Drafting menu choose Tag or click Tag from the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. ID). 8. Replace the existing doors by selecting them all and changing their type to the "NewDoor" type that you just loaded. select Hardware Plan.. notice that the default value is <By Category>. From the Common folder. "Hardware Tag" you just loaded from the Type Selector. 4. Check the Filter Parameter option box at the bottom of the Select parameter dialog box. Click OK. 319 . Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog.

select the MultiCategory Tags which shows the Hardware Tag we loaded into the project earlier. In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. Click to place the tag.6. 320 . you can prehighlight only those components that have the filter parameter which you set earlier to "ID". You can also use the Tag All Not Tagged command to quickly tag components with the filter parameter. As you move your pointer in the document window. 9. Click OK to tag all Non-Tagged categories. 7. Note: As you can see the Hardware Tag is reading the Shared Parameter we created earlier and had attached to the Door family. 8.

and so on. Schedule/Quantities to call up the New Schedule dialog box. Now you can create a multi-category schedule that lists components regardless of their category by using an external parameter as a filter. a schedule lists components of a single category: rooms. Click OK. In this exercise. to call up the Schedule Properties box for the schedule 321 . In the New Schedule dialog box.Creating a Multi-Category Schedule Typically. New. doors. 2. From the Menu Bar. 3. you will create a Door Hardware Schedule by using the Shared Parameter you created above (Hardware) and have placed in the Hardware Plan file. select View. select Multi-Category from the list. 1. windows.

Add the following additional fields to be scheduled: ID.Closure & Lock Set before selecting OK.4. 5. Type. Mark. Family. 322 . The Multi-Category Schedule should now be created.

2. select Office_2. choose Project Parameters. They cannot be shared with other projects and they cannot be used to tag objects with (as Shared Parameters). The Project Parameters dialog box appears. 3.Project Parameters Occasionally you may need to schedule parameters of objects that Revit did not anticipate. you will learn how to: Creating Project Parameters Assign Shared Parameters to a Project Add Project Parameters to a Schedule Creating Project Parameters Project Parameters are defined within a project In this example. From the Metric folder. Click Open. In the examples provided in the proceeding tutorial we solved this need with the use of Shared Parameters. In this lesson we will provide for project specific parameters only using Project Parameters. In this exercise. From the Settings menu.rvt. we will create an "Occupant" property for rooms to allow us to schedule rooms with their occupant listing. Click Add to create a project parameter. 1. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) which are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 323 .

check that it will be an instance parameter. Assigning Project Parameters to Projects Once a Project Parameter has been created and associated to one or more categories within your project. Then click OK to close the Parameter properties dialog box. Select OK to close the Project parameter dialog box. and in this case. The project Parameters box now shows that you have created a new Parameter called "Occupant". 4. you are ready to use them. Then type "Occupant" for the name of the project parameter. Select the categories you wish to associate with this new parameter in the categories list. If you need to modify or remove this parameter.Select the Project Parameter button and choose the Category. 5. 324 . Rooms. select the appropriate buttons from this dialog box.

choose Schedule/Quantities or from the View menu. Select Room Tag from the Drafting menu. click New and then Schedule/Quantities. 325 . From the View tab of the Design Bar. and tag several rooms in the project as shown. Select Rooms for the type of schedule and select OK to continue with the Schedule Properties dialog. 2. 3.1.

Add Occupant now to the Schedule fields. and create the new schedule. and Select OK to close the Schedule Properties dialog box. 7. we now have the Project Parameter "Occupant" available in the Available Fields box for adding to our schedule. As you can see. If you want to tag. 326 . 5. You may add names to the Occupant parameter either directly in the Room Schedule or by editing the properties of the rooms. As you can see from the new schedule. Remember. Project Parameters are project specific parameters used only for scheduling. you would need use Shared Parameters as outlined in the tutorial "Shared Parameters and Multi-Category Schedules". we now have Occupant as an available parameter on which to Schedule. or share these parameters in other projects. 6.4.

Assign a name for the DSN.mdb) from the list and choose Next. 2. 1. 3. From the Common folder. Select Export then ODBC Database from the File menu.Exporting Project Information via ODBC In this exercise. However. Choose the Microsoft Access Driver (*. Select the driver to be associated with the DSN. The instructions for this exercise will use Microsoft® Access 2000 as the database. 5.rvt. 327 . 4. select Sched1. A File Data Source Name (or DSN) will be created. you will learn how to export project information to an ODBC compatible database. From the Select Data Source dialog. the process for exporting the data would be similar for any ODBC compliant database. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. choose New. Click Open.

Enter a name and select a folder location for the database file. Then choose OK to create the database. 7. 9.Choose Next then Finish from the confirmation window to complete the DSN setup. Choose OK to close the window confirming the database was successfully created. 6. Select OK from the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup to continue with the export. 8. Now an Access database will be created. 328 . Choose Create to define the database file.

Electrical Equipment. The tables of types include an Assembly Code column which 329 . This table does not contain elements. Structural Foundations. Additionally. and some instance table include a "Room Id" column containing the id of the room that the instance is in. Structural Columns. Generic Models. a table is also created for each key schedule in the project (as long as its category is one of the categories that we export). Electrical Fixtures. Ceilings. Furniture Systems. The columns exported are the same as the columns in the key schedule. so each table of elements includes an "Id" column. Ramps. listing instances only. Stairs. Element ids are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Review the Database For the following categories of elements. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. in addition to the Id column. containing the id of the key element. Plumbing Fixtures. Columns. It contains one row for each Uniformat assembly code. Curtain Wall Mullions. Once the export is complete. Lighting Fixtures. Topography. Windows. one listing all instances and another listing all types in the project: Casework. (These categories don't have types. Structural Framing. Furniture.10. tables are created for Levels and Rooms. Railings. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. Mechanical Equipment. For example. Roofs. Floors. Parking. Doors. choose OK from the confirmation window. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Walls. Specialty Equipment. Curtain Panels.) A unique element id is used to identify exported elements. instance tables include a "Type Id" column containing the id of the instance's type. Autodesk Revit creates two tables. There is one final table exported: Assembly Codes. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. These parameters are exported as well.

references the Assembly Codes table. 330 .

rvt. 3D View Creating and Modify the Level Types Before relocating the project. Choose and select the Training Folder icon from the left side of the dialog. Elevation: South. it is important for you to be able to relocate a project's elevation without changing the value of every level within the project. not the symbol.Setting a Project's Base Elevation In most projects. Therefore. 2. select Simple House. Project levels report elevation as it relates other levels in the project. Levels can be set to "Project" or "Shared". 1. Level 1 may read 1500m while Level 2 can read 4m. In this exercise. Open the view. you must first set the level's Base parameter to "Shared" in order for the project's base elevation to display. you will learn how to: • • • Create and modify a new level type Set a level to "Project" or "Shared" Relocate the project origin Retrieve the Training File 1. From the Metric folder. Elevation: South 2. For example. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to the origin that you establish during relocation. Select Level 1. the base elevation is rarely at sea level. if the project is being built on a plateau at 1500 meters. (Hint: Select the line. Click Open.) 331 .

you must create a new Level type. choose Shared. Naming the New Level Type 6. choose Locations and Coordinates. 8. if you were to do that now. However. Choose OK once again to close the Element Properties dialog.Shared and click OK. You will immediately be prompted for a name. From the Options Bar. From the Tools menu. You may want to click away from the model so that you do not select a point on the model by accident. Therefore. 9. you would change the parameter for all the level lines in the project. it is more practical and precise to type the value and press <Enter>. you will reset the base elevation of the project to 10000mm. For training purposes. 4. Notice that in 332 . In this specific case. 9. In the Type Properties dialog. you must set the Base parameter to "Shared". Read the message and click OK. 5. Click first anywhere on the Level 1 line. only Level 1's Base parameter will be set to Shared at this time. Setting the "Base" Parameter 7. Note: Relocate the Project is only available when you are in an Elevation view. Choose OK to close the Type Properties dialog. Within the Element Properties dialog. choose Duplicate. and then Relocate this Project. type Level . Although you can set the second point manually.3. From the Base drop-down list. The first click sets the "relocate from" point. Relocation Message Relocating a project is a process that requires the setting of two points. the second click sets the new location of the origin. choose Properties. A message will appear providing information regarding the relocation process. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. choose Edit/New.

333 . press <Enter>.the image below. 13. Notice that the Level 1 elevation adjusted to the change while the values of the other levels remained consistent with the project. choose Level . Select Level 2. Setting the Relocation Start Point 10. the left corner of Level 1 is being selected. Immediately after setting the first point. move the cursor vertically downward and then type 100000 on the keyboard.Shared. Setting the Location of the Second Relocation Point 11. From the Type Selector drop-down list. Project Relocated to New Elevation 12. Notice that the reported value of Level 2 changes to take the global elevation into consideration.

save the file with a unique file name or you can close the project at this time. Notice that the changes propagated to all views. 334 . Note: This project file is used with several tutorials. Do not overwrite the original project file. Elevation: North.14. Open the view. If desired. 15.

length and area formatting in tags. this exercise will cover sequential room numbering. and radial dimensioning. You can also control some aspects of how parameter values are formatted in tags and schedules. and schedules. Open the view.rvt. door and window tags. 3. 2. In addition. The three windows near the east entrance will be dimensioned. 1. 5. From the Common folder. Click the not equal symbol to make the dimensions equally spaced. choose Dimension or click Dimension from the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. door and window tags. 4. Select the angular radio button in the option bar. the use of equality constraints. Floor Plan: Level 1. When placing a door or window tag. From the Drafting menu. then place the dimension as shown. Sequential Tagging 335 . Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Angular Dimensions You will now place some angular dimensions. Autodesk Revit remembers the most recently entered value when placing room.Annotation and Dimension Enhancements This exercise will cover placing angular dimensions. you have the option to tag or not to tag the newly placed door or window and add leaders. You will now set the windows placement to be equally spaced by setting the angular dimension to be equal. Click Open. select Area. Select the centerline of each window. 6.

. From the Drafting menu. 5. In this portion of the exercise.1.e 102. (I. Move a room tag to see the green dashed alignment line appear.. Revit starts numbering at that value when new elements are created.) Sequential letters are also supported. This means that it can be directly edited. you will 336 . Choose Modify and select the room tag.. 3. 104. 2. Tagging Doors and Windows You can add doors and windows with or without tags. Also. Drag the pointer to an enclosed area of the plan view and place the Room Tag by clicking with the left mouse button. Click on the number and change the value to 101. Zoom to fit the entire model. Revit will pre highlight the enclosed area to indicate it is valid for placing the tag. Place another room tag. choose Room Tag or click Room Tag from the Drafting Tab on the Design Bar. 4. note that room tags can be alined to one another. Notice that the room number turns blue. 103.

If a door or windows is placed without a tag. 5. leader. Before placing the tag there is the option to turn the leader on or off. When Tag on placement is checked a door tag will be placed upon insertion. 1. Tag on placement and place the door as shown. Place a door as shown. From the Modelling menu. choose Tag or click Tag from the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. 5. Add the last door by unchecking the option. 4. in the options toolbar there are the options: Tag on placement. From the Drafting menu. 337 . Before placing the door. You can specify a leader for door and window tags.place a door with a tag. Check the leader option on and select the door that needs a tag and a door tag will be placed. and Leader Length. the tags can be added later. 2. 3. and without a tag. choose Door or click Door from the Modelling tab on the Design Bar. Select the Leader option and accept the default leader length of 1/2". Leader. Also the leader length can be set. 6. Place a door as shown. Choose the type of door you want from the type selector on the options toolbar.

uncheck the leader option and press OK. select Tag All Not Tagged. Several windows have been added without tags. This will tag visible objects of the corresponding category that are not tagged yet in the current view. From the Drafting tab of the Design bar. 8. Door Tag_Exercise. This will tag objects of the corresponding category that are not tagged yet in the current view. Rotating Tags with Components 1. open the file.rfa 338 .7. Select the window tag family. 9. From the Training\Common folder.

2. the tag will resemble the image below: 5. Rotate with Component. is not selected. is selected: 339 . Rotate with Component. From the Settings menu select Family Category and Parameters. Rotate with Component. the tag will orient with the tagged object in plan views. If the parameter. 4. If the parameter. is checked for the tag family. Select the option. then the tag is always horizontal after placement. If the parameter. Rotate with component and then choose OK. If it is unchecked. 3.

340 .

these schedules are called Note Blocks . 3. select Keynote. Place a revision tag in your 1st Floor plan as shown below. 5. you will load the two annotations into the project.Keynoting and Noteblocks You can create a schedule that schedules any type of "Instance" or "Type" in a particular Generic Annotation family. From the File menu.rfa while holding the <Ctrl> key on your keyboard. 1. choose Load from Library. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog.rvt. then select Load Family. open the Drafting tab of the Design Bar and select Symbol. First. Click Open. In this exercise. you will create and schedule a revision note and a keynote for this project. Select the Revision Cloud tool from the Design bar. From the Common folder. With the two annotation symbols loaded. 6. Choose Revision Tag from the type selector list. 4.rfa and Revision Tag. Click Open to load these two annotation families. 341 . Select points to draw a cloud to indicate a revision. From the Annotations folder. 2. select Sched1.

7. 8. you will create a Revision Schedule to place on your sheets. Move the leader as desired. then select the Revision Tag. Choose Add a Leader from the options bar. Choose View. Click OK. New and Note Block. Choose Modify. Next. 342 . 9. Change the Family to Revision Tag and change the Note block name to Revisions.

. Fill out the information in the schedule to assign it a Revision Number. Date.. Note: These annotations were created with parameters that are specific to only one type. You may also do this by clicking on the Tag itself and going to its Properties. numbered 1. 2. and Description to the schedule and click OK. as opposed to "Instance parameters" that are specific to only that instance.10. Date. in order to have three different revisions. 11. In other words.. Now add Revision Number. 343 .you will need to make three types. and Description. and 3. The new schedule will be created. Revit is informing you that it will assign #1 to all tags created unless you make a new type. This is why you get this alert message below.

Click Edit/New. As you add more Revision Tags into your project as shown below notice how they are all filled out the same. This schedule can now be placed on any number of sheets. To make a new Revision simply click on one of the Tags in your project and go to the Properties. 14. 13.12. then Duplicate. Also note that the Revisions name has been added to the Project Browser as a schedule. and name the Tag "Revision Tag 2". 344 . Click OK.

15. 345 . Now you will have two Revision Tag "types" to choose from a pull-down list.

The display of tags (for windows. This view is displayed in 'Wireframe'. A new viewing window with the east elevation view should now be displayed. This will affect the active view only. You should notice the window tags are visible. Click Open. etc) are controlled by the Visibility/Graphics command in the View menu. select Viewing_Exercise. doors. To turn off the tags. From the Metric folder. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. choose View from the menu then select Hidden Line. The user will perform a series of steps to show how to set up the different views. 346 . Open the Annotation Categories tab. To change the display to remove hidden lines. choose View/ Visibility/Graphics to display the Visibility dialogue box.Viewing the Design This exercise is intended to show the new user how to create and customize user-defined views of the model.rvt. Select the East view under Elevations and double-click it.

press and hold the <Shift> key. indicating rotation mode. To rotate the display. rotation mode can be enabled by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down while holding the <Shift> key down and moving the mouse to rotate the view. Click OK. 347 . To pan the view. Choose from the toolbar The new view will appear in a new viewing window. hold down the left mouse button. Note: For users with pointing devices including a middle wheel button. click with the left mouse and move the cursor. Notice the title bar of this window '3D View: {3D}'. Notice the cursor will change to a cross when in a viewing window. To re-orient the view. This is pan mode. choose the button or F8 (Dynamic viewing) from the toolbar. You will now create a 3D view. Note: For users with pointing devices including a middle wheel button.Scroll through the list of options and uncheck the 'Window Tag' option. The cursor will change to . To rotate the view. This is the default name of the 3D view. The view should follow the mouse movements. This will cause the system to not display the window tags in this view. pan mode can be enabled by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down and moving the mouse to pan the view.

and the view is in Hidden Line. . Cameras are used to define views. The cursor will change to . Activate the view "Floor Plan: Level 1". Next. click the crop boundary and pull the handles (blue dots) to stretch the view 348 . Next we will define our own views using cameras. Note: For users with pointing devices including a middle wheel button. select the view target by clicking with the left mouse button. choose the button. zoom and spin by selecting in the appropriate box on this menu. you may have to close some of the Design Bar tabs in order to access the camera command. This appears when the Dyn View command is selected. tab in the Design Note: Depending on your screen resolution. choose Views / 3DViews in the Project Browser and select the 3D View: {3D} in the tree. Notice the name of the view updates in the title bar of the viewing window. indicating zoom mode. They define the eye point. Once the view target has been selected the new view named Perspective 1 will open. choose Views / 3DViews in the Project Browser and doubleclick the named view from the tree. Enter the name "My 3D View" in the text box and press the Enter key. eye height and distance from target. zoom mode can be enabled by rolling the middle wheel button. Right-click the Design Bar and select visible tabs to eliminate their visibility from the Design Bar. In the "Floor Plan: Level 1" window select the eye position or camera position by clicking with the left mouse button. To save this view. Hold down the left mouse button and move the cursor up to zoom out and move the cursor down to zoom in. Close this viewing window by selecting on the close button. To see the entire view. Right click {3D}and select Rename. The display settings are saved with the views. You can also pan. Try each command if you wish at this time. The default behaviour is to display the view in perspective. From under the Bar. Notice the window tags are not displayed.To zoom while in dynamic view. in the upper right To retrieve this view. Also notice in the lower left corner of the Revit window is the Dynamic View dialog box. press and hold the <Ctrl> key. corner of the viewing window.

349 .boundary.

Within the Project Browser. select Materials. and save the file with a unique file name. In addition. (This would include walls. you will learn how to: • • Control a material's fill pattern color Set a wall type's Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color Note: This exercise was created with an imperial template and components. 350 . Whenever units of measurement are necessary. both the imperial and metric units are supplied with the imperial unit followed by the metric in parenthesis. and other families.Controlling Fill Pattern Colors You can control fill pattern colors. Units may not be the result of a direct conversion. in a compound wall. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. In this exercise. Controlling a Material's Fill Pattern Color 1. For example. 2. Objects that obtain their fill pattern definition via materials can control the fill pattern color for that material's cut and surface pattern. 30' 0" (10meters). Note: This file is used with several tutorials. click File. you can now set the color of the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern for each wall type. Save As. If you wish to save your work. where each layer is assigned a different material.Level 3. this also applies to phasing override materials). From the Settings menu. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. such as Brick on CMU. Click Open. From the Common folder. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to be red and set the insulation to pink. floors. select Showroom. expand Sections and open the Section: Wall/Floor Join . Each of these is designated by the layer's material settings. roofs.rvt. For example. 3. You can set your units preference by selecting Units from the Settings menu.

select Masonry . Notice that the cut pattern for the Brick is now red. select Masonry . From the Name drop-down list. 351 . 6. 10. If it is not already selected. Notice that a color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern. Click 11.Brick. Open a 3D view and use Zoom in Region to zoom in on the brick pattern. Choose Red as a new color and click OK until you return to the section view. Click for the Cut Pattern. for the Surface Pattern. White. 9. select Materials.Brick from the Name drop-down list. 8.4. Notice the brick's surface pattern is black. 5. From the Settings menu. 7. Select the color. and click OK until you return to the 3D view. Notice the brick pattern has changed to white.

5. Click OK. select Solid fill. The Detail Level for this view is set to Coarse. (You can confirm this by going to View. View Properties. Click OK.) Select the South. 2. arc wall and click Properties. 352 . From the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern drop-down list. 4. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is Black and the Pattern is set to None. The Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color is a Type Property. Click OK and return to the plan view. so click Edit/New. Click the button for Coarse Scale Fill Color and select any shade of gray. By default.Setting a Wall Type's Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color 1. Open the Floor Plan: Level 1. 3.

The wall type now appears as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. select View Properties. 9. Open the Floor Plan: Level 2. Close. 10. From the View menu. do it now. 353 . If you have saved the file with a unique name or wish to do so. Zoom in on one of the exterior brick walls and you'll notice that the surface pattern and color is not applied. 8. select File. Set the Detail Level to Fine and click OK. and do not save the changes made to this file. 6. Otherwise. 7.

then select . 354 . The installation for both of these is available on the Revit CD or can be downloaded from the Revit web site.rvt. Before beginning this exercise. choose . The exterior walls of the building are defined as Co-house . Accurender® is incorporated into Revit and is used to produce Raytraced and Radiosity renderings. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. 1. The model should appear as shown below. From the Metric folder. you have to have installed the Accurender plug-in for Revit and the Material for Revit Web Library. To view the wall definition.Cavity Wall heavyweight block. 2. Click Open.Raytrace & Radiosity This exercise is intended to demonstrate how to assign material. add realistic 3D objects from the Modern Medium Library® and render the Revit project. Applying Textures to the Model We will use the Accurender Materials library to apply textures to reflect the true materials defined in the model. select Cohouse.

The AccuRender Texture will be changed from its current value. Select the wall type Co-house . Select the material Masonry .3. 8. 5.Brick from the Name list. Select the button for Structure from the Types Property dialog to view the wall structure. Choose to close the three dialog boxes. Notice the material for the exterior layer is Masonry Brick.Cavity Wall . Choose Settings. Choose open the Material Library. Materials from the menu bar to open the Materials dialog box. 7.Heavyweight blocks from the type list and choose . 4. 6. to 355 .

5. and then to edit the type properties for this floor 12. Change the material from Default to Site .Asphalt. choose Materials from the Settings menu. Select the texture Carib. Defining New Materials Many of the materials have already been set for you in this model. and choose OK. To create a new material. The new texture should appear as shown. 1. 10. Next choose for the AccuRender Texture. 3. Choose OK to close the Material Library. Plain as the texture for this material. 2. 4. Select Duplicate from the Material dialog and enter the name as Aluminum.9. Choose to edit Structure of this floor. Polished. 11. Next a material will be applied to the floor shown below. Close the two open properties dialog boxes by pressing OK. Choose and select the floor. Running from the list and choose OK to update the texture. 13. Choose type._200mm. We will now create a new material and apply it to the model. Navigate to Metals/Aluminum and select Polished. 356 .

Defining Material for Curtain Wall Mullions The new material will be applied to the mullions. 357 . 2. We will use this to check the materials defined for the walls and mullions. 3. 1. Use the Tab key to cycle through the different objects. select Region Raytrace from the Rendering design bar.0 of Revit allows for the raytracing of a selected portion of the view. 1. Once the mullion is selected. Isometric. Polished created earlier. Choose OK to close both dialog boxes. 4. Region Raytrace A new function at Release 4. From the 3D view. Change the Material parameter to Aluminum. Choose Modify and select one of the curtain wall mullions. choose Properties and then Edit/New to access the type properties.

choose Exterior Scene and OK. A warning will appear advising you that some lights are on that may not be necessary. 1. Date and Place settings and apply them to multiple renderings. The finished image should look something like the figure shown below. 358 . A scene allows you to define Environment and Time. The region raytrace will begin. Choose Yes to turn off those lights. The system is now waiting for a window (or region) to be selected for raytracing. 3.2. 4. From the Scene Selection dialog. Next a scene must be selected or defined. Draw a region as shown below.

0 is the ability to place AccuRender trees and plants. To place a tree into the model. The Plant Library will display a preview of the tree. 3. This will open the Plant Library dialog box. The Latin name is now being used for the tree type names. 359 . Once the file is loaded. Enter Black 6.. Choose and select any of the Deciduous trees from the list and choose Properties.Deciduous. 4. from the File menu. .rfa family to load. choose from the Basics design bar and then select the Deciduous Tree: Acer Rubrum 9 Metrers from the type selection list. 1. 2. Load Family. To prevent all the trees from looking uniform. 7. click on the value for Plant Name then click on the drop down arrow which appears. Choose Load From Library. Place several trees around the site as shown. we will create a new type of tree. Navigate to the Planting folder and select the M_Tree . Choose to open the Type Properties and then choose Oak as the name for this new tree type. From the Type Properties dialog.. 5.Placing Trees New in Release 3. Open the view Floor Plan: 1st Flr Cnst from the project browser. you must first load the family.

change the Height to 7000mm as shown. 360 . Select the tree Oak.8. Black from the list and choose OK to save the setting. Choose to finish the tree's definition. 9. To make the new oak tree a different size than the maples. 10.

and select the crop boundary. When placing the camera the first point defines the camera position and the second point defines the target point. 2. Defining Perspective Views In this portion of the exercise you will define an exterior perspective view of the building. open the View of the design bar. Place the camera as shown below. Place some of the new Black Oak trees around the site. Select . In order to adjust the view. 361 . You can also select from the other tree types already defined in the Deciduous Tree family. With the floor plan view active. 1. The view's 5. 4. Choose shape handles will appear. the crop boundary (the black border around the view) will be adjusted. Drag the shape handles of the view until the view appears similar to the one shown below.11. The new perspective view should look similar to the one shown below. 3.

1. Select Sun Settings. Scene 1 by choosing OK. You can now change the camera position and target point from the plan view. Exterior open. Accept the existing scene. With the 3D perspective view. the Scene must be defined. Scene Settings The model can be rendered using specific time. In the Project Browser.. data and location of the scene. Choose Show Camera to display the camera position. From the project browser. date and place. To do this. choose from the Rendering tab of the design bar. lighting and environment settings. from the Render Scene dialog to define the time. Since this is the first time settings are applied to this view.. 2. This view will now be renamed. right click on 3D View 1 again and select Rename. 6. The camera position can also be modified.1. open the Floor Plan view where the camera position was defined. right click on the 3D View: 3D View 1. Change the name to Exterior. 362 .

Click in the Cities list and press the B key. 5. Set the cloudiness to 0. set the date to October 5 by selecting 10 for the Month and 5 for the Day. 4. 6. Select the Place tab. and then use your <left> and <right> arrow keys on the keyboard to adjust the minutes more accurately. Choose Environment to set the environment conditions. In the Date and Time tab of the dialog.20. The list will scroll to the cities beginning with the letter B. USA and then select it.00 (most clouds). Cloudiness ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. Go to the Settings tab. MA. Automatic Sky is the default background which we will 363 .3. Page down by clicking the scroll bar area until you see Boston. Choose to save these settings. The Environment setting will now be defined. 8. Set the Time to 2:30 pm by moving the slide bar to an approximate value. 7.

Choose OK to close the Material Library. Cnst. 12. Zoom in around the living room on the left as shown below. Dark. Then choose to return to the Render Scene Setting dialog. The model will now be rendered using the new settings. 2. 9. Navigate to Site and select Grass. Notice there is now an entry in the project browser for Renderings called Exterior. Select the Plant Season as Autumn. Choose from the Rendering tab of the design bar.keep. 10. choose . 364 . 13. Choose to continue. Open the view Floor Plan: 2nd Flr. Rye. To begin an interior perspective view will be defined. Radiosity This portion of the exercise will demonstrate the use of Radiosity in rendering our interior. 1. This will control the display of the AccuRender plants by season. To save this rendered image. 11. Select the Ground Plane option and select Material to define the AccuRender texture to add for the ground plane.

rfa to be loaded. M_RPC Female. Choose the two components. Before the camera is placed. 3. Place the new component and rotate as shown. Choose from the View tab of the design bar. Next place the M_RPC Male -Alex and rotate as shown. additional components will be placed into the model. 5. 4.Adding RPC People 1. the RCP people will resemble real people 2. If the component is not rotated in the correct position. Next the camera will added.Tina and click Rotate after placement from the option bar. When view in a 3D view and rendered. select the conponent and choose Rotate from the toolbar to rotate the objetc. In plan the RPC people will have a simple circle as the plan representation. 365 .rfa and M_RPC Male. Choose from the design bar then select to load the new objects. Place the camera approximately as shown. choose M_RPC Female . From the type selection list. From the Library select the Entourage folder. You can select both objects by using the <Ctrl> key.

This is necessary in order to view the effects of the section box. This will be used to limit the extents of the model being rendered. Change the name of this view from 3D View 1 to Interior from the project browser. 8. 2. To add the section box. The Dolly command will move the camera position. Section Box Before we Radiate the view. Shade the model. 7. 3. you could place the camera on the other side of the living room wall and the view may appear blank. The new view should look something like this. The section box will appear 366 . to open the Dynamic View dialog.6. Note: If you adjust the view. To change the camera position. Open a default 3D view by selecting . choose View Properties from the View menu. 1. Forward/Back will move the camera backwards and forwards and Turn will turn the camera on the dolly. select the 9. You can adjust the view if desired. Select the Walkthrough tab to adjust the camera. 1. a section box will be added. Change the Section Box parameter to "yes" by checking the box. Choose Shading from the View menu.

so these setting will be defined. This will begin the rendering process. To save these setting for future use. 6. 7. Now the model will be rendered using Radiosity. Choose and select the section box to display the shape handles. Finally. 5. Drag the shape handles until only the room we are going to radiate is visible. Choose from the Rendering tab of the design bar.as shown. set the Season to Summer. 14. 13. 11. please be patient. Now open the view Interior. 8. 367 . To use the defined section box. 9. Choose Save and give the file a name. 12. (An informational dialog will appear describing the radiosity process the first time radiate is used). 10. Sun setting and environment are defined by scene. Select Environment and define an Automatic Sky and Ground plane as was done earlier. USA. set the Use Section Box From View to {3D}. A new scene will be created. Select from the Rendering tab of the design bar. click the Settings tab of the Sun and Sky settings dialog. Click on Sun Settings and define a Date of June 6 and time of 8:30 PM. Set the Place as Boston MA. Choose OK to close the Sun and Sky setting dialog. 4. Click the New option. Select Interior Scene and accept the default name of Scene 2 by choosing OK. This process can take several minutes to complete.

you can use the Adjust Image controls to vary the overall Brightness. This will combine the radiosity and raytracing to produce a more realistic image. 15. Next the image will be raytraced. By adding or removing lights. Choose . Contrast and Indirect Lighting. 368 .Note: The RPC people will not display until the scene is raytraced. you can develop the interior scene further. Also.

1. such as roofs. 369 . Open the view. If you wish to save your work. and save the file with a unique file name. some components. tiff. may appear incomplete or missing. Save As. You will be placing the decal above the door. The decal only appears when rendered. 3. Note: For training purposes. posters. paintings. select Showroom.Adding AccuRender Decals You can place and render decals on any interior or exterior flat face of your model. Tip: Supported decal types are jpeg. . Take a moment to spin the view around and familiarize yourself with the model.rvt. and targa files. 3D View 2. Elevation: North 4. thus reducing the size of the project file. Note: This file is used with several tutorials. click File. The decal is an external file that Autodesk Revit links to. bmp. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Click Open. and billboards. Elevation: North and zoom into the region surrounding the door. You can use the decals for signs. From the Common folder. click The Edit Decal dialog box appears. From the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You will resolve many of these problems within this and other tutorials.

Using the image below for guidance. Placing the Decal Notice that even after placing the decal. When the decal is centered approximately over the door.jpg and click Open. 6. Select from the Toolbar and use the Spin and Zoom controls to view the area around the decal. Open the Finish tab and set the Reflective Finish halfway between Matte and Mirror. select . The decal will prehighlight. Place the cursor directly over the door. select Region Raytrace from the Design Bar and draw a box around the decal and surrounding area.5. set the Width in the Options Bar to 6' 0". 7. Navigate to the Common folder and select Company Logo. The decal only displays when rendered. click to place it. 11. The Height will change automatically after you modify the Width value and press Enter on the keyboard. Click Modify and open the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Decal Options 8. Within the Map tab of the Edit Decal dialog box. 370 . You do not have to worry about being exact. 9. only the outline appears. Make sure Lock Proportions is selected before changing the Width. 3D View 10. Click OK. click Browse. Before placing the decal. From the Toolbar.

14. Select Exterior Scene and click OK. do it now. the decal itself has not been pulled into the project. If you have saved the file with a unique name or wish to do so. Close. Therefore.Selecting the Region to Raytrace 12. You can place similar decals on any flat. Immediately after drawing the region to Raytrace. 371 . you could add posters and paintings to interior walls. select File. interior or exterior surface. From the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. the link will be broken and it will not render. if you rename or move the decal file. Remember that even though a decal has been added to the project. For instance. and do not save the changes made to this file. Otherwise. Rendered Logo 13. The major benefit to using decals is that you can use many of them with minimal impact to file size or performance. click Display Model to escape the rendering mode. Autodesk Revit will prompt you for scene information. The scene renders with the Decal.

From the Common folder. The points making the spline are called Key Frames. If the View tab is not visible on the design bar. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. select Townhouse. 4.rvt. The path comprises frames and key frames.FIRST FLOOR. place your cursor over the design bar area and right clight the mouse button. 2. click to define the start of the path. Starting in the "Breakfast" room. Open the Floor Plan view . 372 . A walkthrough is a camera that follows a path that you define. 3. From the View tab on the design bar and click on the Walkthrough button. Click Open. The walkthrough is defined as a path along a spline.Walkthroughs Autodesk Revit now supports the creation and recording of animated walkthroughs. A key frame is a user-modifiable frame where you can change the direction and position of the camera. This will bring up the pop up menu. then continue clicking for each key frame position shown below. Defining a Walkthrough View 1. Check the View option. The default option of Perspective will be used for the walkthrough.

Select the crop boundary of the view. Select Modify. 6. then choose OK. Edit Walkthrough and Modify. Two options. Editing the Walkthrough Once a walkthrough is created the camera path can be modified. 5. Your view may be a bit different then the image shown based on your path creation. In the Project Browser under Walkthroughs you now have a first view called Walkthrough 1 available. 2. 373 .. Set the size to a Width of 16" and Height of 9". Change the size of the crop region as shown below. to modify the size of the crop region appear on the options bar. Right click on this to open the Walkthrough. The image below show the last frame of the walkthrough view. Next click on the Finish button in the Options bar to end the path. 1. Use the Field of View option.

This dialog allows you to change the number of frames and vary speed between key frames For this example we will change the number of frames to 60 and choose OK to close the dialog. The Walkthrough Frames dialog will appear. 5. 374 . To edit the total number of button from the options frames produced from this walkthrough. pick the bar.3. Zoom out 2X and select the crop region again. 6. The walkthrough controls will be available from the options bar. 4. select Edit Walkthrough. From the options bar. The current frame being displayed is frame 300 of 300.

open the floor plan view 1st Floor.7. The current display will be hidden line. The playing of the walkthrough can be stopped by pressing the <Esc> button or pressing from the status bar. 8. Next choose from the options bar to play the walkthrough. from the project browser. Change the frame number from 60 to 1 in the options bar and press <Enter> on the keyboard.. We will modify this shortly. Once the walkthrough is finished playing. Editing Path and Camera 1. 2. The view should now display the first frame of the walkthrough. Now the walkthrough will be set to the beginning. From the project browser. 375 . right click on the view Walkthrough 1 and select Show Camera to display the walkthrough path.

Choose until the camera is displayed at the first position as shown below. Un-check the Far Clip Active option to disable the camera's far clipping plane. 5. choose Properties. 376 . The display will now show a camera symbol at the last key frame position. From the options bar. Choose OK to close the dialog. 6.3. From the options bar. choose Edit Walkthrough. 4. The properties dialog will appear.

Select the target point handle. 9.7. and adjust the target position similar to what is shown (to view the kitchen). 8. On the options bar. your path may be a bit different so do not be concerned if the camera appears differently. change the Controls from Active Camera to Path. Remember. (magenta grip). Blue dots (control grips) will appear at each key frame. Select the third key frame position and move it to the location as indicated below. 377 .

Shaded with Edges and AccuRender (Raytrace). you can open the AVI and view it using the video player of your choice. The default will be in the current folder and be named <projectname>.Adjust any camera target or key frame positions as desired. If you are unfamiliar with the rendering options or rendering process. You can always use Full Frames (uncompressed) as the output. Revit will process the AVI. Options are Wireframe. choose Export. Choose OK once a compression has been chosen. AVI. You may choose any codec (compression/decompression) available on your system. such as. please see the rendering exercise Raytrace & Radiosity. time. place information. These files will be larger than compressed files. but will not suffer from loss due to compression quality.avi. Shaded. Set the Display Mode to Shading. select a path and file name for the AVI file. After recording the AVI. Recording A Walkthrough A Walkthrough can be exported as an AVI file. 1. you can select the display mode for the scene. Accept all other options and press Record. sky and cloud settings. 3. 6. When exporting the AVI. Next the video compression must be selected. A scene is a group of render setting. 5. 2. you will be asked to select or define a Scene. Change the Frames per Second to 10. With the walkthrough still selected. For the AVI Export option. The choices of codecs and options will depend on your specific computer setup. date. From the File menu. Hidden Line. choose Open from the Options Bar. Recording a Raytraced Walkthrough If you are to record an AVI using the AccuRender Display Option. 4. 378 . as well as raytrace quality.

Define sub-categories for the family – for enabling visibility within the object.rft". Families can contain all the necessary geometry to allow that object to display in its 2D and 3D forms. 3. with the degree of control over how the object represents. that are either controlled by pre-defined parametric properties or user definable properties. Elements within families are controlled by a combination of visibility and viewing direction (plan. Families form the basis of both real life building components (model objects) and Graphical / Annotation components. System families such as Basic Wall. Standard component families are simply library components that the user has full control over. In Place Families can only be used in the project they were built in. For example to build a light fixture which is ceiling based. Along with System families. System families are predefined within Autodesk Revit. that can be as simple or complex as the user wishes. one-off reception furniture. ornate elevational treatments etc. either by opening an existing one. Dimension planes to control the parametric geometry. Select the appropriate family template to begin the design. Family templates can be either host-based or standalone. that the user requires. In place families – Project specific families that are sketched within a project. Host based families are families that look for a host so that they may be inserted.) and level of detail associated with that view. 2. also the user is able to create additional types of that family. The chosen Category will determine the Families appearance and display control.. the In Place Family provides the user with a choice of Categories at startup. Standard Component families – User defined and drawn components created independently of project files from a wide variety of family templates. etc. They act and are formed in a similar way to standard component families. Unlike Standard Component families where the family category is present within the choice of various template files. The family editor provides a flexible and intuitive interface for the creation of annotation and model components. elevation. The user cannot create these families but is provided with parameters to make adjustments. have “types” that define walls styles such as Cavity wall. etc. In place families can be either model or annotation items within the current project. Templates contain basic information to speed the process along. These files act as library components that can be loaded into any number of projects.The Revit Family Editor There are three types of families in Revit. furniture. choose "Lighting Fixture ceiling based. that cannot be converted into Standard component Families. therefore they are used for objects that are unique to the project – for instance: bespoke guttering. Lay out reference planes to critical locations of the parametric geometry. Generally they are either hosted by (tied to) system or standard component families within a project. 3D. forming the principle building structure. an example is a door family that searches for its host wall. some Standard component families are also pre-loaded into default project templates. modifiable by the user using preset parameters. modifying it and saving as another filename or creating it from one of the extensive family template files. 4. General Procedures The basic procedure for creating standard component families are as follows: 1. as described in brief below: System families – pre-defined within the program. Examples of standalone families are columns. Standard Component Families can be created in one of two ways. they also contain the family category where the user can extend with additional sub-categories for more flexible control of the objects. Generic or Partition walls. 379 .

This can be compounded when you use them together. could lead to a removal of that family should someone delete those reference planes. Within Autodesk Revit. 9. Define new family types to create other family members with different parameters Example of four types of the family 'Fixed Window': Fixed Window: 600mm x 600mm Fixed Window: 600mm x 1200mm Fixed Window: 900mm x 600mm Fixed Window: 900mm x 1200mm 10. You should plan your family carefully to ensure it accomplishes what you need it to do with little or no impact on the performance of your project. be aware that the addition of formulas. within the family. you could use subfamilies or nested components rather than groups. Place your Standard component families in a library in a separate location to the Autodesk Revit libraries. Save family and load into a project to see how it performs within the project environment. a arrayed group controlled by a complex formula. preferably on a network and change the current library path within Options. When creating families. 6. 7. When creating complex families. Label dimensions to become type or instance parameters. This will ensure that your library remains intact during a reinstall or upgrade of the software and also allow others to share and build one collective library. name a reference plane that is perpendicular to the inclined angle.5. Often there are ways to accomplish the same task with less impact on performance. 380 . Flex the family frame to ensure correct behavior prior to building up geometry. Flex the model once again to see if the family works as expected. arrays and groups require additional computing resources when used within a project. so you may select the named work plane and ‘orientate by plane’ in a 3D view to align the view with the true sketching direction. Add 2d and 3d geometry and determine its display characteristics through subcategories and entity visibility. Tips: Place reference planes to form a constructional frame. there are normally several ways to accomplish a certain task. For example. Having external reference planes outside an in-place family. this is also the case. for example. 8. When sketching profiles at inclined angles.

Open the Exterior Elevation view. Locking the Position of the Nested Family The position of the lintel will have to be placed more precisely and locked alignments will need 381 . Load From Library. Choose the Door Family template. Select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Nesting a Family in another Family 1. It is a wall hosted component which associates itself to the face of the wall... New.rfa. 4. Load Family. To place the Lintel. To load the previously created Lintel Family. Metric Door. This allows you to build upon previous work while creating families suited to your needs. choose File. This reduces the amount of time it takes to create the new door family.Creating Nested Families Nested Families allow the user to nest a family in another family. In the following exercise. This means that you can now load families and insert instances of them into your new family. The family must first be loaded in and then it is placed as you would place a family in the project environment. 6. Place the Lintel roughly over the door as shown.) 5. choose Component from the Design Bar. you will be using Nested families to help in the creation of a door. Click Open. From the Common folder. The topics that will be covered are: Nesting a Family in another Family Locking the Position of the Nested Family Modifying the Visibility of a Nested Component Accessing the Parameters of the Family in Family Editor. An existing lintel family will be placed in a new door family.rft and select Open. select Lintel. Family. 2. The process in which a family is Nested in another is identical to loading and placing a family into project. (The lintel was created as a generic wall based family. 3. Start a new door family by selecting File.

To do so. Reset the Width to 1000 and the Height to 2000. Change the door parameters to verify that the lintel is behaving correctly. Click on the unlocked symbol to lock the lintel into position. set the Width parameter to 1500 and the Height parameter to 3000 and choose Apply Values. Select the top of the door then select the bottom of the lintel. the lintel will behave accordingly. align and lock the two sides of the lintel to the outside edge of the door trim. 4. choose Family Types from the design bar. Modifying the Visibility of the Nested Component After nesting a component within a family. In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. The correctly positioned lintel is shown below. 5. Finally.to be created so that as the door size modifies. 2. Note: The Width parameter of the lintel was created as an instance parameter to make this kind of alignment possible. you can control the nested component's visibility 382 . The lintel should move up with the door and expand in width with the new door width. Zoom in on the area above the door and use the align tool to align the bottom edge of the lintel to the top of the door and lock that position. Use the Align command from the toolbar. 1. 3.

Set the visibility so that the Lintel is only visible in elevation and 3D views. These parameters can be accessed the way they usually are in a project: through the component properties. Activate a 3D View to better observe the modifications. 3. Shaded with Edges to change the display mode. Once the door family is saved. Accessing the Parameters of the Family in Family Editor In Family Editor. 2. You will need to modify the view to see the side with the Lintel. Use View. Select Edit/New to edit the type properties of the Lintel. 1. (Turn off visibility in Plan/RCP and When cut in Plan/RCP. Change the Lintel Height to 500mm and change the Lintel Thickness to 75mm. See how the Lintel Parameters update. 4. 1. the nested door and lintel family can be loaded and placed in a project. Select the Lintel. 383 .just as you can with other elements within the family. The remaining door geometry can now be created. it is possible to access the properties of an imbedded family. Choose OK. From the Options Bar. Pick the lintel and choose Properties from the Options Bar. 3. select Visibility.) Setting the Visibility of a Nested Component 4. 2. Click OK.

Rather than re-create the transom for each door family.rfa. This means that instead of having fixed values. select _Single Flush Vision. Simply create the same parameter type in the host family and associate it with the parameter of the nested family. you would and associate its parameters to correspond with its host’s parameters. From the Doors folder. Suppose that you wanted to create a single transom to be shared amongst a number of door families. Finally. These include: • • • • • • • • • Text Integer Number Length Area Volume Angle URL Material Keep in mind that nested families will not schedule as separate elements within their host family. Click Open. For example: UK_Single Flush Vision. the file name may vary slightly. 384 .rfa. 1. In other words: parameters for parameters or "parameterization". Choose and select the Metric Library icon from the left side of the dialog. Note: Depending on your geographic location and subsequent install options.Controlling Parameters in Nested Families Parameters in a host family can be used to manipulate type and instance parameters in a nested family provided that the necessary parameters already exist in the family that is being nested. you could create a single transom. which would then be available to be used in multiple host families. Any parameters available when creating a family can be paramitized when the family is loaded into another family. nested families can accept values from any family parameter that is the same type.

select M_Transom. From the Windows folder. 385 .2. Align the center of the transom with the center of the door. Click Open. From the Design Bar. It is not necessary to lock the relationship. Select the Metric Library icon from the left side of the dialog. 4.rvt. Next. Once the file is open select the Interior elevation view. select File. Load from Library and Load Family. Place the transom in the wall above the door as shown below. The nested family will move with respect to the host family when loaded into a project. choose the smallest available transom. 5. From the Type Selector. 3. select Component.

8. 10. To do this. Select the transom and choose Properties from the options bar. The width parameter of the transom will be associated to the width parameter of the door. 7. Notice the transom is now the same width as 386 . 9. Close all dialogues by depressing OK. Associate the Width parameter of the transom to the Width parameter of the door. Select Edit/New to see the Type Parameters that are available.6. select the Width parameter by depressing corresponding button under the “=” sign column.

11. Click Cancel to close the dialog and close the file without saving. Select Family Types from the design bar. Both the door and transom widths update. 387 . Modify the Width parameter to 1500mm and choose Apply Values. 12.the door. Flexing the Family Type Properties of the door for Width will adjust the width parameter for the transom.

logarithms. multiplication. Notice the column named Formula. Valid Formula Syntax: Height + Width + sqrt(Height*Width) Length * Width + cos(Angle) (tan(Angle)/3) * (length)3 Exercise: In the following exercise. Formulas also support the following trigonometric functions: sine. Family Types from the Menubar. decimal. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog.rfa. subtraction. division.Adding Formulas to Families You can use formulas to define a parameter's values. or fractional values. arcsine and arctangent. you can enter integers. tangent. select Palladian Window. 2. Formulas support the following arithmetic operations: addition. From the Common folder. Click Open. and square roots. It is in this column that a user would enter formulas for 388 . exponentiation. Formulas are added in the Family Types dialog box. Choose Family Types from the design bar or choose Settings. Formulas may contain numerical constants and other parameter names of the same family as values. For numerical values in formulas. cosine. you will use a simple formula to determine the proportions of a window. arccosine. 1.

You may need to close the dialog box first to manipulate the 3D view. you will be creating formulas which will control the relationship between the width of the center pane (Width) and the widths of the side panes (Width-side pane). arrange your working window so that you can see the Palladian window and the dialog box at the same time.their parameters. 6. 4. feet would have been the assumed units. Note: It is necessary to be explicit and consistent with units when making formulas. 389 . To quickly observe updates to the window family. In the formula for Width-side pane enter Width. Open the dialog box again by choosing Family Types from the design bar. Notice that the value for the Width-side pane immediately updates to match the value for the central pane width. If inches had not been specified in this case. Choose Apply Values to observe the changes to the model. 5.6". 3. 7. Now change the formula for the side pane to Width . In this exercise. Select Apply Values to see the model update.

Now enter a value of 1' . The side panels will now be half the width of the center panel. it creates a relationship between the two parameters involved.0" is immediately returned for the Width-side pane. If the side pane width is equal to half of the center pane width. Change the Width value to 4' . Note: When a formula contains only one parameter name in it.8. Change the formula once again to read Width/2.0" and hit <Enter>.6" for the Width-side pane. You will now see how this proportional relationship can be maintained as the width values are modified. The Width will 390 . Notice that a value of 2' . 9. 10. then it is also true that the center pane width must always be two times the side pane width.

automatically update to read 3' .0". Select Apply Values to see the model update. 391 .

Through the use of Material parameters. In this exercise. the bracing.rfa. Make sure that the Type button is selected 392 . you will learn how to assign materials parameters to these different parts to create different types of tables. This family is composed of three main parts: the table top. You will now create a new material parameter named Table Top. select Oval Dining Table. and the legs. 2. Material Parameters are created in the Family Types dialog box. Place your cursor over the model of the table and notice how the different elements prehilight. Choose Add. The areas this exercise will cover are: Creating New Material Parameters Creating Predefined Types Applying Material Parameters Modifying Material Parameters from a within a project The exercise will use a simple table to demonstrate the new functionality.Adding Material Parameters to a Family In this exercise. you will learn the technique for applying Materials to a component in the family environment. From the Common folder. each type can have different rendering attributes. 2. Creating New Material Parameters 1. Choose Family Types from the design bar or choose Settings. 3. Family Types from the Design bar. This will open up the Field Properties dialog box. Click Open. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Enter Table Top as the parameter name. you can easily create new types within a family.. Using the drop down list select Material as the kind of parameter this will be. 1.

Gray. Select New Type from the Family Types section. If you are prompted to save the type you just created. you can make additional types based on material parameter value assignments. you will create two new types of table: one with a glass top and one with an ivory laminate top. create another Material Parameter named Table Base.Matte. Enter 36" x 96" Glass Top as the name and choose OK. In the following exercise. Change the Value for Table Base to Metal. 4. Change the value for Table Top to Laminate . Choose OK to complete the creation of predefined types. a window type named 36"w x 42"h has a Width parameter set to 36" and a height parameter set to 42".. Bronze.Clear. Use the drop down list to change the value of the Table Top from <By Category> to Glass . 5. For example. 6.as shown below. 7. 2. You will now create a second Family Type. choose Family Types from the design bar to open the Predefined Types dialog box. Lightbrush. Also verify that the dimensional parameters match the name. . 4. 1.Ivory. Following the same steps. If not already open. Select New Type from the Family Types section. Enter 36" X 96" Ivory Top as the name of the parameter and choose OK. 393 5. The Predefined Types dialog will now include Table Top and Table Base in the list of parameters. Choose OK to complete the process. Choose Yes. Notice that the Value assigned to these two parameters is <By Category>. Creating Predefined Types To create a Family Type is to give a name to a particular configuration of parameter settings. With material parameters. 3.

3. Use the drop down list to change the value for Material to Table Top (param). Modifying Material Parameters From a Within a Project When Material Parameters have been assigned within a family. Place 3 tables next to each other and open a 3D view.Applying Material Parameters A Material Parameter is applied to a solid through the properties of the solid. 2. Choose OK to complete the change. Choose Properties and change the Material to Table Base (param). Load Family. 1. You have now assigned the material parameters to the solid elements. choose the 36" x 96" Glass Top Oval Dining Table. Choose File. Select Modify and pick the solid table top and choose Properties. Project and accepting the defaults in the New Project dialog.rfa by using File. Choose OK to complete the changes. 4. From the Basics Design Bar. pick the table legs and the table bracing. 2. hold down the <Ctrl> key and pick the next item). pick the first item. choose Component. Load the Oval Dining Table. pick it and choose Open. Save to save the family. (Note: to pick more than one item. New types with different material assignments entirely can also be made. Navigate to where the family was saved. Load from Library. From the Type Selector. New. the materials can be adjusted once the family is loaded into a project. Next. 394 . Open a new project by using File. 1. 3.

6. 2. To better observe the material properties. 3.5. Notice that Ivory Top table is not transparent. Choose Select to the right of the Texture field. This is because the material which we had assigned to the table top was not transparent. Dark.Clear. From the menubar. Select Blue. Materials. Change the middle table to the Ivory Top type by picking the middle table and using the type selector drop down list to change the type to Oval Dining Table : 36" X 96" Ivory Top. Gray. 395 . choose Settings. Choose OK to exit the Material Library. Double click on the Accurender book to open up the list. 1. You will now the edit the glass Material to give it a blue tint. Shaded with Edges to change the display mode. 4.Smooth from the list. use View. Use the Drop down list to find the Material named Glass . Choose Glass and then Tinted.

Pine. Change the value for transparency from 90 to 60. Choose OK to exit the Material dialog box. Choose Duplicate to create a new material.Low Gloss from the list. You will now adjust the transparency of the glass for the Shaded display mode. Choose Wood and then Pine. Choose Select to the right of the Texture field. First. 4. you will create a new Pine Top Table Type. you will create a wood material.5. Change the both the Table Top and the Table Base material parameters to Wood . Choose Edit/New. Enter 36" x 96" Wood Top as the type name. Creating New Table Types In the following exercise.Pine for the name of the Material. Select Natural. Enter the name Wood . Yellow. to enter Edit mode.. Choose OK twice to exit the Type Properties dialog box and the Element Properties dialog box. 3. 2. 7. Pick the last table and choose Properties. Choose Settings and Materials to open the Materials dialog box.. 6. 5. 1. Choose OK to exit the Material Library and OK to exit the Material dialog box. 396 . then select Duplicate to create a new type.

397 .You have now created a new type of table called 36" x 96" Wood Top.

In this exercise you will learn the following concepts: Creating a window family. The vertical mullions are equally spaced 398 . Creating Labeled dimensions to aid in creating different types or sizes of the window. Setting the workplane to aid in geometry construction. Creating sweep and extrude geometry. This exercise will emphasize certain techniques that will allow you to proceed through the design process. Setting visibility of the geometry in different views. Adding the window to your project. Using the join command to join geometry. These techniques are recommended so you will understand how to successfully build a window family. The purpose of completing this exercise is to give you an understanding of the process of creating and using your own components. One of the most important products of family creation are variations in the size of the window so different window types can be made. Creating reference planes to aid in geometry construction. Naming a reference plane to aid geometry creation. Creating the Window Family The fixed window to be designed is shown below. you will create your own custom window family. Creating material and assigning it to geometry. Creating different types or sizes from the window family. Flexing the model to check for Design Intent.Window Family Exercise In this exercise. This window family will vary in the following ways: • • The width and height of the window are variable.

This process of 'flexing the model' should be done frequently so conflicts do not occur once the family is done. Open the window template by double clicking on the name Metric Window. Close all open projects. add the new reference planes shown below. 5. Choose File. Height 1500mm and Width to 1000. you will be adding labels to dimensions so that they can be modified. Exterior Elevation View 1. Use File. New. In order to facilitate future sketching. Modify the Height to 1300mm and the Width to 1800mm and pick . Notice that two dimensions are shown with their Labels. As you create the window. 399 . 2. change the Width of the window to 2400mm and click . In this case. Now add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes through the opening which will represent the position of the mullions in the window. Change the values back to the original values. These dimensions can be seen and modified when you select in the Design Bar. and . 2. 4. you will see the 'Sill Height' and 'Height' in the list of the Type Parameters. See below. Creating the Window Family 1. This will bring up the New dialog box with a listing of the family templates in the Templates folder. 3. button 3. Close to close the active project. Open and maximize the Exterior Elevation view.• The height of the top and bottom row of lights are adjustable. Choose from the Design Bar and using the image below for guidance.rft. Family. Notice the change in the size of the window and its location. The window template provides an opening for a simple casement window. Labeled dimensions are placed in the Type parameter list within the Properties dialog box in the Project.

In addition. Type. 8. After you add the dimensions in step 7. and select one of After selecting the dimension. add the two horizontal reference planes shown in the image below. Part of your design intent is to have the top and bottom rows to maintain equal heights for the panes. choose the dimensions. After the dimensions are placed. Click OK. To maintain equal spacing of the vertical reference planes. 400 . select Add parameter. To accomplish this. Name the new label. create two dimensions referencing the reference planes as show below. which will be the location of the mullions. place a multi-segmented dimension as shown below. pick the symbol to make them equally spaced. 7. go to the Options Bar and from the Label dropdown list.6. Mullion Offset and select the option.

Sketch a rectangle on top of the opening as shown making sure you start the 401 4. Next. select Mullion Offset from the Label drop-down list. The path will be sketched around the opening. Now that the reference planes update as required. It is time to create the solid geometry of the window.Select the unlabeled dimension that was created in Step 7. The geometry will reference the reference planes which already update to the desired dimensions you labeled. Choose Sketch 2D Path from the from the design bar and then select from Design Bar. Select Sweep as the form to use and choose A sweep is a two part sketch. Create Solid Geometry for the Window 1. The profile is swept normal to the path to create the geometry. Next the Form dialog box will appear. . 2. Choose to close the dialog box. It is always a good idea to place as many reference planes and labeled dimensions as possible before you start creating the solid geometry. Modify the value of Mullion offset to 350mm and choose to update. The first solid geometry you will now create is the frame of the window. Make sure that you flex the dimensional parameters to make sure your design intent works. Then choose the options. 10. you will modify the newly labelled dimensions. From the Options Bar. With the Elevation: Exterior view active. choose from the design bar. The first sketch is a path and the second is a profile. Choose to open Predefined Types dialog. 3.

Select the elevation view named Right and choose . If the profile plane is along the bottom horizontal line you should select undo and recreate the sketch. This dot represents the intersection of the path and the profile plane. You will now be in the Right elevation view. 7. Zoom in around the red dot. depending on how the lines were sketched. ready to start the sketch. 6. The sketch will produce a reference plane which will be used as the plane for our profile sketch. A reference plane will first be created to define the window's inset. 8. Choose Sketch Profile to begin the sketch for the sweep's profile. Choose 402 . Choose Finish Path to complete the sweeps profile. Do this by drawing the profile from the upper left corner to the bottom right corner. The profile plane may be in a different location.sketch by clicking in the upper left and finishing the sketch by clicking on the bottom right. Choose View Properties from the View menu and set the scale to 1 : 10. the view scale will be change to allow for more precise sketching. The default behavior is to place the reference plane on the first entity sketched. You will be asked to open a view for sketching. 5. 9. Before sketching.

12. The exact dimensions are not important in this example. The reference plane will be named to make it easier to select the plane later. Modify the dimension to 50. but the vertical ends of the sketch should extend beyond the faces of the wall. Select and add a dimension from the new reference plane to the exterior face of the wall. choose and then check the Chain option. 11. You will have to use the TAB key to select the wall face. 403 . To do this.and create a plane as shown making sure the plane is drawn from top to bottom. Set the Name parameter to Sash as shown then choose . 10. Choose and select the new reference plane and choose from the options bar. From the design bar. the vertical ends of the frame will be locked to the face of the wall. Drag the lines to the face of the wall until it snaps to the wall and lock the line by clicking on the symbol. This is done to facilitate the next step. In order to keep the frame the proper size when the window is inserted into walls of different thicknesses. Sketch the frame section as shown. choose and select each vertical outside edge of the profile.

16. Set the visibility for this frame as shown and press . Modify the values as shown. The sweep will now be given a subcategory. To sweep the profile along the path. From the Properties dialog. Choose from the option bar to open the Properties dialog. choose Finish Profile and Finish Sweep. 14. Modify the parameter Subcategory to Frame/Mullion. Open the Exterior elevation view to see the sweep.13. This will cause the frame to only be displayed in Elevation and 3D views once it is place in a project. 404 . select button for Element visibility. 15. Choose and add the following dimensions to control the size of the frame. Choose and select the sweep.

. make sure the active view is the Exterior elevation view. Choose from the design bar. Choose Duplicate to define a new material and name the new material pine frame. Choose Add The Sash The sash for the window will be added as an extrusion. 4. 3. then select the Extrude option and . the Material parameter.Yellow/Stained. .Dark. Choose to close the Properties dialog. Creating a Material You will also want to assign materials for your geometry. 1. You will now define a material to use for your frame and mullions. 2.17. Select from the design bar.No Gloss. Choose Settings and Materials. Choose from the AccuRender field. 2. Choose 5. Choose . 6. The work plane defines the plane 405 . Before you begin. Navigate in the Materials dialog box to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. 1. Add the Pine Frame material to Select the Frame geometry and choose .

Lock each line clicking the symbol. 6. Select the and enter an Offset of negative 50mm. 7. Sketch the rectangle by picking on two diagonal vertices of the first sketched rectangle as shown. Place your cursor over one of the edges to be copied and select TAB to select the (middle) edge of the swept frame. Open the Right elevation view to view the frame and sash. 406 . Make sure to select the middle (notch) edge of the sweep. To do this choose Pick from the options bar. Also. Choose to complete the sketch. choose Draw from the options bar. The value is negative so the extrusion direction will go from the work plane toward the screen (exterior wall face) 4. change the extrusion Depth to -45mm from the options bar. Select Sash from the Name pull-down list and choose 3. To add the inside portion of the sketch.where the extrusion will begin. From the design bar. choose . 5. Rather than manually sketching the outline of the sash on top of frame. The negative offset value will cause the rectangle to be offset 50mm to the inside. You may want to zoom in to do this. Repeat for all four edges. the edges of the frame will be copied.

You may want to use the TAB key to select it. set the Element visibility to not be visible in Plan 9. Also. Rotate the view so both the frame and sash can be easily seem. Open the 3D view called View 1 from the project browser. Choose and select the sash. The family should be 'flexed' to make sure the geometry updates correctly.8. 407 . choose and edit the Subcategory parameter to be Frame/Mullion. Once selected.

2. Choose OK to accept this change. 7. 3. 4. Before the extrusion for the glass is created. a reference plane will be added as the work plane for the new sketch. The plane will be named to make its selection easier.and edit the Height. and 5. Open the Right elevation view to add the reference. Width and Sill Height to different 10. Choose and sketch a reference plane vertically as shown. choose and select Extrude as the form. values and then use When satisfied everything is correct. reset the values as shown. Open the Exterior elevation view to sketch the new extrusion. By changing the work plane to Glazing. 1. Creating The Glass The glass will also be added as an extrusion and then the subcategory will be changed to Glass. Choose from the design bar and set the plane to Glazing as shown. Choose select the new reference plane. The plane should be 30mm from the left edge of the sash. the sketch will be created from this reference plane. Choose to ensure the geometry is updating as expected. then choose . From the design bar. 6. Edit the Name parameter to be Glazing as shown. 408 . The work plane will now be changed to Glazing.

Select the inside edges of the sash and lock the edges as shown. 11.8. This value will be positive so the extrusion grows into the screen (toward the interior) 9. To sketch the extrusion. 409 . Choose to complete the extrusion. Set the Subcategory to Glass. 12. choose and select the Pick option. Open the Right elevation view to see the new extrusion. The Depth of the extrusion will be 12mm. set the Element visibility to not be displayed in Plan and the material is Pine Frame . Select from the design bar. 10.

it will grow from the exterior 410 . Use the TAB key and look at the status bar for Glass: Extrusion and click to select the glass face. From the design bar choose and select Extrude as the form. Width and Sill Height values to ensure the geometry updates correctly. Since the extrusion's work plane is the face of a solid. Choose to select a new work plane for this extrusion. Set the Depth value to 15mm. 14. 2. When satisfied. 1. Open the Exterior elevation view. Select the Pick a Plane option and choose . 3. 4. Open the 3D view View 1 to see the window. reset the values as shown. 5. Choose and from the options bar. Adding Mullions The mullions will now be added to the window.13. Select the face of the glass as the new work plane. Choose and flex the Height.

9. Add another dimension for the width of the mullion as shown. 6. and select the dimension. Label the dimension as Mullion 411 . 7. Choose and create a multi-segmented dimension between the vertical lines and the reference plane. 8. Choose Width. Lock the top and bottom horizontal lines of the sketch to the edges of the sash.face of the glass toward the exterior wall face. Set the dimension segment to be equal by selecting on the symbol. Sketch a rectangle about the left vertical reference planes as shown.

Create two dimension as was done previously. Sketch the rectangle and lock the horizontal lines of the rectangle to the sash as before. Verify that the extrusion depth is set to 15mm and then choose . 12. Width and Sill Height values to ensure the geometry updates as expected. set the values as shown. Modify the Height. Label the width dimension to be Mullion Width. and Extrude as the form for the 13. 15. Add a second vertical mullion. One for the overall width and the other to keep the mullion centered about the vertical reference plane. The extrusion Depth should be 15mm. Since we are creating the extrusion in the same view as the last mullion. When you are finished. 14. This may cause the first mullion 412 . choose and modify the Mullion Width parameter to 40mm and then press . the work plane will not have to be changed. From the design bar. Choose new mullion.10. 11.

The work plane will not be changed. Complete the extrusion by selecting as shown. (which will be changed later). then the geometry of the horizontal mullions will be joined with the vertical mullions. 20. so sketch a rectangle and lock the vertical ends as shown. Add a dimension for the overall width of the mullion and a dimension to keep it centered about the horizontal reference plane as shown. choose and Extrude. 22. 19. These mullions will stretch from each end of the frame. Add and label the dimension as in the previous steps. 16. 413 . Add the last mullion by selecting lock the vertical ends as shown. 17. From the Exterior elevation.The new mullion should appear The horizontal mullions will be created similar to the vertical mullions.to change width. . Label the dimension controlling the mullion width as Mullion Width. Choose to complete the mullion. and Extrude. Sketch a rectangle and 21. 18.

choose Tools and Join Geometry. Choose and select all of the mullions. To simplify the plan representations of the window. Choose from the Options bar and set the visibility as shown.23. 25. 26. 414 . Set the Element visibility to not be visible in Plan. The mullion geometry should now appear as shown. select the joined mullions. The subcategory of the joined mullions will now be set. 27. Select each overlapping pairs of mullions to join them. Choose and set the Subcategory to Frame/Mullion. Open the 3D view unnamed to view the window. From the menu. Choose to complete the mullions. Set the material to Pine Frame. 24.

would you like to save it?". 3. From the design bar. The Name dialog will open. choose . Enter the name for the new type as 2000mm w x 1200mm h and press . Choose 4. 1. The system will display a message "The type has changed. Enter the name for the new type as 2600mm w x 1300mm h and press Modify the Height. This is our new type. 6.Defining New Types New types of this window family will be made. To define a new type. select to open the predefined types dialog. Modify the Width to 2000mm and the Height to 1200mm. A type is a version family whose parameters differ. Choose Yes. 2. Width. 415 . Sill Height and Mullion offset as shown. To add a second type. choose . 5. then press . Mullion Width parameter to 25mm. Also modify the .

Choose Yes to save the changes. This will create a file called Training Window. The wall type is From the design bar choose not important.rfa. 3. 8. Again the message about the type changing will appear. 9. choose from the toolbar and save the file as 'Training Window'.7. 416 . Placing The Window To test the window completely. Modify the parameters as shown below. Choose to add a third type. 2. 1. Add the third type called 1800mm w x 1500mm h. To complete the window. Choose to complete the new types. load this window and place the three types created in the exercise. Choose from the toolbar to create a new project. and sketch a wall as shown. Choose and then select the type list. we will create a new project.

4.

Notice the new windows are not available. To make them available in this project, the family must be loaded. Choose from the options bar. (This can also be done be selecting File, Load From Library, Load Family). Navigate to where the window family was saved and select the file. Choose to load the file.

5.

6.

With as the active command, open the type selection list. Notice the three new windows are available.

7.

Select the 2600mm w x 1300mm h window and place it in the wall.

417

Door Exercise
In this exercise you will create your own door family. The purpose of completing the exercise is to give you an understanding of the process of creating and using your own families. In this exercise you will learn the following concepts: Creating a door family. Adding Symbolic Lines to a family. Creating labeled dimensions to control design intent and give the flexibility to create different sized doors from the generic door you are creating. Applying different subcategories to the geometry to aid in visibility. Setting visibility of geometry. Setting different workplanes to sketch on. Creating extruded geometry. Adding material to the 3D geometry. Creating different types (sizes) of doors within the family. Adding the door family to a project.

Creating the Door
1. Choose File, New, Family. This will bring up the Open Dialogue box with a listing of the family templates in the Templates folder.

2. Open the door template by double clicking on the name Metric Door.rft. 3. Choose Tile from the Window menu to tile all of the door template views. Select and choose Zoom All To Fit to resize all of the open windows. This will bring up the four views of the door family; the Interior Elevation, Exterior Elevation, a 3D view and the Floor Plan; Floor Line. Construction lines have been created in the wall representing the profile of the door opening. An opening is created in the wall lined up with the construction lines. Dimensions have been created between the construction lines. The dimensions will appear in the properties of the door. This will be discussed later in the exercise. A frame has also been created (as an extrusion). This frame can be modified or deleted if desired.

418

Plan View Symbol
Now you will define the door symbol as it will appear in a plan view. 1. First change to the Floor Plan: Ref. Level window by clicking on it. Maximize the view. 2. Choose and sketch the rectangle shown in the next figure.

3.

Choose from the Design Bar and add the dimensions shown to control the sketch. Modify the dimension values as indicated in the next figure.

4.

A property label will be added to control the width and thickness of the door. Adding these labels makes these dimension available for modification when placing the door. To add the label to the dimensions, choose and select the 1000mm dimension. The label option will become available in the options bar.

5.

From the label pulldown list, choose the parameter name Width. Note: You can select from the predefined list of labels or you can type your own label name.

419

6.

Select the other dimension an add a label called Thickness. This label will be entered by typing the name Thickness then select .

7.

The plan swing arc will be created. Choose option. Sketch the arc as shown below.

and choose the

Next, modify the properties of the lines sketched for the door symbol. This will change the display of the door symbol in the plan view later when it is added to a project. 8. 9. Choose and select the sketched arc of the door plan swing symbol.

Choose and change the properties of the Subcategory to Plan Swing [cut]. Choose OK to update the properties. This defines the font, colour and line weight for this arc.

10. Next select the four lines representing the door panel. Select one line, the hold down the Control key and select the other three lines. When all four lines are selected, choose [Cut]. Choose . Change the property of the Subcategory to Panel to update the properties.

3D Door Geometry
Now you will create the 3D geometry of the door. For this example, a simple solid door panel will be created. 1. Open the view Exterior Elevation from the project browser. Choose Zoom to Fit.

420

2.

Select

from the design bar and choose Extrude as your form. Choose

3. 4.

Select

and choose the Pick a Plane option. Choose

.

Select the exterior face of the wall as the sketch plane. Use the Tab key to select the desired face.

5.

The depth option for the extrusion will be set. Enter a depth value of -50mm in the options bar. The value will be negative because the extrusion will start on the selected plane and grow towards you.

6.

Select and sketch a rectangle as shown below making sure the sketched lines snap to the reference planes (green dashed lines) around the opening.

421

7. 8.

Choose

. The system will extrude the sketch.

Open the Left elevation view.

9.

Select and create a dimension as shown for the thickness of the extrusion. Label the dimension Thickness.

10. Open the Floor Plan: Ref. Level view. Select and select the extrusion. Use the <Tab> key and ensure the entire extrusion, not just one face, is highlighted.

422

11. Set the visibility of the door to be not visible in the plan view. Choose the options bar. Set the visibility as shown and choose OK.

from

12. The subcategory of the extrusion will be defined as a Panel. Make sure the extrusion is selected and choose . Change the properties as shown.

13. Create a new material for the door. To do this choose Settings and Material. 14. Choose and enter Oak Door for the name of the material.

15. Choose and navigate in the AccuRender materials to Wood, Oak, Red. Select Stained, Dark, No Gloss. 16. Choose and .

17. Now that you have created a material for your door you will apply it. Choose and select the door (if it is not already selected). 18. Choose . In the dialog box click in the parameter value field for material and select the new material, oak door. Choose . 19. Look at the door in the 3D view. Shade it if necessary.

423

Creating Different Sized Door Instances
Now you will create a family of different-sized doors. This will give you the ability to have one family of flush doors with several different door types (sizes). 1. From the options bar, choose to open the Family Types dialogue.

2.

From the Predefined Types dialogue box choose Rename to rename the original instance of the door to 1000 x 2000mm. All of the values for this door will remain unchanged. To create a new door type, choose New and enter a name of 925 x 2000mm.

3.

4.

From the dialogue box, modify the Width to 925mm.

424

5. To update the door, choose . The door will update to the new values. You may have to move the Family Types dialogue box to see the updated door. 6. 7. Choose New to create one more type. The system will ask you to save this type since it has been changed, choose Yes. Enter the name 975 x 2100mm and modify the Width to 975mm and the Height to 2100mm as shown below.

8.

Use the

to see the new type.

9.

Choose OK to close the Family Types dialogue.

10. Choose File and Save to save the file to disk. Enter the name as 'door exercise', this will save the file 'door exercise.rfa' to disk.

Adding Your Family to a Document.
You have just created a simple door family. Now you will add it to a project and use it to

425

create a door. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Create a new document. Choose File, New and Project. Select and sketch a straight wall of any type and size.

Load the family into the document by choosing File, Load from Library, Load Family and select 'door exercise.rfa' from the list by double clicking it. Choose from the toolbar.

From the family list choose the name door exercise: 975 x 2100mm from the menu. Place the door in the wall. Look at it in different views. As you view the door in different views notice how the visibility of certain items change based on how you created the family. In the plan view click on the control symbols to see the door flip. Notice how all the geometry including the door swing in the elevation view change accordingly.

7.

426

Creating a Lighting Fixture
In this exercise you will be creating a rectangular ceiling light. The light will be defined as a fixed size of 600 x 1200mm. Also, a new color, material and object style will be defined and applied to the light. In this exercise you will learn the following concepts: How to create a light fixture. Setting up reference planes to aid in the construction of geometry. Creating an opening. Using Symbolic lines in the family to aid in visibility of the 2D geometry. Creating an extruded piece of geometry. Setting workplanes for aiding geometry construction. Defining and assigning materials to geometry. Creating subcategories to aid in setting visibility of geometry.

Creating the Light Fixture Family
1. 2. Close all open projects. Use File, Close to close the active project. Create a new family by choosing File, New and Family from the menu.

3. Select the template Metric Lighting Fixture ceiling based.rft and choose to open the template. 4. Activate the Reflected Ceiling Plan view Ref. Level.

5.

To aid in creating the light fixture, Reference planes will be added. Choose and sketch two reference planes 300mm offset from the default horizontal reference plane.

6.

Add two vertical reference planes, each 600mm offset from the vertical reference plane.

427

7.

Next dimensions will be added to control the new reference planes. Select and select the three vertical reference planes and place the dimension as shown.

8.

Select the

symbol to apply an equality constraint to the dimensions.

9.

Repeat the previous steps to add a dimension and apply an equality constraint to the horizontal reference planes.

Adding an Opening
1. The first part of the light fixture will be an opening made in the ceiling. Choose

428

To begin the extrusion. 5. Select the Extrude option from the Form Dialog Box and choose Select the Plane and choose button from the Design Bar. Level. 7. Creating the diffuser 1. Select the edges of the opening to copy these edges to create the lines. You may use the Tab key to help select the edge of the opening. Choose from the design bar. Select the Draw option in the options bar.and select the 2. Select the ceiling plane as the sketching plane. . Select the Pick option from the options bar. select . The value will be negative so the rectangle will offset to the inside of the opening. Select from the design bar. 5. Activate the view Ceiling Plan: Ref. Sketch the rectangle as shown. 6. 429 . The finished sketch should appear as shown below. Sketch a rectangle using the newly added reference planes as a guide. 3. . Choose the option Pick a . 4. This plane can be selected by picking near the edge of the ceiling. Select the and enter an offset of -25mm in the options bar. 2. Enter a depth for the extrusion of 5mm in the options bar. Open a 3D view to see the opening. Choose to complete the opening. Lines will be sketched to represent the light fixture in the reflected ceiling plan view. A diffuser will be created for the light. 3. 4.

Choose below. Select as the sketch plane. Select the ceiling plane 2. 8. With the Ceiling Plan: Ref. we will define the rest of the light box. Choose to complete the extrusion. The finished extrusion is shown Defining The Light Box 1.8. Choose . then select the 4 edges of the diffuser panel as shown. Enter a Depth of 100mm and select the Pick option from the options bar. 6. Select the 4 edges of the opening. and select the A final extrusion will be added to the model. to complete the extrusion. Set the Depth to 5mm. Plan as the active view. To complete the light fixture. choose . Choose and Pick a Plane option. 5. Choose Extrude option. 7. 4. 3. Choose . select the four outer edges of the extrusion created. and then the Pick a Plane option. Select the top of the extrusion created in the previous steps as the sketching plane. Then using the Pick option. 430 .

3. Set the Transparency to 0. Glow of 1. 431 . Choose to complete the extrusion. The Material dialog box will appear. 4. Next. Smoothness of 50 and Shininess of 32. Select the button and change the color to White. Choose . Defining Materials and Object Styles 1. Choose to complete the material. 5. Define the attributes for the new material as shown.9. 2. Choose Duplicate and type Acrylic as the name of the new material. the material will be defined. Uncheck the option Update when AccuRender Selection occurs. Choose Settings and Materials from the menu.

Finally. Define the settings for Diffuser to have a Projection Line Weight of 1. open a 3D view. Line Pattern of Solid. To more clearly see the diffuser. Choose to complete the new subcategory. a new object style subcategory will be defined. Choose to add the new 8. 7. 9. 432 . To apply the new subcategory and the material to the diffuser. Select subcategory. and set the Material to Acrylic. Line Color of Black. and enter a name of Diffuser. Use the Dynamic Spin command from the tool bar. Choose Settings and Object Styles from the menu. The Object Styles dialog box will display. 10. rotate the view as shown.6.

12. 14. Choose File. Save and save the new family as 1200 x 600 Light. Choose to open the Element Properties dialog box. Change the view display to shading by selecting Shading from the View menu. 433 . Choose and select the diffuser panel. 13. The view should appear as shown. You can now load and place the light in your project. Modify the Subcategory to Diffuser and choose .11.

The choose View. Start a new family. Floor Plan: Ref. 1. Fit All to resize the display of each open view.rft from the dialogue. This will be done using 2D lines. Maximise ( ) the plan view. You will learn some of the different modelling techniques that are used to help maintain standards when creating families. To do this choose File.Creating a Furniture Family In this exercise you will be creating a new furniture family type: a roll-top desk. Close all open projects. Use File. window. Zoom. 2. Choose Window and Tile to arrange the windows of the family on the screen. New and Family. 434 . 3. First. Level. Choose Metric Furniture. Close to close the active project. you will sketch the symbol for the desk that you would like to appear in a plan view. The order the views are in is not important. In this exercise you will: Create a furniture family Set up reference planes Create Symbolic Lines Create Labeled Dimensions Create solid geometry using the Extrude command Use Equal Dimensions Use the Lock command Set object Visibility Set View Detail levels Create different Instances of the same family Add the family to a project Creating the Family 1.

6. Set these two dimensions to be equal. The two reference planes represent the origin of the furniture in the plan view. Modify the sizes as shown below. To create the dimension choose . the centre reference and the right vertical reference. 3. Also. The four reference planes will include a horizontal plane above and one below the horizontal origin and a vertical reference plane to the right and one to the left or the vertical origin. Choose and sketch four reference planes lines around the origin as shown in the next figure. Add the overall width and height dimensions. Create a permanent dimension between the left reference plane. 5. (We will talk later about how you can change this). select the left vertical reference.2. and place the dimension. Set the dimensions to be equal by clicking the to toggle it to . create the dimension from the bottom to the centre to the top reference planes. the centre origin and the right reference plane. Do not be concerned with size at this point. 4. Choose and sketch a rectangle that snaps to the intersections of the 435 .

choose . select Add Parameter. select the 2000mm dimension to be labelled. Click OK. 436 . From the Label drop-down list. From the Label drop-down list. 2. The label field will become available in the Options Bar. Select Type. To label the dimensions. select Add Parameter. Now you will label the overall dimensions so that you can later create a whole family of different sized roll-top desks. Click OK. 4. Enter the label name Length in the Name field.reference planes you just created. Enter the label name Depth in the Name field. 1. Select the 1000mm dimension that represents the depth. Select Type. 3.

Creating the 3D Geometry 1. 437 .Your sketch should resemble the image below. You have just completed the 2D plan view symbol of the desk now you are ready to create the 3D geometry for the desk. Choose from the Design bar. 2. Plane as the work plane by choosing from the dialogue box. Choose . Click on the Extrude option from the Form dialogue box. Select and accept Ref.

You can also change the height by selecting the top of the extrusion then selecting the dimension and change the value. 6. Select the bottom edge of the extrusion and drag this edge so the desktop's thickness is 200mm. When picking the lines you will have to use the <Tab> button to toggle to the sketched lines (if you select the <Tab> key twice you should be able to select the four chained lines in one command). Choose and select the top edge of the extrusion (place the cursor over the top edge and use the <Tab> key to toggle through the selections until just the top edge highlights and the message in the status window is "ExtrusionShape Handle".3. Notice the extrusion extends from the Reference Level up. Create a dimension from the top of the desk to the floor and create another from the top of the desk to the bottom of the desk. place the cursor over the edge and use the <Tab> key to toggle through the selections until the message in the status window reads "Extrusion-Shape Handle". 5. Open the Front Elevation view. Drag the top edge so the height is 1000 mm from the reference level. First you will define the desktop. Choose . 4. 7. Sketch a rectangle on top of the rectangle you option sketched earlier in this exercise.To grab the bottom edge. 438 . (the default is 250mm). We will create dimensions to control the thickness and height of the desktop (from top of desk to floor). An easy way to do this is to use the from the toolbar and pick the four segments from the previous rectangle.

11. 12. 10. Choose . Click on the Extrude option from the Form dialogue box. select Add parameter. Choose from the design bar. Name the parameter. Height. Lock the thickness dimension by clicking on the unlock symbol. From the Label drop-down list in the Options Bar. To do this. Open the plan view Floor Plan: Ref Level. 9.8. Repeat this process for the Thickness dimension. Click appear choose on the unlock to turn it to a locked dimension. Click OK. To get the lock to and select the witness line of the dimension. Now. 13. Set the label to Height as shown below. 439 . Level as the Work Plane by choosing from the dialogue box. Select and accept Ref. select the dimension that represents the height of the desk. and make it a Type parameter. create the drawer sections of the desk.

17. 440 . Add the dimensions as shown. Create the roll-top. Choose design bar. select Modify. from the 19. 16. Choose . The extrusion depth must be correctly set. The model should update as shown below. Select the lock to lock to extrusion height to the desk top. choose Align from the Edit menu. 15. This will ensure that when the overall desk dimensions change the drawer sections will maintain the 150mm offsets.14. First change to an Right Elevation. then select the top of the drawer fronts (second extrusion). Click on the Extrude option from the Form dialogue box. 18. then pick each dimension to display the lock symbol. Accept the Pick a Plane option to select the work plane. To set and lock the extrusion depth. To lock the dimension. Select the lock symbol to lock it. Select the bottom edge of the desk (first extrusion) first. Lock all of the 150mm offset dimensions. Open the elevation view Front. Sketch the two rectangles as shown in the next figure.

Open the Front elevation view to define the extrusion length. Change to a 3D view to see the desk family. 22. use the Align command or drag the ends of the roll-top extrusion to the outside of the drawers as shown in the next figure. Again. Sketch the approximate shape show below. the actual dimensions are not critical. 441 .20. 23. Choose . To specify the depth. Select the face of the extruded desk base as the sketch plane. The intent is to have the ends of the roll-top aligned and locked to the drawers as shown below. 21.

3. Choose the work plane. You set this display using the Visibility button. not what you should see in the family editor. and Pick a Plane. You can also see the 3D geometry. 442 . The drawer fronts will only be displayed at certain times in your project. Sketch the drawer fronts approximately as shown in the next figure. 2. Uncheck the Plan/RCP box . That is what you will do next. You will add the drawer fronts to the desk. Choose Adding More Geometry You will now add more geometry to the desk. create the geometry. Note: This is setting the visibility for your family when it is being placed into a project. Select the front of the drawer base as . First. Extrude and . 1. because you do not want the geometry displayed in the plan view. When the desk is added to a project you will want to see the 2D sketch in the plan view and the 3D geometry in the other views. Select the three extrusions you created and choose .Setting Visibility Notice you can see the original 2D sketch on the bottom of the desk. You can control this by setting the visibility of the geometry to display at certain detail levels. 4. Choose Open the Front Elevation view.

3. 6. For the name. Choose to close the dialogue box. Choose . Change the Length value to 2250mm and change Depth to 1250mm. Choose from the Options bar. Choose and uncheck the options for Coarse and Plan/RCP. Change the Length value to 2100. choose "Yes". This will set the display of the drawer fronts to only be on when the detail level of the view is Medium or Fine. Choose current instance. Type Roll-top 2100mm x 1000mm and then choose . and select the drawer front Change to the Right elevation. Choose . 4. 1. Choose Apply Values to see the family update. To create a new type.5. This will create a Family type at the same size of the desk you created. 8. Note: You may need to move the dialogue box to see the changes. This will display the properties for the 2. enter Roll-top 2000mm x 1000mm. 443 . choose from the dialogue box. Choose extrusion. from the options bar. Choose again. Creating Family Types We will now make several instances of this desk of differing sizes. Choose after typing the name. You will be prompted to save the type. 5. Now you will create other family sizes. To see the three family types you have just created click the pulldown arrow next to the Family Type box and select one of the names. 7. Change the Extrusion End parameter to 25mm. Enter Roll-top 2250mm x 1250mm and then OK. Choose from the Family types dialogue box.

444 . In the View Properties dialog change the Detail Level parameter to coarse. To do this choose View and View Properties. Open the Modelling Design bar and choose . Then click to place each type. 4. Save the file as "desk_roll-top". 5. Click to place a desk. Change to a 3D view to see the desks. For the purpose of this exercise save the file in the Projects folder. 6. 2. Change the Detail Level of the view to be coarse to see the drawer fronts go away. 3. Notice all that appears is the rectangular outline of the desk. Save to save the family file to disk. Choose File. Notice now all the 3D geometry is displayed. This is because you set the Visibility of the 3D geometry to not appear in a plan view. Adding the Desk to a Project 1. Notice in the 3D view the fronts disappear due to the setting of the detail level. Choose and navigate to the folder you saved your desk family.6. Open a new project. Choose OK. Select the desk family to load into the project. 7. Add a 2100mm x 1000mm and a 2250mm x 1250mm desk to the view by clicking on the drop down menu of the Type selector and choosing the type.

Make sure to reset the Offset value to 0 before sketching the vertical line.rft" and choose . In this exercise you will learn the following: How to create a titleblock Creating the margin and titleblock outline Adding a company logo to the titleblock Adding text to the titleblock Creating new text types Adding labels to automatically capture project information. and Title block. Enter 4. Select the template named "A0 metric. 3. Create the vertical line 140mm from the right border (165mm from the right sheet edge ). 2. Creating the Titleblock 1. This will open a copy of the A0 title block template. The template contains only a set of rectangular lines representing the paper border (minus printer margins). Sketch a 25mm border around the sheet. New. Sketch the rectangle by selecting two points diagonally on the existing border. and select the . We will create a A0 Metric titleblock for this example.Creating Title Blocks On this lesson you will learn how to create a titleblock in Autodesk Revit. Choose an offset value of -25. 5. 445 . Choose File.

Sketch a horizontal line 150mm from the upper border (175mm from the top paper edge). 9.6. Sketch another horizontal line 125mm below the last line. use the Control key to select multiple 446 . Sketch a third horizontal line 395mm from the last line. The line weight of the last two horizontal lines will be changed. 8. and pick the two lines. as shown. as shown. Select objects. 7.

choose from the options bar. and select the logo. Choose from the properties dialogue box to access the Type properties. To define a new style.10. This file can be found in the Training\Common folder. From the options pulldown list. We will now add text to the title block. 3. Choose from the design bar. 447 . From the File menu. The logo we will use will be imported from a dwg file. 2. Move the logo to the upper right Adding Text 1. Choose corner as shown. 2. select Import\Image. We will add the company logo in the upper right corner. 3. Adding A Company Logo 1. Choose to add the logo. Select the file Company Logo. There are currently two text note styles defined called Text: 8mm and Text: 12mm. Before adding the text a new text style will be defined. choose Wide Lines to change the line weight for the selected lines.jpg.

With selected from the design bar. Choose to close Type Properties dialogue. Choose to close the Element Properties dialogue box. Enter the name for the new text style as 15mm Bold. choose the start point for the text as indicated 448 . 5. 7. Choose to define the new text style.4. The first text note will be added using the new text style. 6. Modify the Text Size parameter to 15mm and check the Bold parameter.

+1-781-839-5333 to complete the note.+1-781-839-5300 Fax. reposition the text and logo as desired. 9. 8. If necessary. Type in the note Revit Technology Corporation.below. Choose 300 Fifth Ave. Waltham.. Next text notes will be added using the default text style. 449 . Enter the note as shown. You may have to edit the size and position of the text box. 10. Pick on either of the two shape handles. (blue dots). MA 02451 Tel. 13. Choose and select the text style Text: 8mm. and stretch the text box until the text lines do not wrap. Choose and select the text. Drag the cursor to create the text box below the Revit logo. 12. 11. then pick the location for the note as shown.

Modify the text size to 5mm and choose . Choose and then and select the new to open the properties dialogue box for text. Choose and click the first location approximately as shown. Enter the string as shown in the dialogue. A new. to create a new style. Choose text note. 450 . 15. Position the text note as shown. smaller text style will be added. Choose 17. 16. Add some additional text for the consultants. 18.14. Name the new style 5mm.

Sketch three new lines below the lower horizontal (Wide Line). Press <ESC> on the keyboard to deselect the note. Choose and using the 5mm text. and then click Finish Paste in the Options Toolbar.19. 21. Do this twice. as shown in the next figure. 20. Each line is separated by 20mm vertically. Text notes will be added. Choose Copy from the Edit menu. add the 451 . Choose Paste from the Edit menu and click below the first note to place the second. Copy the Note. Choose and select the text note.

22. Select Project Issue Date as the parameter to be added and choose . Pick the point shown below for the start point of the label. 452 . from the design bar. Sketch 3 new lines above the Date as shown. Adding Labels 1. A label is a property that can be added to the drawing automatically by adding the property value to the drawing sheet. Each line is separated by 20mm vertically. To add the label. 3.following four text notes. Now you will add a Label. 2. Select the alignment options of Right and choose Bottom from the options bar.

create a new text style called 15mm and modify the Text Size parameter to 15mm as shown. 6. 5. 453 . Using the same technique as for text notes. The new label will be added using a placeholder value as shown.4. Add the labels for "Drawn By" and "Checked By". choose . 7. With selected. This will use a different text style. A label will be added for sheet number.

Select Client Name as the Substitution Text. Select and change the Text Alignment to Center and Middle. 9. Place the cursor approximately as shown below. Create a new label using the new 15mm label style for Sheet Number as shown below. 10. 10. 11. Using the same process place the Project Name and Project Number as shown 454 . 12.8. More Labels will now be added using the 12mm label text style.

Now add a sheet to the project. The choose and to display the title block properties. choose Add from the dialogue box. 6. Choose Save from the File menu. After saving the title block. blank project by selecting . 455 . Save the title block.Horizontal" title block was stored and select the file. Notice the title block we created is not in this list. close the file by choosing Close from the file menu. 1. 4. To add it to the list. Next create a new. 2. Choose View. Navigate to the location where the "A0 . Using the New Title block In this portion of the exercise we will add the title block to a project and modify the parameters which were defined (using the labels) in the exercise. 5. 3. Navigate to the Library/Title blocks folder and save the title block as A0Horizontal. choose select the title block. New and Sheet to display the current list of title blocks.below. Select the newly added title block from the dialogue box and choose . 13. To modify the parameters added to the title block.

To modify the parameters. Choose to complete. simply select in the value field of the table for the parameter you want to modify.7. Select the field for 'Drawn By' and change the name from 'Author' to 'John Doe'. The parameter on the title block will update as shown below 456 .

They are added to detail views. A Detail Component family is a model family which contains only two-dimensional geometry. Choose View and View Properties and modify the scale to 1:5. Detail components could include dimensional lumber. Changing the view scale to aid in sketching. Select the template Metric Detail Component. New and Family. An Instance parameter is a parameter within the object which can be modified and only affects that individual object. Creating the Detail Component 1. within the project. In this exercise you will learn the following concepts: Creating a detail symbol. Choose File. This component will have a fixed thickness (21mm) but will have a variable length (instance parameter).Creating a Detail Component In this exercise you will be creating a Detail Component. 4. We will begin by changing the default settings for view scale and model snaps. Creating regions in a family. Choose and sketch a vertical reference plane 250mm away from the existing vertical reference plane as shown. or a structural tubing. rather than the sheet. Adding a filled region to a family. Choose to update the view scale. Creating instance parameters. Changing 2D line types. Adding a detail component to a project and applying it. . In this exercise we will also demonstrate the instance parameters capability. a metal stud. Using reference planes to aid in geometry construction. and they are visible only in those views. 2. Next sketch a reference plane parallel to the existing vertical reference plane. 457 . The component we will define is a sheet of 21mm plywood.rft and choose 3. They scale with the model.

The first ply will be defined as a region. Choose from the design bar. 3. Pick and again. Creating Region Types 1. then the down arrow. Choose Medium Lines from the options list and then sketch the rectangle as shown. Select . 458 . Sketch the region as shown below. From the type pulldown list change the line style for the region to Light Lines. Choose and select the option. A region is a 2D area which can have a fill pattern assigned to it. then pick and then select ." Change the Fill Pattern parameter by picking in the 'Value' column. 4. and change the Type to 2. 5. The rectangle should be 21mm in height.5. Next the outer boundary of the detail component will be sketched as lines. select Diagonal up [drafting]. Set the height to 7mm. Select and enter the name 'Ply 1. . To begin select the "Filled region 1".

6. 459 . 2. Create the final region type. Click OK when done. From the drop-down list. Sketch the last region using the new type as shown below. select Add parameter. The label options will become available in the options bar. Choose to complete the region. Choose and select the dimension. Sketch another region using the same region type as shown below. 8. 7. This time the new region type will use a Fill Pattern value of Diagonal down [drafting]. To create an instance parameter for the length of the component. Applying Instance Parameters 1. Type the name. choose and create a dimension between the two vertical reference planes. named 'Middle'. Width and select the option for Instance Parameter as shown below.

called Section: Section Detail @Foundation Cill. choose and select one of the two vertical reference planes.rfa component in and select to load the component. Choose File and Save to save the new component. Enter a name of Plywood. the component. 460 .rvt.3. choose File and Load From Library. 3. This will create a file called Plywood. choose bar. To test the component.rfa. 2. Navigate to the folder you saved the Plywood. The view which should be active is a callout view of a section. and Load Family. From the File menu. Choose To place the component. To use the new detail component. 4. Navigate to the Training\Metric folder and open the project detail_comp_test. Modify the distance from 250mm to 500mm. The component should update as shown. select Open. Load and Test The Component 1. from the Drafting tab of the design 4.

5. 6. This is known as the shape handle 8. 7. Move the cursor into the detail view and place the component as shown below. 461 . Choose and select the left end of the plywood detail component. Select Plywood from the type selector list. The end of the component can now be dragged to any desired location by moving the shape handle.

2. Sketch a circle with the centre starting at the intersection of the two construction lines. Select the template file called "Generic Annotation. Creating the 2d lines for the symbol. through the centre of the circle. Sketch the final line down from the centre vertically as shown. Creating subcategories for the symbol. Setting different line weights for the 2D lines. Choose File. You will learn the following in this exercise: How to create an annotation symbol. Loading the symbol into your project. Modify the radius to 8mm. 4. Select the sketch option and draw a line horizontally.rft" and choose open a copy of the template. 5. 462 . This will 3. New and Annotation Symbol. To begin the north arrow. Creating the Annotation Symbol 1. as shown. Draw another line up from the circle’s centre vertically as shown. choose and select as the sketching option. .Creating an Annotation Symbol In this exercise you will be creating a North Arrow as an annotation symbol. 6. This line is drawn separately as we will be changing the line width of the top (north) line.

Add a Line weight of 5 for the and Line colour of Black.7. 11. Choose Settings. Choose File. From the options list. Object Styles from the menu. Choose OK to add the subcategory. 12. You may have to use the <Tab> key to select the line. Choose Create New. choose and select the line representing north. To apply the new line weight to the north line. Save and give the symbol a name. 9. Then close the file by choosing File and Close. 14. 13. select North Line. To use the symbol in a project. 1. 8. We will now define subcategories for the annotation symbol to control the line weight of the north line. Save the file. Using the Symbol The following optional steps outline how to load the symbol into a project and place it on a drawing sheet. Choose OK to close the dialogue box. start a new project by choosing from the 463 . 10. Enter a name for the subcategory as North line as shown. The resulting symbol should look like the figure below.

Navigate to the location where the north symbol file was stored and select the file. Left click to place the symbol as shown.toolbar. New and Sheet. 2. 5. 464 . Choose Open to load the file. choose File and Load Family From Library. 3. 4. To create a drawing sheet. To add the symbol to the project. choose from the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. To add the symbol to the drawing sheet. Select the A0 metric title block as the title block to be added and choose OK. 6. choose View. Check the type pulldown list to ensure the north arrow is the default symbol. This symbol will be used on a drawing sheet.

2. Choose the template "Door Tag. such as area. This is done by adding parametric labels to the tag. Before placing any labels. when the tag is placed. The labels will extract the value of a specific parameter. a new label type will be defined and the existing type will be edited. The current label has one type called 465 . you will create a custom room tag which will display the room's name and area. To begin the tag a label defining the room name will be placed. To create the new tag. select Label. Next select the template to start from. Ceiling Finish and Area. Parametric Labels The tag you will define will display the room parameters Name. Next choose Label: 3mm. New and Annotation Symbol from the menu. from the model. Floor Finish. 2. You will learn: How to create an annotation symbol Add Labels to extract data from the project Loading the tag into your project Creating the Room Tag 1. choose File. From the design bar. 1. from the option bar.rte" and choose Open to begin.Creating a Room Tag In this exercise.

4. 8. choose the Edit /New button on the properties dialog box. To define a new type. un-click the check box next to parameter Underline. The size of the text will be changed to 9mm Select the Text Size parameter and modify the value to 2mm. Next. Click the check box next to parameter Underline. To edit the type. Choose OK to close the Type Properties dialog. and choose OK to continue. This label type will be edited to make the text underlined. 7. 5. 6.3. Choose OK to close 466 . choose . Now choose Duplicate from the Type Properties dialog and enter the name of the new type as 2mm.

14. The label for the room name will use the 3mm label type. 467 . The exact location is not critical and can be moved at a later time. This defines which parameter will be display for this label. 11. Select Label and choose Label: 2mm from the Type Selector drop-down list. 12. 9. make sure the Label: 3mm" type is selected. The Select Parameter dialog box will appear.the Type Properties dialog. 13. Choose OK to close the Element Properties dialog. Next select text alignment option Center and Middle from the options bar. 10. From the Type Selector. Place the label as shown below. Select Name from the list of parameters and choose OK. The next label will be placed below the first.

17. If necessary. The next label to be placed will be Ceiling finish. The three labels should appear as shown below. 20. Select the parameter Floor Finish as the parameter to display. Place the next label as shown below. the room area label will be added. 21. 18. 19. 16. select Modify and reposition any of the labels. Select Ceiling Finish as the parameter for this label. Choose Save and give the tag the name Finish Area Tag. Use the 2mm label type and place the new label below the floor finish as shown.15. Select the parameter as Area.rfa. Add a 2mm label below the Ceiling Finish label as shown. 468 . Finally.

In this exercise. you will create a concave floor using a similar process. In this exercise you will learn the following concepts: • • • • • • • • How to create a family in-place Assigning the family category Creating revolve geometry for the family Selecting the proper work plane for geometry creation Creating a dome roof Creating a concave floor Assigning materials for 3D geometry Inserting host based components into In-Place Families Retrieving the Training File 1. select Pantheon. Within that project. Take a moment to open various views and get familiar with the project. you will insert host-based components into them to see how they react. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog.rvt. you could attach wall tops to it and join other roofs to it. After creating the components. after creating an in-place roof. these family components interact with the model according to their assigned family category. you will create a domed roof and concave floor as an In-Place Families. it would be treated like any other roof. Click Open. Afterwards.Creating In-Place Families In this exercise. Once created. 3D View 2. There are many techniques that can be used to create In-Place Families. you will create a dome using the Revolve tool. 469 . From the Common folder. For example. InPlace Families are created within the project file rather than separately in the Family Editor.

This roof will include a 8. ZF. 1. 4. . Elevation: South. select Choose Roofs and click OK. select and choose Zoom to Fit. Tip: In the future. you will create a dome roof as an in-place family.Tiled Views Note: This project was created using an imperial template and components. 470 . Creating a Dome Roof as an In-Place Family In this part of the exercise. From the Toolbar. 3. you can use the keyboard shortcut. set the decimal places to 2. Open and maximize the view. and set the unit suffix to m. Click OK. choose Units from the Settings menu. From the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.23 meter oculus at the top of the dome. 2. Format the Length units to report Meters. To change the units of measurement to Metric.

you will create the roof's geometry. Creating the Dome Roof Geometry In this section of the exercise. you must finish or quit the family before returning to the project. Selecting the Revolve Tool 2. to the in-place family. 1. select . From the Design Bar. 471 . When prompted.Assigning a Family Category By assigning the family category. Roofs. Type Dome as the name of the in-place roof and click OK. Choose Pick a Plane and click OK. From the Design Bar. select Revolve and click OK. you ensure that the geometry created within the family is treated as a roof. Naming the In-Place Family Notice that the Design Bar changes and that there is only a Family tab available. In this mode. choose Set Work Plane.

a prompt will appear asking you to choose a view that is parallel to the selected work plane. Section: Wall Section . Picking the Work Plane 3. Once it prehighlights. Elevation: South. it is called Center East/West. place your cursor over the reference plane that bisects the exterior walls.Choosing a Work Plane Option Within the view. Immediately after picking the work plane. Choosing a View The view will open immediately. Choose the view. A section view was created specifically for this purpose. 472 .Center and click Open View. select it.

Section: Wall Section . sketch a line over the reference plane. select . you must define the axis that the revolve will spin around.Center 4. From the Options Bar. Circle. 473 . Using the image below for guidance. . The radius of the circle should intersect with the Level 1 reference plane. select the sketching tool. Using the image below for guidance. Sketching the Axis of Rotation Tip: By choosing the Center East/West reference plane as the work plane and the Center North/South reference plane as the axis. sketch a circle centered on the intersection of the Center North/South reference plane and the Level: Upper Cornice. From the Design Bar. Next. you have set the center of rotation at the exact center of the circular walls. select Choose Draw from the Options Bar. 5. From the Design Bar. Center North/South. Note: Make sure the axis snaps to the Center North/South reference plane.

and snap to. 474 . Zoom in on the top of the circle you just sketched. select . Zooming on the Top of the Dome 7. Sketching the Roof Profile 8. select . sketch the rim of the oculus. ZR. From the Design Bar. select Chain and the Line tool. Use the reference planes to trace over. Place the cursor to the right of the rim lines and click on the circle. You can also use the keyboard shortcut. This area has reference planes to assist sketching. Right-click within the View Window and select Zoom in Region.Sketching a Circle 6. From the Toolbar. From the Options Bar. Using the image below for guidance.

. From the Design Bar. From the Design Bar. select Lines. begin the line at the lower endpoint of the upper. Select the lower. Sketching the Upper Arc 11. select Chain and the sketching tool.Splitting the Circle to the Right of the Rim 9. left. Using the Trim/Extend Tool After trimming. select Lines. vertical rim line. select the circle to the left of the rim. Sketch two lines along the wall to connect the two arc lines. select the sketching tool. End the line at the top of the left wall. Using the image below for guidance. Trimmed Sketch 10. the sketch should resemble the image below. left. Lines. From the Options Bar. 475 . Adjust the arc so it resembles the image below. vertical rim line first. From the Toolbar. Arc passing through three points. select the Trim/Extend tool. Next. From the Options Bar.

select . use the Trim/Extend tool to close the gaps. This is the same material used by the exterior face of the circular walls. .Adding the Final Lines 12. Your sketch should resemble the image below. If your profile is not closed. Select the vertical line attached to the interior wall face first. From the Material drop-down list. select Ext. 14. Completed Revolve Sketch Note: Revolve profiles must be a closed loop. 13. Click OK. Select the lower arc above its intersection with the line you selected previously. From the Design Bar. Wall Brick. 476 . select the Trim/Extend tool. From the Toolbar. select . From the Design Bar.

From the toolbar. 16. Concave. you will create a concave. select 3D View of New Dome Roof with Oculus Creating a Concave Floor as an In-Place Family In this section. select Select Floors and click OK. Elevation: South. select 3. 1. Open and maximize the view. 477 . and click OK. 2. From the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Completed Revolve Choose to complete the in-place roof. From the Toolbar. and choose Zoom to Fit. . When prompted. Elevation: South Note: A building pad has already been added to the project. name the floor. . cobblestone floor as an In-Place Family.

Selecting the Work Plane 3. When prompted. select . choose Set Work Plane. a prompt will appear asking you to choose a view that is parallel to the selected work plane. From the Design Bar. Elevation: South. select it. Selecting the Revolve Tool 2. 478 . you will create the floor's geometry. it is called Center East/West. Once it prehighlights. Immediately after picking the work plane. place your cursor over the reference plane that bisects the exterior walls. 1. From the Design Bar. Choose Pick a Plane and click OK. A section view was created specifically for this purpose.Creating the Concave Floor Geometry In this section of the exercise. select Revolve and click OK. Choosing a Work Plane Option Within the view.

sketch the revolve profile so that there is a slight slope towards the center of the building. Choosing a View The view will open immediately. From the Design Bar. 4. 6.Center and click Open View. 7. . Using the image below for guidance. Center North/South. The right edge must be aligned with the reference plane. Next. Using the image below for guidance.Choose the view. select Choose Draw from the Options Bar. Note: Make sure the axis snaps to the Center North/South reference plane. Sketching the Axis of Rotation 5. Section: Wall Section . From the Options Bar. select Chain and the sketching tool. Lines. From the Design Bar. 8. sketch a line over the reference plane. you must define the axis that the revolve will spin around. select . Center North/South The left edge must be aligned to the interior face of the wall The bottom edge must be aligned to the building pad 479 .

select from different angles. use the Trim/Extend tool to close the gaps.Note: Do not be overly concerned with dimensions. From the Design Bar. Zoom the view to fit and from the View menu. This is the same material applied to the site surface. 8. From the Project Browser. select . The concave floor is required to drain the water that enters through the oculus. Click OK. select Wireframe. Completed Revolve 9. select . From the Design Bar. select Cobblestone. 6. From the toolbar. 3D Section View. If your profile is not closed. 10. select the view. and use the spin and zoom controls to look at the view 480 . Choose to complete the in-place floor. Sketching the Revolve Profile Note: Revolve profiles must be a closed loop. 7. From the Material drop-down list. Notice the concave nature of the floor.

3D Section View Inserting Host-Based Components into In-Place Families In the final part of this exercise. From the toolbar. 3D Image—Raytraced 481 . 3. Place the cursor over the dome roof and notice that it prehighlights. select Shaded with Edges. You may need to zoom in a bit to see this clearly. 5. you will insert a host based component into the in-place roof that you created previously. 6. select . You can render the image by selecting Raytrace from the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Skylight: 44" x 46". Click to place a skylight. 1. Notice that the in-place roof hosts the skylight just as any other roof would. 2. From the View menu. Add two additional skylights nearby. From the Design Bar. select Window. From the Type Selector drop-down list. Note: The skylight component is a roof-hosted component. You may Save or Close the training file. 4.

4. Notice that the working window displays two intersecting reference planes. Ref. return to the Floor plan view. Creating a Custom Baluster Family 1.Creating a Baluster Family In this exercise. 3. You have now opened a session of Family Editor and you are ready to create a baluster family. 6. 5. you will create a custom baluster family and apply it to a set of stair railings. Open up the Left Elevation view. Choose OK to complete the selection. A custom baluster is simply an extrusion of a profile which is associated to a particular baluster height parameter. The point of intersection of the two reference planes represents the center point for the placement of the balusters in the project. Choose Solid from the design bar and then select Extrude from the Form selection box. draw the profile below. Metric Baluster. Choose the Baluster Family template. The Baluster Height has already been set up in the template. and Family. simply choose the Lines tool from the Design Bar and select the chain option from the Options Bar. To draw the profile of the baluster. 482 . Using a combination of straight lines and arcs. A top angle reference has also been set up. 2. Start a new Baluster family by selecting File.rft and select Open. To create the baluster. New. Level.

8. then pick the top face of the extrusion. 1. A lock will appear after making these two picks. 10. Align from the Menubar. Notice that by default the baluster extrusion has a depth of 250mm. Choose Finish Sketch to complete the extrusion. 7. Select Run and sketch a single straight run curve as shown below. 9. 3. Click on the lock to lock this association. From the floor plan of Level 1.Note: You do not need to be concerned about reproducing it precisely. Choose File. try to keep the overall width appropriate for the dimensions of a baluster.rfa Using a Baluster in a Project A new project will be created and the new baluster will be loaded and used. Choose Stairs from the Modeling design bar. New and Project from the menubar. Choose Align from the Toolbar or use Tools. 11. Create a new project. Also remember to keep the profile centered on the intersection of the reference planes. Open the Front elevation view. Save the new baluster family by selecting File. 2. First pick the reference plane you wish to align to. In the sample shown. To associate the top of the baluster extrusion to the reference plane representing the baluster height. Next you will need to associate the height of the extrusion with the Baluster Height parameter. Save and naming the family Baluster_Custom. However. 483 . you will use the Align tool. a staircase will be added. the width is approximately 30mm.

4. 5. Change the Baluster Family from the current baluster to Baluster Custom. 6. Pick one of the railings so that you can modify the railing properties. Since both railings are of the same type. Rotate the view to a position similar to the one shown below. This will open up the Type Properties dialog box for the Stair Railing. Choose File. Open the default 3D view and set the view to Shaded with Edges. 8. Load From Library.rfa. Choose Properties followed by Edit/New to change the Stair Railing Properties. Choose Finish Sketch to complete the new stairs. modification of one railing will affect the other railing as well. 9. Load Family and select the Baluster_Custom. 484 . 7. In order to use the new balusters for the stair railing. the baluster must be loaded into the project.

Choose OK to close both dialog boxes. Zoom in to observe that the new custom balusters are now in use. 485 .

rft as the template. All Profiles must be closed shapes.Creating Profile Families A Profile Family is simply a 2D family made up of lines which define a closed profile. Stair Nosing Profile. Family and choose Profile-Rail. New. To create a new Rail Profile family. 486 . this origin point will match up with the position of the path of the object to be generated. Instead. railings and other profile dependent objects. The template will appear as shown below. Make sure. You have now opened a session of Family Editor and you are ready to create the profile family. 5. sweeps. Do not be concerned about precise dimensions. Profile Family Templates: To facilitate the creation of profile families a number of different templates have been created.rft as the template and select OK to open the template. Family. Save this Profile Family as Sweep Profile. The areas this exercise will cover are: Creating a New Profile Family Profile Family Templates: Rail Profile. Choose Metric Profile. Note: The point of intersection of the two reference planes represents the origin point for the profile family. Notice that the Design Bar is now a simplified palette of choices and that the working window displays two intersecting reference planes. Start a new Profile Family by selecting File. 4. You will also learn how Profile Families allow you to reuse profiles that are frequently repeated both within the same project and in other projects. Draw the following shape using a combination of straight lines and a curved line.rfa. and Wall Sweep Using Profiles Families for: Sweep Profiles Cornices and Reveals Creating a New Profile Family 1. Reveal. you will learn how Profile Families can be used to create cornices. This profile is not "placed" in a project the way other families are. that the profile is a closed shape. choose File. choose File. Save and save in an appropriate directory.rft except that additional information is provided to clarify the position of the profile with respect to other elements in the project environment. New. the profile can be used to define the cross sections of other objects. When using the profile in a project. You will now create a simple profile. Each of these templates works similarly to the standard template Profile Family. In this exercise. however. 2. To do so. Choose the Lines tool from the Design Bar. 3. Rail Profile Rail Profile families are used to define the cross section shape of a rail in a Revit project.

Stair Nosing Profile To create a new Stair Nosing Profile. The blue tread and riser lines are just for explanation purposes. The template will appear as shown below.The template includes text to show the location of the Centerline of the rail and the Rail Top.rft as the template.. When creating a rail in a Revit project. It also indicates where to draw the nosing profile. The rail height is the distance from the ground surface to the horizontal reference plane labeled Rail Top. 487 .. Family. and choose Profile-Stair Nosing. Illustrated below is a Rail Profile that is drawn so that the distance to the top surface of the rail will be calculated as the rail height. The template includes text to show the location of the Tread Surface and the Riser Face. choose File. New. one of the parameters that can be set for the rail is the rail height. Illustrated below is an example of a nosing profile. The black lines represent the actual nosing profile that should be drawn.

The template will appear as shown below. The template includes text to show the location of the Wall and Wall Face in the project environment.rft as the template.Reveal Profile Reveal Profiles are used in with the Reveal tool in the project environment. Note that the reveal is drawn against the wall face and starting from the horizontal reference plane. Family and choose Profile-Reveal . They allow the user to define a profile which will be cut out from a wall surface. To create a new Reveal Profile. The blue lines representing the wall are just for explanation purposes. Illustrated below is an example of a Reveal Profile. the offset above the level will be the distance from the level to the horizontal reference plane. The black lines represent the actual Reveal profile that should be drawn. choose File.) 488 . (In the project environment. New.

could be created as a wall sweep using a Host Sweep Profile.. "Host". the sweep adds a profile shape to the host's surface. The template will appear as shown below.rft as the template. Note that the sweep is drawn against the host (wall) face and starting from the horizontal reference plane. was replaced with "Wall".. and choose ProfileHosted.Host Sweep Profile Host Sweeps are very similar to Reveals except that instead of cutting away from the host's surface. The blue lines representing the wall are just for explanation purposes. New. Illustrated below is an example of a Host Sweep Profile. for instance. To create a new Host Sweep Profile. A cornice. 489 . choose File. The black lines represent the actual Host Sweep profile that should be drawn. the profile is intended to be used as a wall sweep profile. the template includes text to show the location of the Host and Host Face in the project environment. Tip: In the image shown below. Family. Once again. The text.

Project and accepting the defaults in the New Project dialog. 3.Using a Profile Family for a Sweep The sweep tool allows the user to create a solid by "sweeping" a closed profile along a path. New. Choose the Lines tool from the Sketch Design bar and sketch a path approximately as shown below: 490 . choose the Family category of Generic Models and select OK. To do so. 4. first choose Create.. from the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. You will now create an in-place family sweep. Choose Solid from the Design Bar and choose the Sweep option in the Form dialog box which appears and choose OK. Choose Sketch 2D Path from the Design Bar. 2. you will create a sweep using the Sweep Profile family that you created previously. When prompted. 1. Open a new project by using File. You will first need to sketch a path for the sweep. In the following exercise. Enter the name Sweep and choose OK. 5.. The introduction of Profile families gives users the added opportunity to predefine the profiles.

it is possible to make adjustments to the position. Select the sweep. 2. Before modifying the profile. Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. simply choose Load Profiles from the Options Bar. Vertical profile offset. Draw a vertical reference plane along the back edge of the profile to help show how the profile position will later be changed.) To use the previously created profile family. orientation and angle of the profile. The element Properties dialog box will appear. The solid created is the Profile Family "swept" along the path drawn. Modifying the Profile Position When using a profile family for a sweep. Choose 3D from the Toolbar to better view the sweep. 8. non-interrupted path. 7.6. open up the South Elevation view to observe the changes which occur. Choose Finish Sweep and Finish Family to complete the sweep creation. Remember that a sweep path must be a continuous. navigate to the saved location of your Profile Family. You are now ready to define the profile. Horizontal profile offset. 4. Angle. These can be accessed through the properties of the sweep. Profile is flipped. To load a profile. (Notice that there is a Sketch Profile button in the Design Bar. 491 . Select the Sweep Profile from the Options Bar drop-down list. 1. and choose Open. Notice the parameters relating to the sweep profile: Profile. Choose Finish Path when you have completed sketching the path. Select the Sweep Properties from the Design Bar. it will need to be loaded into the project. 3. This would allow a user to simply sketch the profile on the spot. In the Options Bar. select Edit Sweep.

5. Choose OK. pick the sweep again and choose Properties to re-enter the element properties dialog box. See how the profile has moved with respect to it's original position. Check the Profile is flipped box and choose OK. To do so. 7. The last change you will make to the profile is to change the profile angle. 492 . Follow the previous steps to access the sweep properties and change the Angle parameter to 20. You will now flip the profile. Change the Horizontal Profile Offset to 25mm and the Vertical Profile offset to 600mm'. 6. Observe the result. You may need to open the 3D view to better understand the change.

Wall Sweep. 1. New. The position is determined by the offset from the wall face and the horizontal offset from the level directly below it. To use the Wall Sweep and Reveal tools. Wall Sweeps and Reveals can only be placed 3D views or non-parallel elevation views. Choose Finish Family to complete the in-place sweep family. Choose Horizontal. choose Host Sweep. Notice that an option for vertical or horizontal appears in the option bar. 4. 493 . Open the Level 1 Floor plan and draw four walls as shown. 2. follow the same steps substituting the Reveal tool for the Wall Sweep tool. Project and accepting the defaults in the New Project dialog. To create a Reveal.Note: The Angle parameter can be a positive or negative angle depending on the desired result. From the Modeling Design Bar. 3. In this case the path is a straight line vertically or horizontally along the face of the wall. Activate a 3D view using the 3D icon in the Toolbar. Note: In the following exercise. Using a Profile Family for a Wall Sweep or Reveal The principle behind using a Profile Family for a Wall Sweep or Reveal is similar to using it for an in-place family sweep. Open a new project by using File. The default profile is a rectangular profile called Cornice. the steps to create a wall sweep will be covered. There is still a path and a profile that is swept along the path. it is first necessary to create some walls. Place the wall sweep on one wall as shown below. 8. Use the pan and zoom controls to adjust the view to approximately match the view below.

Next you will edit the properties of the wall sweep to use the loaded Profile family. This means that the same height offset and offset from wall parameters will effect the cornices that are on different walls. 494 . and the Offset From Level is the height above the base level. the Level is the Base level that the reveal is associated to. Select the wall adjacent to place a wall sweep as shown. and Load Family. The Offset from wall is the distance from the wall face. Note: Until Start Next is selected from the Options Bar. The Current type of wall sweep is called a cornice and is using the default profile. 5. 2. all subsequent picks will be adding to the same sweep.5. Continue to add a wall sweep on all four walls. Choose File. Load From Library. 3. The default sweep profile shape will be replaced with the sweep profile created earlier in the exercise.rfa file created earlier. 1. You will now edit the properties of the Wall Sweep to adjust the height above the level and to see how the sweep can be positioned some distance away from the building. choose Edit/New and use the drop-down list to change the profile value to Sweep Profile. Select Properties from the Options Bar. Select the Sweep Profile. You will now edit the Cornice type and change the Profile used to the Sweep Profile. To do this. Select the Wall Sweep and choose Properties from the Options Bar. Choose OK to complete the changes in both dialog boxes. 4.

Choose OK to complete the changes. Change the Offset from wall to 300mm and change the Offset From Level to 1200mm. 495 . You may need to rotate the model to better observe the offset from wall modification.6. The Wall Sweep will have moved accordingly.

The building should also reach a reasonable point of development before the project is shared. On many building projects. Worksets are Revit’s way of dividing up the project to allow different users to work on different parts of the design. Step 2: Activate Worksets • When a Revit project is to be worked on by multiple users. 496 . This will automatically create the default worksets.Project Sharing This section is dedicated to familiarizing you with team collaboration using Autodesk Revit. For example. Step 5: Create the Central File • The first time the project is saved after worksets have been activated you will automatically be saving the Central File. the building elements need to be placed into their respective worksets. the project gets divided up into different default worksets. Basic Stages of Project Sharing Step 1: Start Project with One User • One user starts to work on the project. The Central File coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. When creating new worksets. Step 4: Subdivide the Project into Worksets • Once the worksets have been created. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. you will you will shorten your saving and opening times. the project coordinator will activate worksets. It is therefore essential that the Central File be saved in a location which is accessible to all team members. Step 7: Open Worksets • Whenever you open a Local or Central File you have the option to choose which worksets to open. A workset is a collection of elements in a building. architects work in teams with each person assigned a specific functional area. Step 6: Create Local Files • A Local File is created for each team member that allows them to check out worksets to work on their part of the project and to save their work back to the Central File. Worksets must first be enabled. The user can then further subdivide the project to suit the project team. Generally. the Central File is not a file to be opened and worked in directly. When Worksets are activated in a project. This file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families of that will be used for the project. it needs to be divided up into sections called Worksets. some important things to consider are team member tasks and default visibility settings. A Local File is created by opening the Central File and using Save as to create a copy of the Central File. By choosing to open only those worksets you actually need to complete a task. This chapter will show you how to divide up a project so that different users can access the same project and have all of their changes coordinated by Revit. then you would want to place interior walls and elements into that workset. Once the project is ready to be shared. if a workset named Interior was created. Step 3: Create Additional Worksets • The project coordinator will need to create additional worksets so that the project can be properly shared amongst the team members. To share a project file. Each Local Files is user specific and can only be accessed by the user that created it.

This frees them up so that other users can check them out. To change the workset username. However. select Worksets. From the Common folder. Changes to other users models only become visible to you when you have either Saved to Central or used Reload Latest Worksets. This gives you the rights to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. choose Settings and Options from the menu. You can only make a workset the active workset if it is editable by you. 497 . Step 11: Closing a Local File • At the end of a work session. you should then also save your local file. To save locally is to save the changes only to your local file. If you are doing this exercise alone.Step 8: Check Out Worksets • To “check out” a workset is to make that workset editable by you. The user can use a drop-down menu to select which workset is active. Click Open. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Before closing your session of Revit. no other users can effect any changes to those parts of the project. Exercise The following exercise is will demonstrate how to: Enable worksets Divide project data into workset Establish a Central File Create Local Files Publish changes to Central File Portions of this exercise require multiple users with network access. To Save to Central is to save your changes back to the Central file so that they can be viewed by other users. When Saving to Central it is recommended that you relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Note: When adding view specific components. building elements will be automatically placed into the workset that is active at that moment. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the Central file. There is no limit to number of worksets you can have editable at one time. the active workset automatically becomes the view’s workset.rvt. you can simulate multiple users by starting a second session of Autodesk Revit and changing the Workset Username. Enabling Worksets 1. you should Save to Central and relinquish all worksets that you had editable. until you relinquish the worksets. Step 10: Saving your Changes • Throughout the day you should regularly save both locally and centrally. As you work. Step 9: Work on the Project • Work on the project proceeds as usual.

In this case. there will be a limited number of team members working on it. Notice that the visible by default in all views has been checked. In this exercise.2. Enter the name Interior Layout. one will work on the layout of the interior. 3. Creating New Worksets Since this is a small. Worksets should be subsets of a project that can be worked on independently.Worksets dialog box will appear. one user will work on the development of the exterior. it is better to have them visible by default 3. Un-check the option. Visible by default in 498 . You are given the option to rename the worksets at this time. To enable worksets. To activate the Worksets toolbar. click New. The Project Sharing . typically discrete functional areas. In the Worksets dialog box. The Worksets dialog box will appear. Shared Levels and Grids. A dialog box will appear informing you that you have activated project sharing. Click OK. one will work on furniture placement and the last will work on wall section details. three worksets will be created: Exterior Shell Interior Layout Furniture Layout. choose File and Worksets. A message will appear recommending all users complete this workset tutorial. simple project. Click OK to close the dialog. Choose OK to accept the naming defaults. Since the interior walls appear in many views. and Workset1. choose Window/Toolbar/Worksets from the Menu bar. The next workset you will create is Furniture Layout. the project must be broken up in such a way as to reflect each user’s individual tasks. Click New and enter Furniture Layout as the workset name. Imagining a team of four users. It informs you of the worksets that are created automatically: the Project Standards worksets. 1. 2.

Notice that the Workset Property for this wall is Exterior Shell. Choose OK to close this dialog box. all elements are now in the workset named Exterior Shell. Select one of the interior walls and choose Properties. you will rename the default Workset1 as Exterior Shell. 499 . Choose OK. choose Rename and enter the new name. Rather than create a new workset named Exterior Shell. To do so. click on the name Workset1. You have now created the worksets that are needed.all views. Click on the value for Workset and use the drop down list to change the value to Interior Layout. Elements need to be moved into the appropriate worksets. 2. Subdividing a Project into Worksets When worksets are activated. 4. 5. 5. Notice that by default all the worksets created are open and editable by you. all building elements are placed by default into Workset1. 4. Because furniture should be visible on very few views. Open the Level 1 floor plan view. it improves the performance of the model to have the visibility turned off by default. 3. 1. In this example file. the furniture has not yet been placed. Choose OK to close the Workset dialog box and finalize the changes. therefore the only the Interior Layout elements need to be modified. Choose OK to close the Element Properties box. Since Workset1 has been renamed Exterior Shell. Revit assumes that the user who enables worksets and creates new ones will also want to modify elements in the project to place them in the correct worksets. Pick one of the exterior walls and choose Properties from the options bar.

choose View. Choose Properties. Click OK. Choose Modify and select all the interior building elements as shown. Visibility/Graphics and choose the Workset tab to view the list of worksets. To verify that all interior elements have been transferred to the interior workset. 8. 7.6. 500 . Change the workset property to Interior Layout. To do so. you will turn off the visibility for the Interior Layout workset in this view. It is possible to select multiple elements across different categories and to change their workset property simultaneously.

Choose OK to make the change. In the Save as dialog. This is because the Visible by default in all views option had been toggled off when creating the workset. 2. make sure that the Central file is saved to a network drive and that all team members have access to that drive.rvt. Turn off the Interior Workset by un-checking the box next to it. In the Save as dialog. 11. 1. For the file name enter 01234_Central. choose the Options button. Choose File/Save as to save the project as a Central File. Open the Level 2 floor plan view. (If you are learning worksets outside of a network environment. If any interior elements still remain. 501 . The floor plan should appear with only the exterior shell visible. The Project now has a Central file. Turn the visibility back on for the Interior Layout workset. 12. save the Central file to your hard drive) Click Save.Notice that the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. transfer the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. 9. For the location. give the file a name and directory location. Creating a Central File The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling Worksets. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. change them to the interior workset and they will disappear. 10. where 01234 is the project number and Central indicates that it is the Central File.

Close the Central File by choosing File/Close from the Menu bar. you will relinquish the workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. make sure that one user saves this Central File on the network. 4. From the Open Worksets drop-down list in the bottom right hand corner of the Open dialog box. Select the first workset and drag to select all the worksets. 5. Next. first choose File/Worksets to activate the workset dialog box. Creating a Local File 1. select Specify. To do this. Click Non Editable from the choices on the right. 502 . select Open. Notice that your name is removed from the Edited by column and all of the values for Editable are No. If two users plan to do the Multi-User exercise. 2.Important: The exercise Multi-Users requires that the Central File be saved to a network location that is accessible to two different users. You can also use <Ctrl A> to select all worksets. From the File menu. 3. Choose OK.

In the Save As dialog box. Any worksets that are already editable by you are automatically opened and any worksets that are referenced are opened but hidden.rvt. You have now created a Local File which is for your use only. Select Interior Layout. Only the worksets that are opened will be visible during that session. 5. activate the Worksets toolbar by selecting Window/Toolbar/Worksets. 2. Interior Layout. Select all the worksets and choose Open and click OK. no worksets are being opened because of editability since you did not leave any worksets editable in the last session. choose the Options button and make sure that the Make this the Central Location after save is not checked. 7. A dialog will appear allowing you to choose which worksets you want to open.rvt that you created earlier. Choose OK to close the Worksets dialog. 503 . You have the option at this point to start using the file immediately. Revit will close all worksets that can be closed and allow you to specify which ones to open. Any new building elements will belong to the active workset. The Interior Layout workset is automatically the active workset because it is the only one you have editable. Choose OK to close the options dialog. 6. and choose Editable. If not already active. then click Save. 1. 8. Choose File and Worksets. In this case. Browse to your local hard drive and name the file 01234_User1. You are now ready to modify the Interior Layout workset. For this session you will be working on the Interior Layout. 4. When using the Specify option. Workset Toolbar showing Interior Layout as the active workset 3.3. Open the Central File named 01234_Central. Checking out Worksets The project sharing environment has been designed to give the user the option to choose which worksets will be opened during a working session. Open Floor Plan Level 1. Choose Save As from the File menu.

This means that you can only select elements in your editable worksets. You may now pick the exterior wall. With an exterior wall selected. The properties will appear greyed out as shown. but not possible to modify them in any way. You will now make some changes to the existing walls in the Interior Layout workset. It is possible to look at the element properties. Choose the Modify tool. 6. click Properties. Using the image below as a guide.4. add. 7. The wall will not prehighlight or allow you to select it. 5. Clear the Editable only option. Notice that by default Editable only is selected in the options bar. modify or delete walls and doors to accomplish the encircled changes 504 . A symbol will appear to indicate that it belongs to a non-editable workset. Try to select one of the exterior walls.

This is so that they are released as soon as possible for other users. 3. Minimize the current Autodesk Revit session. Starting a New Session 1. If you are working alone.8. This ensures that worksets are available for other users. choose File/Save to Central from the Menu Bar or choose )on the Toolbar next to the standard Save icon. 2. Simulating the end of a work session. At the end of the work session. The next few steps are designed to help a single user accomplish this. It is recommended that you save your work locally approximately every 30 minutes and save centrally approximately every 1-2 hours. 2. All of the newly created elements will belong to the Active Workset: Interior Layout. Move to the next section if you are working with a partner. Choose File/ Save from the Menu bar. pick one of the new doors and choose Properties from the options bar. relinquish all worksets and choose Save. To Save to Central. Also. the Save to Central icon ( The Save to Central dialog will appear with the path to the Central File already correct. if this is the last save to Central at the end of the day or when you are about to close the file. to save your local copy. To verify this. From the desktop double click the Autodesk Revit icon to start a new session. to publish the changes to the Central file. 1. The Workset Property will be Interior Layout. Multiple Users Working Simultaneously This portion of the exercise is intended to be completed by two people with the Central File accessible through a network connection. Saving Your Work As you work in your Local File. Notice also that the Relinquish View Worksets is by default checked. you must also perform a local save. 4. you should Relinquish all user-created editable worksets as well. 505 . You can also query the workset that an element belongs to by placing your cursor over the element and looking at the status bar in the lower left hand corner. you want to perform regular saves. you may start a second session of Autodesk Revit and run this session as a different user. after saving to central.

User 2: 1. You have now created a Local File which is for your use only. After completing the exercise and closing all session of Revit. 4. Creating a Local Copy In this exercise there will be two users accessing the same project. only User 2 506 3. Once the session is started. . Change the Workset username to a new name (like User 2) as shown. Your username will automatically be entered into the Edited by column. You are working within your own local copy and any changes that you make can be saved back to the Central File. Open the Central File named 01234_Central. If both users have completed the Worksets exercise and created a Central File on a network location.3. Browse to your local hard drive and name the file 01234_User2. In the Save As dialog box. Both users should observe each step of the exercise to observe the different changes. 4. Notice that all the worksets have been opened by you. Click OK to close the Options dialog box. To do this. The instructions will be given in sequence indicating which user should be performing which operations. Check out the Exterior Shell by clicking in the Editable column next to Exterior Shell and changing the value from No to Yes. The Local file which was previously created for the chosen Central file can also continue to be used. choose File/Worksets or click on the Worksets icon to bring up the workset dialog box. This should be changed to you Windows Login name. From now on. A second local file will be created for the additional user. choose Settings and Options from the menu.rvt. Choose OK to complete the check out of the workset. Since User 1 had relinquished all worksets when saving to central. but that none are currently editable. 2. 5. choose one of the Central Files to be used for this exercise. Check out the workset named Exterior Shell. and click Save. the Workset Username will remain as the last name entered (User 2). choose the Options button and make sure that the Make this the Central Location after save is not checked.rvt Choose Save As from the File menu. the user who already had a local file will be referred to as User 1 and the second user who will be creating a new local file will be referred to as User 2.

5. Choose OK to return to the workset dialog box. It is recommended to save the file locally approximately every 30 minutes. Choose File/Save to Central from the Menu Bar or choose the Save to Central icon with the arrow that is to the right of the standard Save icon. Check out the Interior Layout workset. You will now Save to Central. You can save changes locally or centrally. To save locally means that the changes will not be published back to the Central File. To save centrally publishes the changes back to the Central file so that they are accessible to other team members. 4. Choose Save to complete the save to central. A warning stating:"Insert conflicts with wall join. Move the wall as shown. Saving Work You will now save these changes." Choose OK to ignore this message. A warning will appear informing you that you cannot check out this workset since it is already checked out by another user. The Save to Central dialog box will appear. Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 2. You will now make some modifications to the interior layout. Also notice that by default the Active workset has been changed to Interior Layout. Open the Workset dialog box. Notice that your username is filled in the Editable by column. 2.has any worksets editable. Choose OK to close the dialog box. it becomes the active workset by default. User 1: 1. Activate Floor Plan Level 1. 3. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is currently checked out to User2. 507 . User 1: User 1 should still have their local copy open. If only one workset is checked out. 1.

Publish the changes back to the Central File by choosing Save to Central. Revit will give you the option to delete them. A dialog box will appear briefly to inform the user of which worksets will be updated. 1. 2. A number of windows will need to be deleted to make this possible. By saving to central you are both updating the central file with your changes as well as updating your local file with the changes that have been made by other users. You will now make a change to the Exterior Shell of the building.3. 3. 508 . Changes to the Central file only appear in local files when the worksets are explicitly updated. Save the local copy by choosing File/Save. User 2 will now also be able to see the wall which conflicts with the door opening. Move the south wall up approximately 2 meters as shown below. Delete the window next to the door on the South wall and move the door over so that it no longer conflicts. User 2: Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately appear in the User 2 local file. Choose Delete Instance(s) to continue.

Click on the Floor Plan Level 1 in the project browser and right click and select Duplicate. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Choose Cancel. Since you have only made one additional workset editable. you can use the Reload Latest Worksets command. Rename the view to Level 1 Furniture Plan. choose Component and try to place a desk in one of the rooms. 2. Revit prompts you to make that the active workset. Checking out Additional Worksets User 1: 1. Choose File/Reload Latest Worksets from the menu bar. you will first create a new furniture plan view. From the workset dialog. You will now see the changes to the door position made by User2. Click on the Copy of Level 1. Notice that you continue to have access to the Interior Layout Workset. 3. The reason why the desk is invisible is because the active workset is the Furniture Layout and any new modelling elements will belong to that workset. A warning will appear to indicate that the desk that you are trying to place is not visible in that view. Choose File/Save to Central to publish the changes to the Central File. 509 . You will now check out the Furniture Layout workset. make Furniture Layout Editable. Choose Yes. right click and select Rename. Before laying out furniture.4. This means that the visibility for that workset is turned off in all views unless explicitly turned on. Reload latest Worksets To see the modifications that have been saved to central by other users without publishing your own changes. 2. When the Furniture Layout workset was created it was chosen to not be visible by default in all views. You will need turn the workset visibility on for this view. For a workset to be active means that any newly created modelling elements will belong to that workset. From the Basics Design bar. 4. User 1: 1.

it is often possible to make the workset editable on the fly. 2. Choose the option Make Editable. you will be attempting to modify the properties of a wall. Choose to view the Project Standards worksets only. or View Worksets. Revit will let you make that workset editable. 4. Choose OK. Visibility/Graphics. 3. Choose OK to make the change. Expand the Worksets tab and check off the Furniture Layout workset. To turn on the visibility of the Furniture layout workset. Since wall properties are part of the Project Standards. and then Choose OK to make the Wall Type workset editable. Complete the changes to the wall name by choosing OK in both dialogs. Family worksets. Revit has now checked out that workset in your name and made the desired change. open the Visibility dialog by choosing View. 7. 1. Revit will inform you of the workset that you require and give you the option to make it editable. Editable on the Fly If you do not have editability of a workset you wish to modify.5. 510 . Rename the wall to Partition Wall 126mm. Choose Edit/New to access the type properties of the wall. Try to place the desk again. Project Standards worksets. Choose Rename to rename the wall type. Pick one of the interior walls and choose Properties from the options bar. It should now place without any complication. 5. open the Workset dialog box. 6. To verify that you have the Project Standard workset named Wall Types editable. 6. User-Created worksets. there is the option to show only specific types of worksets. User 1: In the next few steps. you cannot change them unless you have the Wall Types project standards workset editable. In the bottom of the dialog. A warning will appear informing you that the action cannot be completed because you do not have the Wall Types workset editable.

Choose File/Save to save the file locally. To do this. a warning will appear informing you that trying to change the editable status at this point will result in the loss of all changes made to the file since the last Save to Central. Choose Ok to exit the dialog. Warning: If you try to change the editable status of a workset to No before Saving to Central.8. After Saving to Central but before closing the Local File. Once work is completed in a given workset. it is highly recommended that users only check out worksets that they are currently working on. It is particularly important to relinquish editability of all worksets before closing the local file. you can also right click on any view or family within the Project Browser and select Make Editable. Tip: When working in a workset enabled project. 511 . Relinquishing Worksets To maximize efficiency. User 2: 1. You will relinquishes all Worksets when you save. choose the Save to Central icon from the Toolbar. This ensures that the worksets are available to other users and prevent cases where a workset is checked out to an absent user. Scroll down to see that the Wall Types Workset has in fact been checked out and opened by you. it is essential that a local save is also performed. Check the User-created Worksets and choose Save. This ensures that Local File is updated with all the latest data from the Central. You will now Save to Central and relinquish all of your worksets. 2. the changes should be saved to central and the workset editability should be relinquished. A user should only relinquish editablity of a workset after they have Saved to Central.

Save locally and exit Revit. Save to Central while relinquishing all worksets.3. User 1: 1. 2. Choose File/Exit to end the Revit session. 512 .

Open Floor Plan: Level 1 and notice that the site shows the footprint outline of three buildings in blue. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. Click Open.rvt.) In this exercise. Model Linking is designed to satisfy specific types of cases such as: A campus plan that contains links to several structures A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area Comparison of alternatives on a site (ie. test options by swapping amongst a group of design alternatives.Model Linking Scope: Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus.0 functionality of Model Linking makes it possible for users to maintain the efficiency of working with a smaller project yet gain the ability to place that project into a larger context. One of the models is a residential townhouse while the other model is a condominium complex with four units. you will learn: Linking Models Controlling Visibility and Graphics Managing Links Linking Models In the following exercise. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. 1. 2. From the Common folder. You will be linking those buildings into the site 513 . select Site. The new Autodesk Revit 5. On a common site plan. a site model will be opened and two different building models will be linked in.

you will be using the Automatically Place: Origin to Origin option 1. This option is grayed The linked document’s center is at the cursor location Note: Although Revit Projects are not based on a coordinate system and do not have an exposed origin location. for the purposes of importing and linking an invisible origin does exist. 514 .rvt to a new directory. you must save the file to a new directory. NOTE: Save the file. Since all exercise files are read-only. Not applicable for linked Revit Files. choose Automatically Place and Origin to Origin. This center will change as the footprint of your model changes. From the positioning options. navigate to the Training\Common folder and select Condo Complex. 2. To do this.Placement Options When Linking in Revit files you will have a number of different placement options: Automatically Place: (Autodesk Revit automatically places the imported geometry) Center-to-Center: Autodesk Revit places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.rvt. In this exercise.) 3. Condo Complex. Link/Import. At Shared Location: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Also note that the center of a Revit model is the center of the model geometry. Cursor at center: The linked document's origin is centered on the cursor. This origin of a Revit model makes it possible to consistently import or link in models to the same location when using the automatically place by origin option. select Save As from the File menu. this option will place the link at a predefined location (see the Shared Coordinates Exercise) Manually Place: (User specifies placement of the linked document using the mouse) Cursor at origin: Cursor at base point: out. Origin-to-Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Autodesk Revit model. RVT… From the Add Link dialog. Choose File. (This exercise requires you to have write permission to the exercise files.

515 . 1. navigate to the Training\Common folder and select Townhouse. (This exercise requires you to have write permission to the exercise files. Moving a Link The standard move commands work with linked models.) 3.4. a model is linked into a project only once. Townhouse. Link/Import. RVT… From the Add Link dialog. In the following steps. 4. Select the linked building and choose Move from the Toolbar. From the positioning options. Since all exercise files are read-only.rvt model will be automatically placed just above the site. NOTE: Save the file. The Condo Complex. The linked model will move as one whole object – similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. choose Automatically Place and Origin to Origin. 2. 2. 1. Copying and Rotating a Link Instance Within Autodesk Revit.rvt. Choose Open to link the model. You may need to zoom in to place the link more precisely.rvt model will be placed approximately at the middle of the site. you will link in a second building model and place it in two different locations on the site. Choose File. you can place as many copies as would like and rotate the model as desired.rvt to a new directory. Move the link as shown. The Townhouse. Choose Open to link the model. Once linked. select Save As from the File menu. To do this. you must save the file to a new directory.

Use the Move command to move the link as shown. In the Options Toolbar enter an angle of –90 degrees and press <ENTER>. Use the Rotate command to rotate the link 90 degrees as shown. 516 . click on the link and choose Rotate from the Toolbar. To do so. Use the Rotate command and the Move command to position the link as shown.5. 8. Use the Copy command to copy the Townhouse link to the right side of the lot. 6. Do not be concerned that the foot print will differ somewhat from the outline in blue. 7.

Positioning a Link in Elevation The building levels within a linked model may be different from those in the active file. Repeat the alignment to align the other Townhouse link. Zoom in on the Townhouse link on the right. The townhouse model. The Townhouse link will be shifted up to properly sit in the site. 1. Note: Although linked models can be used as a reference for alignments and dimensions it is not possible to create constraints to the link. In the next steps.” 5. is too low on the site. Open the South Elevation view 2. choose Align from the Options Bar. for instance. selecting on that lock to try to create a constraint would result in an error message appearing that “Constraints may not be created to linked Autodesk Revit models. Use the Align tool to align the Ground Floor Level of the Townhouse model to the Level 1 of the Site model. you will modify the position of the link so that it sits correctly on the site. 3. 4. A building can therefore be placed to high or too low on a site when linked in. Click on the line for Level 1 and then click on the level line for Ground Floor. What this means is that although a lock symbol appeared in the last step. To do so. Open the default 3D view to observe the placement of the models on the site 517 .

1. and Reference Planes) are being brought across when a RVT model is linked in.rvt branch to activate it. Expand the branch to show the original categories of the linked project. Halftone. choose the keyboard shortcut VV or choose View. you can still control some of the visibility and graphics of the imported instance on a per view basis. Activate the tab for Linked RVT Categories 3. This is due to the fact only the model categories and the datums (Levels. Visibility Visibility controls for the entire link or for the existing categories of the linked model are available to toggle on or off the way you would normally. With the South Elevation view active. Click on the Townhouse. 518 . These controls appear under a new tab called Linked RVT Categories in the Visibility/Graphics dialog when an Autodesk Revit file is imported. Detail Level.Controlling Visibility and Graphics When a Revit Model is linked. 4. From this dialog you can control Visibility. Visibility/Graphics 2. and Display Settings. The entire row should highlight. Note: Notice that none of the annotation categories appear in the branch. Grids. You will now turn off the visibility of the levels from the Townhouse link.

Choose OK to finalize the changes. Also note that since you are changing the properties of all instances of the linked model both copies of the link appear as halftone. Choose VV to activate the Visibility/Graphics dialog again and choose the Linked RVT Categories tab. by changing the setting for the entire link. The drop down list can be used to change the level of detail to Coarse. Choose OK to complete the change.5. You can override the detail level of individual categories by expanding the categories and changing the detail level of the specific category. Toggle on the Halftone toggle for the Townhouse. you are also changing the setting of the individual categories. leave the setting at By View. Open the Floor Plan: Level 1 view. Notice in the floor plan that the entire link appears as halftone. the setting that is applied to the link is automatically applied to all the categories of that link. This means that the detail level of the link is being matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 1. The controls for Halftone are grayed out for the specific categories.rvt link. Detail Level By default the Detail Level for the Townhouse.rvt link is set to By View. Medium or Fine so that the link will display a specified detail level regardless of the detail level of the view. For this exercise. Scroll down to the Levels category and deselect it. 2. Notice that the Townhouse levels are now turned off. Display Settings 519 . Therefore. 3. For this control. Halftone The Halftone option displays the objects at half of their normal darkness. The categories of the link are by default set to match the link setting.

Change this option to Floor Plan: Ground Floor in order to view the ground floor plan of the linked document. This means that the View Range is set to <By current view> . Do not change the Phase Settings. For both of these options you can change the display settings by choosing from the options available in the linked file. choose Manage Links to open up the Manage Links dialog. 1. Each time a project is opened. Click on the drop down list for View Range. 4. there is still a connection to the original linked document. Townhouse. This list includes all of the floor plan views from the original document.rvt.Display Settings allow you to set the View Range and the Phase and Phase Filter information for the link. They inform the user of the status of the linked file. 5. The View Range <By current view> means that the linked model will be displayed according to the view range settings of the current view. Under the Linked RVT Categories tab in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Managing Links When a Revit model is linked into a project. This is particularly useful when a number of buildings are being linked into a sloped site and instead of displaying a cut through all the buildings at the same height. 520 . 3. click on the linkTownhouse. Locations not saved. In addition. View Range is designed to allow the user to specify from existing floor plans in the originating document which view range is to be used in this view. and Saved Path are all read only fields. the fields Loaded. 2. you would like to display the first floor plan of each building. By default the Phase Filter is set to <None>. the linked file is reloaded. Choose OK in both dialogs to finalize the changes. By default the link is set to Automatic. The Automatic setting for Phase is <Last>. Unloading and Reloading Links In the Manage Links dialog. Notice that a button appears under Display Settings that indicates that the current setting is Automatic. 1. This means that it will automatically display the newest phase of the linked document. the user can manage the links from the Manage Links dialog. From Files in the Menu Bar.rvt to activate the row. the Phase is set to Last and no Phase Filters are applied. Click on Automatic to activate the Display Settings dialog.

choose Unload to unload the Condo Complex link. Activate the tab for RVT.2. Click on the name of the Condo Complex link to highlight the row. 521 . From the lower section of the dialog. 4. 3. Choose Zoom to fit to view the entire Floor Plan: Level 1 view. 6. Notice that the checkmark for Loaded is automatically deselected 5. Notice that the Condo Complex link no longer appears. Choose OK to complete the change.

This will open the same dialog as the usual Open Worksets dialog. it is preferable to use a relative path over an absolute path. Linking to Multiple Files 522 .rvt making sure to save the file in the same folder as the the Condo Complex and the Townhouse links. 8. if you want to remove a link entirely. Absolute paths are useful for cases in which the linked file is made available on a network location to multiple different users. To do this. you can use Specify from the Open dialog to select which worksets you would like to link in. you can choose between a relative or absolute path. the Save Locations is not applicable. It is also possible that the project that is hosting the link is also a workset activated file. you can use Reload From… to navigate to the new location. Model Linking with Worksets In some cases it may happen that the buildings that are being linked are multi-user projects with worksets activated.. Selective Open of Worksets When linking in a workset activated file. As links are moved to new locations in the project. This model will be needed for the Shared Coordinates exercise. use the Manage Links dialog to Reload From… In the Open dialog. you can use the Save Locations button to save the new locations so that they are remembered by the linked file. In a Shared Coordinate environment. 9.. the link is broken. Saving Locations The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links whose coordinates are shared with the active project. you can choose specify and specify different worksets to link./Links/linkedfile. Select the Condo Complex row and choose Reload to reload the Condo Complex Note: If the linked file location has changed. The worksets you choose to open will be the worksets that are linked into the Host file. the link is maintained.rvt An example of a relative path is . Autodesk Revit tries to find the linked model in that exact directory before you moved it.rvt In general. Linked File Paths Files that linked into a project can be linked through a Relative Path or an Absolute Path. An example of an absolute path is C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit\Links\linkedfile. the changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than within the project that it is linked into. you can select a link and choose Remove. The default is Relative. If you are using a relative path and you move the project and the linked model together to a new directory. The new working directory becomes the relative path for the linked model. If you use an absolute path and you move the project and the linked model to a new directory. Manage Links and activate the RVT tab. Save the file as Site_Project. In these cases there are a number of different issues to keep in mind. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets that were not originally specified or you may want certain worksets to no longer be linked. Changing the Linked Worksets While working in a host file. Since the links in this exercise are not using Shared Coordinates. See the Shared Coordinates exercise for more details. Also.7./. Under the Path Type column. Choose File.

the Link Symbol and the Link Instance. Link instances can be assigned to different worksets if desired. However. it is advised to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. however. The user who establishes the first link determine the status for all other files. However. Therefore. in a workset activated Host it is possible to choose which links will be loaded upon opening. both the Link Symbol and the Link instance are placed in the active workset.Although the same model can be linked into different host models. Links consist of two “parts” . Tip: When opening a Host file. In general. you can choose to not load the link. by not opening the Link Instance workset. At the time of placement. 523 . all linked files are loaded automatically. A link is only loaded if the workset that the Link Instance is in is opened. the selection of worksets that are opened must be identical in each host. the user must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Workset Activated Host Files When the Host file has worksets activated.

since designing in Revit does not require a coordinate system. Also. click here: Model Linking Exercise. One particular case in which you may want to acquire coordinates from a linked file is when the link is a dwg with an established coordinate system that you would like to use for your project. (Note: If you have not completed the Model Linking exercise.Shared Coordinates Scope: This exercise will cover how to Share Coordinates between files so that buildings can be correctly located with respect to each other. In other words. from now on the file that is linked into another file will be referred to as the Linked File and the file into which another file (or files ) is linked will be referred to as the Host File. Open the file. do so now and then return to this point. by subsequently moving the link. you will publish the coordinates from a site model Host File to two different buildings that are linked to that site. Note: In order to complete this exercise. you must first complete the Model Linking exercise. you are establishing a shared origin point. In the following steps. This means that there are two different coordinate systems within the same project. the two origins are temporarily aligned. This action actually changes the original linked file so that it’s internal coordinate system matches the Host file. In other words. the linked file has a location it defines as its origin and the Host file has a different location it defines as the origin. the linked model still retains its original coordinate system. Site_Project. During normal project work. Publish Coordinates means to send the Host’s coordinates to the Linked file. the origins are no longer aligned. When a model is initially linked into another project. you are deciding which coordinate system will be the one that is used by both files.rvt which was saved at the end of the Model Linking exercise. Shared Coordinates works in conjunction with Model Linking allowing the user to create multiple locations for the same building on a site. Note: For clarity. When linking a model using the “origin to origin” placement option. To proceed to the Model Linking exercise. This is what makes it possible to import objects using the “origin to origin” option. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates When a file is linked into a Host the user has the choice to either use the Linked File’s coordinates or use the Host file’s coordinates. By Sharing Coordinates. In this way. However. all the linked buildings would be getting their positions with respect to the site. 1. To Acquire Coordinates means that the Host File acquires the coordinates of the specified linked file. It is generally recommended that if the project involves a site and a linked building (or buildings) that the coordinates of the Site are chosen to be shared. When a Host file is open. these internal coordinates are not significant to the user.) 524 . In this exercise you will learn: Sharing Coordinates Locations Relocating a Project Rotating a Project and Assigning True North Working in a Linked File Sharing Coordinates Every Autodesk Revit project has invisible internal coordinates.

rvt and Condo Complex. Until Coordinates are shared between the link and the host. (This is the building in the middle) A dialog will appear prompting you to select a location. An example of a Linked file with many Locations is a prototype model of a 525 .This site file is the Host file for the Linked files Townhouse. Locations 8. Locations When a Revit Model is linked into a Host. Until you choose Modify. Linked files using Shared Coordinates must have at least one defined location but can have multiple locations. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked file. Publish Coordinates from the Menubar. Click on the Condo Complex. Note: To Acquire Coordinates from a linked file. Locations and Coordinates. 4. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. choose Tools. and Coordinates. 5. Choose Location 1 and choose OK.rvt 2. Choose Modify to exit out of the Publish Coordinates tool. this location is not saved outside of the host model. Location 1 of the Condo Complex now shares coordinates with the Host file. This location is defined as being some specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Acquire Coordinates and the select the linked model that you would like to acquire from. 7. Autodesk Revit will be waiting for additional links to be selected to Publish Coordinates to. Revit is now waiting for you to select the model that you would like to Publish Coordinates to. However. 6. Keep in mind that each copy of a link is a distinct option. 3. it is placed at a location. For this example we will not use this option. Choose Tools.rvt link.

Change the name of the location by clicking Change. Lot B. and Lot C. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. You need to reconcile the coordinates only once. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical building on a site.house that is placed on 3 different lots. Note: When dealing with linked files. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. By default this location is named Location 1. Since this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the Host and the linked models. it is important to understand that the Active Location is the location whose sub-elements can be manipulated. 5. it is the location that is live and modifiable.rvt link on the left. Choose Record current position as. 2. Specifying a Location 1. The linked model's position in the host model will be saved to a location name in the linked model file. Choose Properties to open the Element Properties for the Link. click on the Townhouse. 6.. In other words. Each of the locations can then be saved within the Linked file for reference. 526 . 7.. 3. You will now change the name of the location. Click the <Not Shared> button. a dialog box appears that tells you need to reconcile the coordinates. These three Locations can be named Lot A. In the Floor plan: Level 1 view. Rename Location 1 to Lot A. Notice that the default setting Shared Location for a link whose coordinates are not yet shared is <Not Shared> 4.

Click OK to close the Location dialog. This indicates that it is prohibited to 527 .rvt: Lot A (inuse) Notice that the OK button is grayed out. 8. Once a link instance is assigned a shared location. 3. This is due to the fact that the coordinates for the linked file have already been shared. 2. It is only necessary to reconcile with a Linked File once. Notice that the options to Acquire or Publish Coordinates no longer appears. Click on the linked Townhouse model on the right. then changing the position of the instance can effect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. Choose Move instance to: Townhouse. you have two choices: Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use Record the current position as a location Note: When recording the current position as a location you can either redefine an existing location or create a new location 1. Constraining a Link to a Location When a link instance is constrained to a specified location this means that there is a connection between the position of the linked instance and the definition of the location. This will bring up the Choose Location dialog. Click OK to close the element properties dialog. When constraining a Link to a location. Choose Properties and click on the <Not Shared> button.

8. Select the second option to Record the current position as “Townhouse. Choose File. 5. 6. You now have two different locations for the Townhouse. (Note: If you attempt to close a Host file without saving Location changes to Linked Files.rvt: Lot A (in use)”.) 1. Notice that OK is still grayed out. Manage Links and expand the RVT tab The read only field for the Townhouse link shows that Locations have not been saved. it is not possible to redefine its location. Choose Change to change to a new location name Choose New and create a new location named Lot B and choose OK Choose OK to close the Choose Location dialog.move a new instance to a location where there is already a link placed. you will be prompted to save your changes. 4. 2. 528 . Note that the Shared Location now reads Lot B. To explicitly Save a Location you must use the Manage Links dialog. Because Lot A is actually in use.rvt link – Lot A and Lot B. 7. Saving a Location When a location is created it is not automatically saved within the Linked File. This indicates that changes have been made to locations that have not been saved to the linked file. Choose OK to finalize the changes and close the Element Properties dialog box.

it will appear as though all of the linked files are moving. You are given the opportunity to save the new location definition to make the change in the position permanent. 4. Click on the Link at Lot B on the right hand side. by rotating a project. 1. Click once on the floor plan to indicate a “from” position and click a second time to indicate the “to” position. you are also assigning a True North to the project. 2. Rotate this Project/True North 529 . 20 feet. Click to activate the Townhouse. This will cancel the Move of the link. A dialog appears explaining what is about to happen and how the command behaves. You will asked whether or not you want to save the linked file. Choose OK. Choose Tools. The Locations not Saved box will now be cleared. Everything except the active project will move along the path you just defined. Once again. Choose Tools. Relocating a Project This tool allows you to easily move an entire project with respect to all of the linked files that are shared with it.3. 7. 5. Locations and Coordinates. you can place True north at an angle to Project North. A warning will appear explaining that you are making changes to a Location that has been saved. the Active Location will remain stationary while everything else appears to rotate. Choose Save. Choose Cancel. Choose Undo to undo the relocation of the project. Choose OK to close the dialog. 8. By relocating a project what you are effectively doing is moving the origin of the shared coordinates 1. In addition to rotating the project. Rotating a Project and Assigning True North This tool works similarly to the Relocate this Project tool. 6. 3. Although it is the Active Location position that is relocating. Move the link over approx. 4. Locations and Coordinates. Relocate this Project. While the Project North for any Revit Project is up.rvt row Choose Save Locations. 9.

1. the user can select which of the defined locations is the Active Location that they would like to be working on.rvt file that was previously linked into the Site_Project. Note: In the following section you will be working in one of the linked files.rvt from the directory in which you saved it earlier.rvt file. if other models were linked into the same host. Choose OK. you have just closed the Site_Project. Opening a Linked File In this section. Choose File. 4. 3. Close the Site_Project. Since it is not permitted to have both the Host and the Linked file open in the same session of Revit. Everything except the active project will rotate along the path you just defined.rvt file If you need to work simultaneously. Choose Save. the Linked File will contain information about its location with respect to the host. You will be asked if you want to save the location changes to the Condo Complex link since you have not done so yet. you can open two separate session of Revit. Working in a Linked File Once a file has been linked into a host and their coordinates are shared. the user could link them in and have them retain their correct position. 5. you will be opening the Townhouse. Choose Undo to undo the rotation of the project. Click once on the floor plan to indicate a “from” angle and click a second time to indicate the “to” angle. A dialog appears explaining what is about to happen and how the command behaves. Open the file. When opening the Linked File. Next. 6. on a Host and its link. Also.rvt project.2. you will link in the Condo Complex to observe the positioning behavior. 530 . Save to save the changes to the model. Townhouse.

the front of the building was facing the top. 4. this linked model continues to be oriented in this view to its own Project North. RVT and navigate to the Condo Complex. From the positioning options. Choose File. Although the model was linked into the Site_Project. choose At Shared Location. This will place the building in the same position as it was in the Site file.Note: When this model was built. Import/Link. 3. You will now link in the Condo Complex building.rvt file and rotated.rvt file that you saved previously. Select Location 1 and choose OK. Since this building had only one location on the site. 2. there is only one to sect. A dialog will appear allowing you to chose which location you would like to place. 531 .

the Condo Link has repositioned itself as though the Townhouse were in the Lot B location Managing Locations The Manage Locations tool allows you to quickly create new location names. 2. To change the current position. or to rename existing ones. Locations and Coordinates.Notice that the Condo building is positioned relative to the Active Location of the Townhouse model. To change the active location of the Townhouse choose Tools. These new locations can later be assigned in the Host file. Select Locations Notice that the Current position is Lot A. Manage Locations 532 . 3. click on Lot B and choose OK 4. The location names will appear in the list when constraining a link to a location. Choose Tools. Locations and Coordinates. Selecting the Active Location 1. The current active location is Lot A. Notice that although the active location appears to have not moved. 1.

Click on any point off of the model. 533 . When the coordinates were published from the Host file to the Linked file earlier in the exercise. View Properties and scroll down to the Orientation parameter. True North While working. the origin that was shared to all the projects was the origin of the Site_Project file. You may need to Zoom to fit to view the model. Choose View. Report Shared Coordinates This feature allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. The cursor will change to a tape measure pointer. 2. The coordinates will appear in the Options bar. the linked file inherited the True North of the Host file. 1. These coordinates are with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Locations and Coordinates. Use the drop down to change the selection from Project North to True North. Notice how the orientation of the model is modified to match the Site. In this case. 2.rvt model orientation.2. Report Shared Coordinates. 1. Create a new location by selecting Duplicate and entering the name Lot C. you can choose to orient a view either by the Project North or by the True North. Choose Tools.

Press Cancel to close the property dialog. 2. Choose View and View Properties from the menu to see the view phasing properties. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog.rvt. To view this. In this exercise. 1. Choose Cancel to close the dialog. you will learn how to use the phasing tools to demolish a portion of the existing design and display new construction. select Phasing. 534 . The floor plan view of Level 1 is shown below. When a new project is created there two phases created called Existing and New Construction. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. select any of the existing objects and choose . Each view also has a property relating to the phases of the project. This allows users to document existing. temporary and new conditions. From the Common folder.Phasing Autodesk Revit offers phase representation on views and elements. Click Open. All of the objects created to this point have a parameter called Phase Created set to New Construction and a parameter called Phase Demolished set to None. demolished.

535 2.Demo. This is called a graphic override. choose No. Rename the new view Level 1 . The phase for all of the existing building object will be set to Existing.Existing view and choose Duplicate. In the Project Browser.Demo will show all of the existing geometry as gray since the Phase of the view is set to New Construction and geometry was created in the earlier phase called Existing. Right click on the Floor Plan Level 1 from the project browser and choose Rename. Choose the Properties button from the options bar and set the Phase created to Existing and choose OK.Existing. Defining the Views We will define anew view for this floor plan by copying the existing floor plan view. The view Floor Plan Level 1 . Change the name to Level 1 . 3. 2. Annotation objects do not have phase parameter and will be excluded from the selection set.Existing and Properties from the menu. 4. The new view will represent our new construction and demo plans. We will address this next. 3. Next choose Filter from the options bar. unselect Door Tags and choose OK. Copy the Floor Plan view Level 1 . Choose Modify and select all of the building objects by using a pick box. The display of the walls and doors will now appear gray due to the phase and phase filter of the current view. From the filter dialog. The current view will be renamed.Setting the Existing Conditions 1.Existing. 1. . Set the parameter Phase to Existing and choose OK. When prompted to rename the level associated with this view. From the project browser. right click on the Level 1 . The display of the walls and doors will no longer be grayed out. right-click Level 1 .

2. select the three walls in the upper left corner of the building and then select the two walls on the right. Demolishing Objects One way to set the Phase Demolished parameter for an object is through the use of the Demolish tool. We will use all of the default settings. and temporary components. Existing and Temporary objects will be drawn using a graphic override. 5. A new phase will be added. Do not close this dialog box. 1.Define Filters Phase filters set the display for new. existing. all New. The filter values for the new phase will be changed. 3. Rename this filter from Filter 1 to Composite Plan. 1. 2. Choose Settings\Phases from the menu. From the Phasing dialog. The cursor will change to a hammer 2. demolished. 1. From the Phasing dialog box select the Phase Filters tab to display the current filters. 536 . 3.Demo. Graphic Overrides You define overrides to change the appearance of elements in views with phase filters. Open Floor Plan: Level 1 . Choose from the Phasing dialog to complete the changes to phase settings. from the Phasing dialog box. This means when this filter is applied to a view. The display of the walls should change . Choose Demolish from the Tools menu. When using an override the line weight. select the Graphic Overrides tab to display the current graphic overrides. line patter and even material of the object is overridden. Change the display for New object from By Category to Overridden. A new phase filter will be created for this project. color. Choose filter is created named Filter 1. A new 4. Demolished. Using the hammer.

537 . Since the door is hosted by a demolished wall. New walls and doors will be added to the model. Add some doors to the rooms. Notice the demolished objects are not visible in the view. Next the new walls will be added.to a dashed line as shown. The exact position is not important. Choose Walls and sketch walls as shown below.Existing. 3. the door is also demolished.Demo and right click in the view and select View Properties. Choose and select any door from the type selection list and place approximately as shown. Open the original floor plan. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 3. Notice that the display is unchanged. New Construction 1. Before this is done we will set the Phase Filter so only the existing and new objects are shown. Level 1 . Open the Floor Plan view Level 1 . 4. 2. Next set the view's Phase Filter from Show All to Show Previous + New. This is because this view's Phase is set to show objects in the phase Existing.

Change the Phase Filter for the floor plan Level 1 . The new filter should change the view as shown. Since the new construction and demolished objects overlap. or ceilings.Existing. Note: When demolishing inserts in walls. Set the Phase Filter for the new view to Show Previous + New. Notice this view is still showing the objects we had demolished and does not display the new walls or doors.Demo and change the Phase Filter to Composite Plan. 7. Choose View and View Properties or right click in the view and select View Properties to access dialog box. 9. if you demolish a window.New. Next copy the view Level 1 .Demo to Show Previous + Demo. we will define a new view just to display the new construction. 6. 538 . Open the floor plan view Level 1 . rename it to Level 1 . roofs. The three view should appear as shown below.Demo by right clicking in the project browser and select Duplicate. 8. Level 1 . the wall will automatically fill in the opening. floors.5. Next. the host element will automatically infill in the opening left behind by the demolished element. Open the floor plan view. For example.

539 .This condition requires that view phase be set appropriately.

Creating the shell geometry. Massing geometry is easily created using extrude. Choose File. Creating an extruded cut. activate the East elevation view. Before extruding. In the following exercise. Users can quickly manipulate and modify the overall masses of a project to experiment with different ideas. Using equal dimensions. set up additional levels. Modifying the shell geometry. Creating Massing Geometry In this exercise you will learn how to create and modify different types of massing geometry. New. rotate and sweep commands. Create a new project. and Project to open the New Project dialogue box. Users can switch back and forth between the Show Mass view and the Show Shell view at any time to make required modifications. Accept the defaults and choose to create a new empty project. Setting up the mass/shell settings. floors and roofs. Creating solid extruded geometry. The massing can then be automatically converted into usable shell elements: walls. With the Project browser. Setting up Levels 1. blend. Creating a sweep cut. 540 . you will learn the following concepts: Creating a massing project. Creating Levels. 2. 1.Massing Massing allows users in the initial design process to convey a potential design without the level of detail normally found in a project. Material can also be removed using the "cut" versions of these same four commands.

To do so. Choose the button from the Basics Design Bar. activate it by right clicking over the design bar area and choosing Massing from the pop up menu. 3. Creating a Simple Extruded Mass 1. If the Massing tab is not active. Add Level 4 and Level 5 in the same way. Choose the Massing tab on the Design Bar. Complete the insertion of the new level by pressing the left mouse button again as shown. Then pick the level that needs to be modified. You may now select and edit the temporary dimension for that level. Indicate the start point for the addition of Level 3 by pressing the left mouse button above Level 2 as shown. choose the the Design Bar. It may be necessary to edit the distance between levels button from after they have been inserted.2. Each level should be placed 4000mm above the previous level. 4. Your Design Bar should look like this: 541 .

the massing options will be set. If not already active. The Mass/Shell dialogue box will appear. select Set Work Plane. 3.2. Click on the Extrude option and select OK.. Click OK. 5. From the Menu Bar. choose the Show Mass button to turn on the visibility of massing geometry. 4. Mass/Shell. 6. If you are not prompted. Note: You can also choose the Show Mass command from the View menu. Select from the Design Bar. 542 . The Form dialog box will appear. Open Floor Plan: Level 1.. Before creating the massing. Choose Name and select Level 1 from the drop-down list. from the Design Bar. use Settings.

The settings must be changed to the required types before a mass is extruded. Choose the Lines tool to draw the following sketch. 12. 1. By default it is called {3D}. Activate the East elevation view. then choose the button from the toolbar to allow you to rotate the view. change the wall type from Basic Wall : Generic 200mm to Basic Wall : Generic .This dialogue box allows the user to decide the wall type. 8. 543 . Select the button from the Options Bar to roughly sketch the extrusion profile. 7. 13.300mm. Select the button from the toolbar to generate a 3D view. double click on 3D Views to reveal the name of the new view you have just created. Modifying an Extrusion We will now modify the height of the extrusion we have just created. Adjust your view until it approximately matches the one below. the floor type and the roof type that will be generated when the massing is later converted into a shell. Select the button to complete the extrusion. In the Project Browser. 11. hold down the left mouse button while pressing the shift key and slowly move the cursor around the screen. Temporary dimensions may need to be edited to match those below. Select to make the change. let go of the shift key and depress the left mouse button. To pan around the view. Rename it south/east. Using the drop-down menu. (To rotate the view. Use the right mouse button to activate the pop-up menu which gives you the choice to rename the view.

If necessary. This is the default height for the extrusion. 2. 7. place the cursor over one of the edges of the box and press the <Tab> key until the entire box prehighlights and the status bar on the bottom left of the window indicates Extrusion. 5. Select the button from the Options Bar to edit the properties of the extrusion. move the level lines so the symbols are to the right of the extrusion. You will change this height to 16000mm. 6. The Extrusion is now 16m high. The <Tab> key allows you to toggle through all the possible choices. and press . 544 . 4. With the extrusion prehighlighted. Notice that the top of the extruded shape is only 5000mm high. To pre-select the entire extrusion. Change the value for Extrusion End from 5000 mm to 16000 mm. Note: You can also directly modify the Depth value in the Options Bar. Select the button from the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialogue box will appear. use the left mouse button to actually select the extrusion. 3.

The Depth edit box appears in the Options Bar as soon as you finish drawing the lines for the profile. 7. we will add one starting from Level 5 that is 3500mm high. button and choose the Pick a Plane option then click You will now pick the plane from which you wish to extrude a mass. Choose . Do not worry about the precise dimensions. Select the . Next we will extrude a shape from the south face of the building. While still in the 3D southeast view. 1. Select the Select Plane. Change the value to read 3500mm. 4. 3. 5. Activate the Level 5 Floor Plan.Adding Extrusions We will now add other extruded masses to the first one. Choose to finish drawing the extrusion. button and choose 2. 3. 545 . 1. Choose button from the Design Bar and accept Extrude as the form. select the Extrude. Activate the 3D south/east view to look at the massing model. First. Pick with the left mouse button. 2. from the Design Bar and choose Level 5 as the active Work . Use the Lines tool with the Chain command checked from the Options Bar to roughly draw the following profile. 6. Pre-select the south face by moving the mouse until the cursor is over the edge of the wall and the south face prehighlights.

8. Change the Extrusion End to 4000 mm and then choose . Choose to complete the extrusion. 5. Activate the 3D south/east view to view the extruded massing. 5. Draw the following profile. 6. 546 . 7. Select the Extrusion Properties button from the Design Bar. Activate the South elevation view to draw the extrusion profile. This will open the Element Properties Dialog Box.4.

. 1. Select . Pick with the left mouse button. Activate the Floor Plan Level 3 view from the Project Browser. Use the <Tab> key to toggle through the possibilities until the orange cut extrusion shape appears. 2. 5. Choose to complete the extrusion. • Notice that a block has been removed from the south-east corner of the extruded mass. 3. 547 . Modifying the Extrusion Cut Although not immediately visible on the screen. Next we will see how to create shapes which remove material from the solid geometry. We will now edit the cut extrusion we have just generated so that it is 8000mm high instead of 4000mm high. 6. Activate the south/east Elevation view. We have just seen how to create adding geometry. Make sure that the corner lines snap to those previously drawn in the extrusion.Cutting Using Massing Geometry Massing shapes can be defined as either adding or removing. 4. The cut extrusion starts at Level 3 and ends at Level 4. the cut extrusion can still be edited after its creation. place the mouse pointer over one of the exterior edges where the solid has been cut. Creating an Extrusion Cut 1. from the Design Bar and accept the extrude option and choose Use Lines to draw a 3000 x 3000mm square at the bottom right hand corner of the greyed extruded mass as shown below. With the 3D south /east view activated. Select and choose Level 3 as the New Work Plane.

The cut extrusion now extends to Level 4. it removes a sweep out of any solid geometry. Notice that the profile plane is automatically sketched in. choose Pick instead of Draw in the 6. The Go To View dialogue box opens immediately. 3.2. 548 . Pick the two lines shown below. Select Level 4 as your Work Plane. select Work Plane. the views offered in the Go To View dialogue box will be different. 1. Activate the Floor Plan Level 4 view.. 3. and with Lines selected. Zoom in Region to zoom in around the bottom right corner of the extrusion. Use View. 2. 8. Change the Depth value in the Options Bar from 4000mm to 8000mm. Zoom. You will now cut a simple sweep out of the previously generated mass. Note: Depending on which line is picked first. From the Tools menu. 4. 7. Creating a Sweep Cut A sweep is a tool that allows you to sketch a profile (shape) and extrude that profile along a defined path.. Choose Options bar.. The Sweep Cut command works in the same way except that instead of adding material to a model. Choose Choose to sketch the sweep profile. Set Work Plane. This will change the plane on which the profile will be sketched. 5. Select from the Design Bar and choose Sweep. Choose .

9. Select the Elevation:East view and choose view. Sketch a 4000mm x 4000mm profile whose bottom left corner coincides with the target marking the location of the path as shown: 11.into walls.into floors 549 . Changing From Massing Elements to Shell Elements Once the massing elements are complete. Open the 3D south/east view to view the Sweep Cut. (Such that wall centrelines are coincident with massing faces). 12. Choose and to complete the Sweep Cut. Use Lines and change the option in the Option Bar back to Draw. Your screen should appear like this: to switch to the East elevation 10. • Downward-oriented horizontal planes. Revit can convert all the faces of the massing shape into individual elements: • Vertical faces .

Select again to show the shell in this view. 1. Zoom to Fit. You may need to use View.into roofs. Zoom. In the Design Bar select to see the shell elements in the model 2. 550 . By default. Activate the Floor Plan Level 1 View. 3. Select and dimension from the centreline of the west wall to the centreline of each window then to the centreline of the east wall as shown: 7. Zoom in on the bottom wall. these shell elements are initially locked to the massing elements that generated them. You will be adding window components to this wall. 6. we will view the shell elements and add windows to the south wall. Activate the 3D south/east view to see the windows added to the south wall of the building. 5. Add 10 M_Fixed: 900 x 1200mm windows roughly evenly spaced along the bottom wall. 4. Viewing and Adding Components to the Shell In this exercise. Notice that the Level 1 view still shows the mass instead of the shell. Pick the dimension lines. select .• Everything else . Use the left mouse button to change the so that the windows are evenly spaced symbol to 8. Under the Basics tab in the Design Bar. This is because the view status of each view is independent of the others.

Use View. 2. • 5. Zoom in region to zoom in on the corner of the wall.Modifying the Shell Elements Before generating the original rectangular extrusion. Zoom. 551 .300mm. 1. In the following exercise. Activate the Floor plan Level 3 View to view the shell elements. 7. Use the <Tab> key until the status bar in the lower left corner displays Curtain Panel:System Panel. With the left mouse button. You selected the walls to be Basic Wall : Generic 300mm. Mass/Shell to select the shell element types that the mass would be converted to. Select the wall of the overhang extrusion. pick the panel of the curtain wall. 4. Notice in the Options Bar that the wall type is Basic Wall : Generic . Select 3. Use the drop-down menu to change the wall type to Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Under the Massing Tab. you used Settings. you will change one of the walls into a curtain wall. 6.

552 . Pick the south wall. If not already selected. Select . Activate the Floor Plan Level 1 View.8. use View. Notice that a locked symbol appears. From the Menu Bar. In the following exercise you will see how the properties of a shell element can be modified to make it independent from the massing elements. 4. 9. 2. 1. Shading to see a shaded view which shows the glass panel wall. 10. 3. Activate the 3D View south/east in the Project Browser. select . Unlocking Individual Shell Elements By default the shell elements are locked to the massing elements which generated them. From the Options Bar use the pull-down menu to change the type from System Panel to M_Glazed Panel. Under the Edit menu select Unlock Objects.

9. Select Choose to close the warning box. This wall is now completely independent from the massing elements. 12.5. Place the cursor over the south wall until the wall and windows prehighlight. The following warning appears: • This warning suggests two unlocking possibilities. from the Options bar. The Element Properties dialogue box will appear: 10. Select the button. You will now try the first. Notice that the south wall with the windows is now available despite being in the Massing View mode. You will change the "Constrain to Massing" property. Change the Constrain to Massing property to Independent using the pull-down menu and select . 553 . 8. 11. Activate the south/east 3D view. 7.

3.) Deleting the massing elements unlocks the shell elements and enables the user to move and modify them in the same way as normal walls. the drawing automatically shows only the shell elements. make sure Select . Prehighlight the massing by placing the mouse over the one of the exterior edges and toggling through the options with the <Tab> key until the entire massing outline prehighlights and the Status Bar reads "Massing". (Once the massing is deleted however. it is possible to delete all the massing elements. Within the south/east 3D view .Unlocking All The Shell Elements Once you are completely satisfied with the massing that you have created. Pick the massing using the left mouse button. floors and roofs. 554 . 1. Notice that once the massing is deleted. 4. Delete to delete the entire massing. 2. it will no longer be possible to return to the massing forms at a later point to edit them. Use Edit. is selected. In this exercise you will delete the massing from the massing view and unlock the shell elements so that they are free for modification.

From the Site tab of the Design Bar. 8. controls.S. imperial template. The Point tool is used to create a series of points at various elevations to create the site surface. 555 . choose Toposurface. and schedule components for your building model using the new Site tools. Site from the Menu bar. 4. 5.Using Site Tools In this exercise. Continue to pick points around the screen in a circular fashion. 2. 1. You will learn how to use the following tools. use the TopoSurface tool. 7. tag. The following steps assume the use of the Default U. 3. controls. Select the Point tool from the Design bar. Within the View Window. Change the Elevation parameter to 20'-0" and create another series of points inside the first boundary. as well as place. click to place points on the Site view. After the third point is picked a 'boundary' is created between the points and back to the first point. and features: Toposurface • Pick Points • Import Data Property Line Contour Visibility Split Surface Building Pad Graded Region Parking Component Placing Objects on a Site Surface Tagging Site and Parking components Parking Space Schedules Creating TopoSurface (Pick Points) In the first part of this exercise. On the Toposurface Design bar is a tool called Point. Pick about 30 or so points to make a large oval site about 100' wide. and features. Set the Elevation parameter on the Option bar to 10'-0" and press <Enter>. This allows you to define a series of points which are used to define a surface. you will learn how to create and edit site geometry. Then set the other parameter field to Absolute Elevation. When you pick this tool. Design Bar. To create topography geometry from scratch. Autodesk Revit places you in sketch mode with a new Toposurface Design bar. components. Open the floor plan view Site. The Site Design bar can be activated by picking: Window. The Site tools can be found in either the Menu Bar labeled Site or the Site Design Bar. you will create a TopoSurface using the pick points method. Start by creating a new Autodesk Revit project.. 6.

Even one point a fraction of an inch higher than 30'-0" will generate the 30'-0" contour. 40'-0". In this part of the exercise. For the contour lines to be automatically drawn the toposurface must pass through the contour elevation. Open a 3D view and shade the model. or . 12. Click OK. Repeat this step for 30'-0". Open a new Revit project file. The sketch should look similar to the sketch below. you will import a site plan from a dwg file 1.S. 50'-0". Notice that both the Surface Area and the Projected Area are reported. 14. but the 30'-0" contour is not yet visible. select Properties. This is because there are no elevation points higher than 30'-0" and the highest point on the toposurface only goes up to 30'0" and not passed it. 10. 2. 15.dgn formats. Creating TopoSurface (Import Data) You can generate a Toposurface automatically by using site data created in another application by importing 3D contour data in .dwg. To change the contour line interval go to Settings. Site Settings on the Menu bar. and 60'-0" elevations. Open the South Elevation view. 11. The file can now be closed or saved for later review. 30'-0" elevation points are being drawn. The Surface Area accounts for changes in topography.9. The following steps assume the use of the Default U. The levels will be renamed and set to the correct elevation. For the 30'-0" contour to be automatically generated the toposurface must have a elevation point higher than 30'-0". The Projected Area is the area of the topography's footprint. For example. dxf. Both can be scheduled. The site surface should look similar to the image below. 556 . Select the toposurface and from the Options Bar. imperial template. Change the additional contour line increment to 5'-0" and press OK. As the points are placed Revit automatically generates contour lines. Pick the Finish Surface button on the Design bar. 13.

Import\Link. DWG. Importing Site Data 1. Select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Choose Open to place the site. DXF.dwg data in the Site view to generate the Toposurface. Note: When prompted to rename corresponding views. From the Common folder. To import the site data. DGN. Choose OK to continue. The elevation symbols will be turned off to simplify the display. 5. 7.0". To make sure the imported data is not accidentally moved. Revit will analyze the imported 3D contour data and place a series of points at the same elevations of these imported lines and then generate a toposurface based on 6. 557 . 2. 4. Choose Modify and select Level 2. Pick the imported . 4. choose yes. Uncheck layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark and pick OK. change the name of Level 2 to Basement. From the Site Design bar pick the TopoSurface tool and then pick the Use Imported tool from the Toposurface Design bar. choose File.3. Revit will display a dialog box asking for what layers to analyze for 3D data.dwg. Also. Chose Preserve Colors and Current View Only from the Import dialog box. select import_site. Open the Site floor plan. Modify the elevation of Level 2 to be 3' . pick the imported data and choose Lock Objects from the Edit menu. Modify the name of Level 1 to be Base Site Elevation. Choose Visibility/Graphics from the View menu. 3. Open the Annotations tab and uncheck Elevations.

Pick the Insert botton 4 times to create 4 rows in the Property Lines dialog box. 4.these points. Pick the Property Line tool from the Site Design bar. 350'-0"S 0°0'0" E 2. 6. Next place the property line by picking the point at the benchmark. enter the following values: 1. Pick OK to finish the property line. Visibility/Graphics (or typing V V) and unchecking import_site. Choose "Create property lines by table of distances & bearings" and pick OK. 1. If needed. 350'-0" N 0°0'0" E 4. 2.dwg under the Imported objects tab. Pick Finish Surface from the Design bar. 275'-0" N 90°0'0" W 3. To better see the Toposurface turn off the visibility of the imported data by going to View. 275'-0" N 90°0'0" E If all the data was correctly entered. place the property line close to the benchmark and use the Move tool to snap the property line exactly to the benchmark. This will create a rectangular property line boundary that is 350'-0" by 275'-0". the line at the bottom of the dialog box should read "From last point to first point: Closed" 5. Starting at the top row (row #1). Property Lines Property lines can be defined by sketching the lines or entering survey distance and bearing data. 3. 558 .

Line Pattern to Dash dot and Line Color to Brown for the Working Contour. and poche depth. 4. 3. A new subcategory for the toposurface will be defined and used to mark a specific elevation. From the Settings menu choose Site Settings. To add a special contour (or group of contours) to mark a specific elevation use the Additional Contours part of the Site Settings dialog box. single value under the Range Type column. 5. true north. section cut material.Site Settings (contour visibility) 1. and choose "Working contour" from the Subcategory drop down list. 6. Choose Object Styles from the Settings menu. Enter the name Working Contour and press OK to create the new subcategory of Topography. At row 1 of Additional Contours enter 3'-3" under the Start column. Change the interval to 2'-0" and Passing Through Elevation 0'-0". 559 . Choose OK to finish. Scroll down to the category of Topography. 2. This dialog allows the control of contour line interval. Set the Line Weights to 1. Select Topography and choose Create New.

Note: if a range of multiple special contours are desired enter "multiple values" under the Range Type column and enter values the Stop & Interval columns. Set these settings as desired. Using the Split Surface tool from the Site Design bar select the Toposurface created in the above steps. From within sketch mode select the Lines tool from the Sketch Design bar. 3. 1. Pick the OK button to apply these settings. lakes. 2. Revit will enter Sketch mode. 560 . These surfaces can be assigned different materials to depict such things as roads. 8. plazas. etc. or to delete entire portions of the toposurface. Notice the orange dashed contour line at elevation 3'-3". Split Surface The Split Surface tool allows a toposurface to be broken up into separate pieces that can then be edited independently from the main toposurface. Shading with Edges. 7. Section cut material and poche depth are utilized when the site is displayed in a section view. 4. To view the display shaded go to View. Sketch a closed boundary similar to the outline of the red surface in the image below and then pick Finish Sketch.

3.Asphalt'. Open the Revit file named Site_training. This is done by selecting a toposurface to modify.rvt from the training folder and activate the Site view. Building Pad 1. Using the Pad tool from the Site Design bar. In this example the road surface will be modified to make the slope even & perpendicular to the direction of the road. sketch a building foot print similar to the image below. Pick Finish Sketch to generate the building pad. 1. Graded Region The purpose of Graded Region is to allow the modification of existing topography.5. 2. The Graded Surface dialog box will appear. The original is marked as demolished. The "Copy internal points" box should not be checked. Pick the Graded Region tool from the Site Design bar. Pick the Select and Edit button. A copy is made with a matching boundary and is marked as new in the current phase. Change the Material parameter from '<By Category>' to 'Site . 6. The site should look similar to the shaded 3D and section images below. 2. Using the Modify tool select the new "road" surface and then pick the Properties button from the Option bar. 561 .

Pick the "road" surface created previously. To do this use the Modify tool to pick each point individually or with a selection box and press Delete. 5. From the options bar. set the Elevation to 12'. 7. Repeat for the other point. Next. 6. 8. Next set the elevation to 11' for the points shown below. The elevation value of the point will be displayed in the Option bar. Revit enters Toposurface edit mode which will allow the editing of the elevation points that are used to generate the toposurface. Zoom into the region indicated in the image below. 562 . Start by deleting all of the elevation points within the property line along the perimeter except for the points at the corners and the contour lines. Choose Modify and select one of the two points shown.4. use the Modify tool to select and drag the elevation points at the 8'-0" elevation contour line. To identify the elevation of any contour line use the Modify tool to select an elevation point along the contour line. 4. The surface should look similar to the one below.

Pick the Pick Host button from the Option bar and then pick the road surface. Place the first parking stall in the northwest corner of the parking area. Select the Toposurface that you just graded and from the Options Bar. Pick the Parking Component from the Site Design bar and change the type to "Parking Space: 9' x 18' . select Properties. To do this pick the Point tool from the Site Design bar. Pick Finish Surface from the Site Design bar.7. 5. If there are any remaining elevation points at the perimeter also set those to 11'0". Activate the Site plan view and change the view display to Wireframe. 9. 8. 10. and then pick a point on the opposite boundary as illustrated in the image below. change the Elevation field value on the Option bar to 10'-0". press enter. Next. This data can be reported in a Topography Schedule. 2. Notice that the Cut and Fill data is reported. . 7. add a new point at elevation 10'-0" on the boundary of the road opposite the existing 10'-0" elevation point and contour. Parking Component 1. 3." from the drop down list on the Option bar. Click OK. Parking Components can be flipped vertically & horizontally using their flip arrows and rotated using the rotate tool just like any other Revit component. Set the Elevation field on the Option bar to 11'-0" and press return.90 deg. Zoom out 563 4. Make sure to pick the road surface and not the surrounding site surface. Pick the Modify tool and then pick the parking space component that was placed on the site in the previous step.

564 . Placing Objects on a Site Surface In this part of the exercise you will place a tree on the site to demonstrate Revit's ability to place the family component on top of the toposurface. 4. Pick the Site Components tool on the Site Design bar.so the whole road surface can be viewed if needed. Activate the Site plan view if not already active and place trees at high and low elevations by picking points on the site. 2. 1. Open the Site section and 3D views and notice how the bases of the trees are on top of the surface. This tells Revit that the parking component is to be placed on top of the toposurface and not simply on one of the floor plan sketch planes which may be above or below this area of the toposurface. 6. Tagging Parking and Site components 1. Finish the parking layout by either placing additional parking space components or arraying or copying the first space. Revit automatically tags all untagged parking spaces and plantings. 5. To tag all parking spaces and trees first pick the Parking Tag row and press the Apply button then pick the Planting Tag row and press the Apply button. 3. Change the drop down list on the Option bar to "Pinus Thunbergiana 15'". While in the Site view pick the Tag All Not Tagged tool from the Drafting Design bar. 2.

As with all schedules the column titles can be modified and the "Mark" fields can be entered to number the spaces. New. 5. 1. Then check on "Schedule building components" and "List every component individually" and pick OK. 4. 3. From the "Fields" tab on the Schedule Properties dialog box add "Mark" and "Type" to the Scheduled Fields column. Pick View. 2.Parking Space Schedules Schedules for parking spaces can be created in exactly the same manner all other schedules. Schedule. 565 . Pick "Parking" from the New Schedule dialog box. Pick OK to generate the schedule.

Whenever units of measurement are necessary. and spin the 3D View so Notice that the building pad has yet to be added to the model. Footing and select the north wall. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. You can set your units preference by selecting Units from the Settings menu. 1. and save the file with a unique file name. property lines are no longer required to be a closed loop. click . both the imperial and metric units are supplied with the imperial unit followed by the metric in parenthesis. 1. If you wish to save your work. about the new Site Component tool. 566 . From the Common folder.O. ceiling or roof and using the Pick Walls option. how to create property line arcs within a data table. Adding a Building Pad When adding a building pad. Property Lines. 3. Click you can see into the basement. 2. In this exercise. Open the Floor Plan: T. You can create property lines with arcs. Save As. and Site Components You can create a building pad using the pick walls command. click to open a 3D View. For example. Click Open. From the Toolbar. From the Site tab of the Design Bar.Additional Site Tools: Building Pads. 30' 0" (10meters). In addition. Notice that it is a foundation wall. Units may not be the result of a direct conversion. click File. 2. you will learn: • • • • how to create a building pad using the Pick Walls tool. This file is used with several tutorials. Note: This exercise was created with an imperial template and components. you now have the option to Pick Walls. how to close a loop when creating property lines from a table. there is a Site Component tool that allows you to add site components without scrolling through a lengthy list of non-site related items. select Office Building.rvt. the command is no different then adding a floor.

Open a 3D view and notice the building pad is attached to the bottom of the foundation walls. you have the option to let Revit close the loop for you. By default. Deed Data . 7. Within the Property Lines dialog box. the Pick Walls option is selected. Using the survey data below. From the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines You can add arcs within property line tables. property lines are not required to form a closed loop. Select the north wall and use the toggle arrows to select the outer face. 3.4. Select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings and click OK. 4. 6. Revit will prompt you to sketch the property line or create it using a table. click . 1. 5. From the Design Bar. In addition. Open the Floor Plan: Site. click Finish Sketch. There should be a total of four lines within the table. Select the remaining exterior walls to define the perimeter of the building pad.Imperial Distance N/S Bearing 1 2 3 4 76' 0" 167' 0" 80' 0" 190' 0" S S N N 0° 00' 00" 90° 00' 00" 17° 00' 00" 90° 00' 00" E/W E W W E Type Line Line Line Arc Radiu L/R s 95' 0" L 567 . 2. click Insert three times to add an additional three lines to the table. type the distance and bearing information into the Property Lines table.

7. click OK. The property lines will appear at the cursor. move the property lines to their approximate position. 6. In addition. Next. S S N N 0° 00' 00" 90° 00' 00" 17° 00' 00" 90° 00' 00" E/W E W W E Type Line Line Line Arc Radiu L/R s 29 L Once the survey data has been entered into the Deed Data table. Study the image below to understand how the arc flattens out when the radius is increased. Using the image below for guidance. you will edit the arc's radius to significantly flatten the arc. you must increase the radius.Deed Data .3 58 5. Note: The radius of an arc can not be less than 1/2 the length of its chord (distance).Metric (meters) Distance N/S Bearing 1 2 3 4 23 51 24. Select Modify from the Design Bar and select the property line. Tip: You can use the Align tool to align property lines to landmarks or markers within the model. in order to flatten an arc. 568 .

Before clicking OK. Change the Radius of the arc property line to 140' 0" (44 meters ) and click OK. Change the Distance in line 2 to 160' 0" (48 meters). notice that Autodesk Revit informs you that the property lines do not form a closed loop. With the property line selected.8. property lines often do not form a perfectly closed loop. Note: Despite inputting data directly from a deed or survey. You are also provided the exact distance required to close the loop. Notice that the arc has flattened. 11. 9. 569 . In the Option Bar. 10. click Edit Table from the Option Bar. select Edit Table.

12. 14. 15. Click OK despite the fact the property lines do not form a closed loop. Notice a new line is inserted within the table. With the property lines selected. Click . 16. click Edit Table from the Option Bar. 570 . 13. Click OK. Notice Autodesk Revit closed the loop for you. The loop is closed. The following warning appears: Autodesk Revit allows you to create the property lines and warns you that the area will not be computed until the loop is closed. Notice the gap in the upper right intersection of the property lines. Click OK.

571 . click the island 90°. place a parking island within the parking lot. Notice that only Site components appear in the list. Click OK. click from the Option Bar. Open the Type Selector drop-down list. Tip: After placing the parking island. select it. 5. Notice that you can name the property lines and that the property area is reported.17. select Properties. 3. from the toolbar and rotate 4. Place the cursor over the parking lot and when the topography pre-highlights. With the island selected. Adding Site Components 1. This information can be scheduled and exported via ODBC. Select Parking Island from the Type Selector and using the image below for guidance. Select the property lines and from the Options Bar. All non-site components are filtered from the list. Do not be concerned with exact placement. With the Floor Plan: Site still open. click 2. .

572 .The parking lot topography is now the host for the parking island. Open a 3D View to see the result.

Loading Structural Families: 573 . From the Common folder. If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not visible. From the Settings menu. Structural. will appear. Set the Area and Volume to use metric units. choose Units. Format the Length Units to use Millimeters. and select Structural. 2. This project was created using an imperial template and components. Click Open. Set the unit suffix to mm. The tab.Using Structural Tools In this lesson you will learn: How to enable the Structural Design Bar How to load Structural families by type How to create Structural Views How to place Structural Columns How to place Beams How to create Bracing Elevations How to place Braces How to place Structural Walls Enabling the Structural Design Bar: 1. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. 3. select Structural. right-click on the Design Bar. Click OK.rvt.

(Note: Do not double-click). by selecting both rows. 5. Load Family. Open the Structural folder. From the File menu. W690x323 and W460x464. select the arrow. 4... Under the column for Section Modulus (Sx). 1.. 2. 3. At this point. and scroll down the list to select a value of 10226. This will filter the list to only display framing members with a Section Modulus of 10226. and finally open the Steel folder. These can be sorted.rfa. 574 . Select (single-click) M_W-Wide Flange. then open the Framing folder. select Load From Library. you should note the Type Catalog at the bottom of the dialog box. and selectively loaded by type. Choose the two beam types.Structural Families are often collections of hundreds of different sizes of the same profile.

doors. based on their Structural Usage. Open the Model Categories tab. and open the Annotation Categories tab.6. 4. All walls appear in Architectural and Coordination views. Choose OK. Creating Structural Views: The View Property. 575 . In the Project Browser. From the View menu. 2. select Visibility/Graphics. window tags and color fill legends. 3. Select Open This will only load these two types of W-Wide Flange Beams. 1. Uncheck all subcategories that should not appear in Structural views. determines which walls are visible in a view. Uncheck all subcategories that should not appear in Structural views. and furniture. such as door tags. such as light fixtures. open Floor Plan: Level 1 (if it is not already open). windows. Discipline. 5. non-bearing walls do not appear in Structural views.

576 . Next select the Edit button next to View Range. 9.6. This will ensure the structural elements within 300mm below the finished floor level will be seen. Change the value of Discipline to Structural. Click OK. 8. From the View menu. choose View Properties. 7. Set the Offset for the View Depth to be -300mm as shown.

rfa and using the Type Catalog at the bottom of the dialog. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W410x38. 11. Select M_W-Wide Flange-Column. Steel directory. Load Family. Choose OK to close the View properties dialog. Navigate to the Structural. 577 . choose Load From Library. 2. select Save as View Template. Column. From the Type Selector. When the centroid of the structural column is coincident with the intersection of two Grids. The view should update as shown below. choose all the columns that have a M value of 39. Click Open. From the View menu. Click OK to close the dialog box. and name it "Structural".10. Placing Structural Columns: 1. From the File menu. both Grids will prehighlite. Select the button from the Structural tab of the design bar. Move your cursor from the type selector to the intersection of grid 1.5 and A.8 4. 3. This can be used to apply the same Visibility settings and View Properties to other Structural views.

click the mouse once to place. Select all the columns that you have placed. When the column is properly positioned. choose Filter from the options bar and unselect everything but the columns. Open Floor Plan:Level 2. and change the value of Top Level to Level 3. Select the Structural template and choose OK. Select Properties. 3. 578 . 7. Note: Structural Tags are automatically placed in the view when a Structural Framing member is placed. To set the display of this view using the view template defined earlier. Placing Beams: 1. With Modify selected. 8. Next. Place additional columns at all grid intersections. 6. 2. select Apply View Template from the View menu. and Grids D and 1. Open a 3D View to see the changes.5. except the junction of Grids A and 1. use a pick box to select everything in this view.

click to select it. you will load a structural tag into the project in order to tag the beams.. Select the button from the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. 15. Place additional Beams of type W460x464 connecting along all the interior Grids. Note: A warning may appear informing you that the attached wall is non-bearing. Beams will snap and join to the theoretical bearing point of the supporting element. In the Project Browser. 5. Open the Annotation folder. 17. i.. double click on the Floor Plan View Level 3. Select M_Structural Framing Tag. select Load From Library. 12. From the View menu. Once it prehighlights. From the Type Selector.e. and select OK. Using the right mouse button. 11. click inside the active view. the centroid of a Structural Column or the centerline of a Structural Wall. From the File menu.rfa. 10. select "Structural". Adding a beam is a two-click process. select M_W-Wide Flange : W690x323. 7. Add the perimeter and interior beams using the same process that you used in Level 2. Once it prehighlights. Load Family. Move your cursor to the intersection of Grid A and 2. to make that the active view. Place additional Beams of type M_W-Wide Flange : W690x323 connecting the entire perimeter of Structural Columns. Open Floor Plan: Level 3. select Apply View Template. 14. 4. 6.In the steps that follow. 579 .5. Move your cursor from the type selector to the intersection of Grid A and 1. click on the 3D View Icon. 16. 13. 9. 8. Apply the Structural View Template. and pick Open.. click it. In the Toolbar.

Place the cursor directly over Grid A between Grid 3 and 4. the elevation symbol will appear. 580 . Change the Model Graphics Style to Shaded w/ Edges. Click to place the symbol similar to the image below. Select from the Structural tab of the design bar. and change the value of Detail Level to Medium. Double-click the triangular portion of the elevation tag to open this new view. Click OK. Choose Modify.18. Open Floor Plan: Level 1. Creating Framing Elevations: 1. Select View Properties. 3. When the grid line prehighlights. 4. 2.

choose Load From Library. 581 . Select M_C-Channel. Navigate to the Structural. Change value of Crop Region Visible parameter to No by removing the checkmark.6. Framing. and select View Properties. Right click in Bracing Elevation view. Drag the handles to expose the entire structural bay.rfa and from the Type Catalog at the bottom of the dialog box. 8. 7. choose C380x74. Steel directory. Select the Crop Region of the view. Placing Braces: 1. Load Family. From the File menu.

select M_C-Channel : C380x7. 3. Placing a brace is a two-click process. 2. Select the button from the Structural tab of the design bar. Move the cursor to the midpoint of the structural beam below Level 2. 582 . The diagonal brace appears. From the Type Selector.Choose Open. click to select it. When the midpoint symbol appears. Click first at the intersection of Grid 4 and endpoint of the structural column located near Level 1. 4.

Select from the Structural tab of the Design Bar. or Structural Combined. Placing Structural Walls: Structural Walls are walls whose Structural Usage is set to Bearing by default. Open Floor Plan: Level 1. Bearing. 4. Shear. The Structural Usage of a wall can be Non-Bearing. 3. 583 .8" Masonry. 5. 2. Click first over the structural column at the junction of Grid B and Grid 3. From the Type Selector select Basic Wall : Generic . 1. In the Options Bar change the Height parameter to Level 3.7. Add additional Braces as illustrated.

Click a second time over the stuctural column located at the junction of Grid B and Grid 4. make a second pick to finish the Structural Wall. and when properly selected.6. 7. 584 . Open a 3D view to view the design. .

1. Gross Area and Rentable. Click Area Settings from the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. right click on the design bar and check Area Analysis. From the Common folder. 2. Choose Cancel to close the Area Schemes dialog 585 .Area Analysis Tools In this exercise. To enable the Area Analysis tab on the Design bar. you will learn how to use the Area Analysis tools. The floor plan view Level 1 should be the active view. Two schemes are currently defined. Defining Gross Area Scheme You will now create a gross area scheme for the project. Area analysis tools allow users to define rule based area boundaries and area tags to define area schemes for rentable area and gross area. 3. 4.rvt. Click Open. New user defined schemes can be defined. select Area. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog.

If "yes" is selected Revit will automatically place Area Boundary line to the exterior walls of your building. 1. 586 . NOTE: If "Do not duplicate existing views" is unchecked. Select Yes to define the exterior boundary lines. Select Level 1 as the level to use for this area plan and choose OK. You will be prompted to automatically create area boundary lines associated with the external walls. Select the Gross Building scheme from the pull down menu. If "no" is selected you will have to manually sketch the Area Boundary lines. Select Area Plan from the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Any changes made to the original scheme will show up within the copied area scheme. forming a closed loop. you can create a copy of the same area scheme.5. 6.

Rentable Area Scheme You will now add a new area plan for rentable space. "Office Area" and "Store Area". A room's area is now calculated to the face of wall. Choose Area Plan from the Design bar to define a new area plan. Select Rentable as the type. Autodesk Revit will pre highlight the enclosed area to indicate it is valid for placing the tag. Drag the pointer to an enclosed area of the plan view to place the tag. Now place an Area Tag. Area boundary lines will be used to define the inner spaces of the building.7. 8. Select Area Tag from Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. 2. Notice within the Project Browser that there is a Area Plan (Gross Building) on Level 1. A Room Tag measures the area enclosed by walls of a room. Select Level 1 and choose OK. rather than centerline of wall. When the area type is changed area boundary lines can update position (exterior face of wall. A new area plan will be defined. then area tags will be added. 1. 587 . NOTE: An Area Tag measures the area defined by the area plans boundary lines. centerline of wall or interior face of wall). 9. The area type of the tags can be defined to reflect things such as "Building Common Area".

Zoom in around the exterior of the building. The options for area boundary lines should be set to Pick and Apply Area Rules. The rule is for these lines to follow the inside face of the wall.3. When area boundaries are created. so the entire model is visible. 4. Area Boundary Lines Area boundary lines will now be added to divide the rentable spaces. 588 . area boundary lines go to face of glass. 1. choose Area Boundary. From the design bar. choose Yes to automatically define area boundary lines. Notice the area lines follow some of the windows placed in the exterior wall. Notice the automatically placed area lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. two building core areas and a circulation area will be defined. If "Apply Area Rules" is not selected the boundary lines do not automatically updated to the area type of the tag. Three tenant areas. When the Pick option is used. Zoom to fit. 5. If the glass of the window is more than 50% of the wall height. they can be defined by picking existing walls or by sketching the lines. Note: The area boundary lines are set to the inside face of wall for the Rentable scheme. an option called "Apply Area Rules" can be selected to have the update based on the area type of the tag placed in these spaces. When prompted.

Click the Properties button to display the properties of this area tag. 4. An area boundary will be drawn at the centerline of the walls. Since Apply Area Rules is selected.2. Select Area Tag from the design bar. From the design bar. choose Modify and select the tag. these lines will update their position according to the area type defined in the area tags to be placed. 589 . 3. Now the area tags will be added. Select all interior walls shown below. Zoom to fit the plan view in the window. Place the first tag in the enclosed area shown below. Change the Name parameter to Tenant 1 and the Area Type parameter to be Office Area.

590 . Modify the tag Properties and set the parameter Name to Tenant 2 and Area Type to Office Area. Add a new Area Tag in the common area as shown. Set the tag's Name to Circulation and Area Type to Building Common Area. 6.5. Add a second Area Tag to the area shown below.

Add an Area Tag in the core area and set the tag's Properties to have a Name of Core and an Area Type of Major Vertical Penetration. Add the last Area Tags to the two areas on the right side of the building The 591 .7. 8.

Name for these tags should be set to Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Notice the area boundary lines have updated for the new area types. 3. 592 . Drag the cursor to a location to set the color fill legend and click to place the legend. Select Areas (Rentable) as the category to be scheduled and choose OK. New and Schedule/Quantities from the menubar. Choose Color Fill from the Area Analysis design bar. Next. The Area Type will be set to Store Area for both tags. choose View. then create a rentable schedule. Choose OK to set the visibility of the floors. topography and Site: Pads to not be visible. You will add a color fill by area type. 2. Color Fills & Schedules The Area Plans can be color filled by area type or name and can also be scheduled. 1.

and Name. 593 . 5. Area. Perimeter. Choose OK to create the new schedule.4. Choose the fields to be included on the schedule. Choose Area Type.

copied. From the Metric folder. double click on "Families" to open up the options of family types available. Creating a Group 1. 2. you will learn how to: • • • • • Create a Group Edit and Update a Group Ungroup Objects Mirror and Array a Group Insert a Group Retrieve the Model 1. copies of a group are associative – a change made to one instance of the group automatically updates all instances. Zoom in Region. Zoom in on the upper left hand room. 2. 594 . The "Floor Plan : Level 1" view should appear as shown below. Additionally.Grouping Objects can be grouped and then easily selected as a set and moved. Use View. or otherwise changed. select grouping exercise. In the Project Browser. Click the left mouse button at one corner of the region to zoom in on. Zoom. In this exercise. then click the opposite corner. Click Open.rvt. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog.

Place the bed against the wall as shown. Note: All the furniture families required for this exercise have been preloaded in 'grouping_exercise. 8. Press <Esc> twice to exit from the component insertion mode. 5. Double click on "Furniture" to see the furniture selection. You will have to rotate the chair as shown. Press <Esc> twice to exit the component insertion mode. select the"M_Desk Chair" and drag and drop the chair in front of the desk as shown below. In the Project Browser. Drag the desk directly from the Project Browser by holding down ). 6. (Your pointer should appear as in insertion pointer Place the desk in the room by releasing the mouse button then pressing the left mouse button when the desk is in the correct location. 4. the left mouse button. 7. Notice that after placing the first desk you may continue to place additional desks by using the left mouse button. Use the drop-down menu in the Options Bar to choose Standard Bed : Twin 965 x 1880mm.3. Double click on "M_Desk" and select 1524 x 762mm with the left mouse so that it highlights in blue. Press <Esc> twice to exit the component 595 . Select from the Basics Design Bar.rvt'.

Deselect everything except Furniture. Choose to filter out the object types you do not want to include.insertion mode. 596 . 9. there are items selected that you do not want in your group. the desk and the chair Choose . desk. Pick with the left mouse button for the top left corner of the window then hold down the mouse button and position the other corner. 10. Use a pick window to make your selection. Only the bed. Currently. Choose 11. You will now group the twin bed. Let go of the mouse button to finish the window. and chair are now picked.

2. Press F5 to refresh your screen.12. Your model should look like this: 597 . 3. Select from the Toolbar. 6. Arraying a Group 1. choose menu. 4. Zoom. To create a group. Use View. Rename this "Layout . 5. from the Toolbar or select Group from the Edit Notice in the Project Browser that there is a new "Group 1" in the group area. Zoom Out (2x) to zoom out of the view.twin".twin" group into the same position in the adjacent room and press <Enter> to accept 4 as the number of copies. From the Options Bar. use the left mouse button to pick the "Layout .twin" group. Drag and drop the "Layout . change the Number of Items from 2 to 4. If not already picked.

Select all the groups called "Layout . 3. Choose "Select All Instances".twin" in the Project Browser and click the right mouse button. Your model will look like this: 598 .Mirroring Several Groups You will now mirror the arrayed groups to the other side of the corridor.twin". 2. Make sure the Copy box in the options toolbar is checked. Pick the green reference plane in the middle of the corridor as the mirror axis. All the instances by that name will be picked and highlighted in red in the model as shown below. 4. To do this. place the cursor over the group name " Layout . 1. Notice that the pointer has now changed to the axis selection pointer. Select from the Toolbar.

In the Options Toolbar. 9. 10. Pick the desk. Select from the Options Bar. 1. 8. Pick the bed and delete it using Edit. Select from the Design Bar. 4. 2. Select from the Basics Design Bar. choose button from the Toolbar or selecting from the Options bar. select Rotate after Placement. Select from the Design Bar. 11. Delete. chair and the bed by holding down the <Ctrl> key and picking with the left mouse button. 5. The bed will line up with the wall as shown below. and create a new group out of the new layout. The 599 . 12. Zoom in on the top left group. Click when the bed is in position. 7. Group these together by selecting the Group from the Edit menu. Choose M_Standard Bed : Double 1346 x 1880mm from the drop-down menu in the Type Selector. 6.Editing a Group In this exercise you will remove the bed from one of the rooms. 3. Choose from the Toolbar and select the inside face of the wall and then the head of the bed. Place the bed in the room and rotate it 45 degrees. insert a new bed. Pick it using the left mouse button. With the Group still selected in red.

Pick the double bed using the left mouse button.Edit Properties Dialogue box appears. Notice that the group is correctly placed in the room.double" group. Using the drop-down menu in the Options Bar. In the following exercise you will replace one of the "Layout . 3. Replacing Components and Groups in Different Orientations 1. Select from the Design Bar. 2. Replacing Groups It is often useful to be able to replace an entire group with another group. 2. From the Options Bar. Zoom to fit to view the entire model. change the component type from Standard Bed : Double 1346 x 1880mm to Standard Bed : Queen 1512 x 2006mm. use the drop-down menu to change the group from "Layout twin" to " Layout . Notice that the bed is replaced in the correct orientation. Zoom.double".double" group in the top left-hand corner of the model. Pick the "Layout . 4. 1. Pick the "Layout . in each of the dialogue boxes to complete the renaming of the 13. and rename the new group as "Layout . and a Type Properties dialogue box will appear. 3. select . Zoom.twin" group in that room. Use View. In the Options Bar. Choose Select Choose group. 600 . Zoom in Region to zoom in on the second room from the left of the model. Use View.double" 5.twin" groups with a "Layout .

1. Zoom. the replacement still takes place correctly.queen" group and move the insertion point to the corner of the desk to match the other groups. Pick the bottom left-hand "Layout . choose M_Night Stand : 457 x 457 x 610mm.twin" group and change the group type in the drop-down menu in the Options Bar to "Layout . from the design bar. Pick the "Layout . use the right mouse button and rename the group from the default "Group 1" to "Layout . from the Options Bar. 6. 6. and queen-sized bed by holding down the <Ctrl> key and picking with the left mouse button.queen". Pick the "Layout . Select from the Basics Design Bar. 601 . This is because the insertion point includes two orientation arrows which indicate in which orientation a new group should be inserted. chair . Notice that despite the previous mirroring. 7. you will add a bedside table to the "Layout .queen" group with the left mouse button.4. Pick the desk. Pick the bedside table with the left 8. Use View. In the Project Browser.queen" group and observe the changes. 8. From the drop-down menu in the Options Bar. 4. Select . 2. Zoom in Region to zoom in on the top left-hand room in the model. Press <Esc> twice to exit the component insertion mode. Select from the Toolbar or select Group from the Edit menu. 3. Insert the bedside table as shown below.queen". 5. Choose to complete the changes. In this exercise. Select Choose mouse button. Updating Groups When one group is modified. 9. 7. 5. all the other groups of the same name are automatically updated to match.

Notice that the bedside table is automatically added to the other "Layout . 4. Your model should look like this. 5. 3. In the Project Browser. 1. 2. select the Group. Pick the "Layout . Inserting Group Instances In this exercise you will learn how to use the Modelling Design bar to add Group instances to a model. Press <Esc> twice to exit the group instance insertion mode.9. Use the button from the Toolbar to delete the group.twin" group in the top right-hand corner of the model. "Layout . Use View.queen" group in the bottom left-hand corner. Zoom to fit to view the entire model. 602 .double". Drag the group into the empty room and click to place it. Zoom. Select from the Design Bar.

pick on all the instances of Group 1 with the cursor. From the Project Browser.rvt. 3. With the mouse cursor hold and drag the highlighted name into the model. you will learn to delete all instances of a group and then re-insert them into the model from the Project Browser. saved to an external file (*. 4. 603 . On the Toolbar. Select one of the desk/chair combinations and using the <Ctrl> key on the keyboard. select GroupUpdate. giving the user more flexibility in design alternatives. expand Groups. Do not delete the group. Group 1). 2. click on the Delete icon to delete all group instances. you must click on the name of the Group in the Project Browser. From the Common folder.rvg). Even though all the instances of Group 1 were deleted. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Click Open. If you want to completely remove the Group from the model. 1. a group can now be defined in a project.Saving & Loading Groups Groups can exist even if all of the instances are deleted from the project. Group 1 is still listed in the Project Browser. Groups Exist After Deleting All Instances In this part of the exercise. click on the name of the Group in the Project Browser (ex. and be loaded into other projects. 5. right click on the mouse and press Delete. To re-use Group 1 in your model later. Also.

rvg. Saving Groups The groups data can now be saved to disk and then loaded into other Autodesk Revit projects. Place the Group to the desired location and see the result. choose Save Group from the File menu. Select the Load Group option. Navigate to the folder where the group was saved and select the file to be loaded. Once the group has been loaded. 4. Choose Open to load the saved group.6. 2. If there are multiple groups in the project. expand Groups from the Project Browser. Notice Group 1 is listed. choose File and Load From Library. Once the group is saved. 2. start a new project. To save the group. 3. . Loading Saved Groups 1. Select the desired folder and name for the saved group and choose Save. The saved group will have the extension. To load the saved group. 604 . The group can now be placed in this project. 1. the group to be saved can be selected from the Group to Save pulldown list.

The profile placement is indicated by crossing green lines and a red dot on the path. 1. 5. Instead of sketching a 2D path as with a traditional sweep. Once you have picked the entire path. Click Open. 3. we will pick an existing 3D path from objects in the project. select the tops of the wall to create a continuous path (there are many small segments so you may have to rotate and zoom into the model). 8. For instance sweeping the edge of a gable roof with one pass.Creating 3D Sweeps Enhanced sweeps can be used to create 3D sweeps from existing path objects. click Finish Path. select 3D Sweep. With Pick selected from the Design bar. 6. then click Create. or putting a parapet cap on a multi-level wall. From the Common folder. Select an elevation view that you will be able to see the profile marker and sketch a profile similar to the one below drawn on the West elevation. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. then give the family any name Click the Solid icon then pick Sweep as the form of the solid. select Pick Path. 9. 2. 7.rvt. To create an in-place family click the Modeling tab. The system will warn if you have any errors such as an incorrect path or a path that is not continuous. Next. From the Design bar. Click Sketch Profile from the Design bar. The first segment that you click is where the profile will be drawn so try to pick a horizontal face first. 4. Select Walls as the category. A sweep needs to be created within an in-place family. you will sketch the profile. 605 .

choose Shaded with Edges. 11. 606 . choose Finish Family. To end the family creation. Click Finish Profile then click Finish Sweep to complete the sweep.10. Open a 3D view and from the View menu.

existing reference planes. you will learn how to create a radial array. 3.rvt. Click Open.Creating a Radial Array In this exercise. Open Floor Plan: Level 1. Select the reference plane you added in the previous step. Add a column as shown in the next figure. Choose Column from the Modelling tab and select a Metal Clad Column from the drop down list in the Type Selector. From the Common folder. From the Edit menu. Click on the horizontal reference plane that is aligned to the centerline of the front door. 4. From the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Mirror. 2. select Radial Array. Use the image below for guidance. A mirrored copy of the reference plane will appear. 1. choose Pick and Copy. Place the column approximately as shown in the image below. From the Options Bar. select Reference Plane and add a diagonal reference plane that intersects the center of the column and the intersection of the two. 607 . Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog.

7. From the Edit menu. second. Choose Modify and select the column. Drag the rotation control to the reference plane intersection. Using the image below for guidance. Snap the end ray to the mirrored reference plane. click to see the 3D image. set the start ray by clicking the center of the column. From the Options Bar. place your cursor over the center of the column to grab the rotation control. Also check the Move to Last button. you set the rotation point. 6. When the number 7 appears. 8. choose Array. you set the starting ray. 7. 608 . Next.5. Creating an Array is a 3 step process. From the Toolbar. press <Enter>. and finally you set the end ray. choose Radial and set the number of items to 7. First.

609 .

make sure each click is to the wall Endpoint. In this example. both the imperial and metric units are supplied with the imperial unit followed by the metric in parenthesis. If you wish to save your work. 3. 1. select Office Building. From the Type Selector. click File. select Wall. Tip: Make sure you snap to the Endpoint and the wall centerline. 4.Editing a Cut Profile You can edit the boundary between two faces. For example. Sketching the Footing 610 . 30' 0" (10meters). You can set your units preference by selecting Units from the Settings menu.rvt. Open the Floor Plan: T. Set the Height to Explicit and 1' 0" 5. Units may not be the result of a direct conversion. Save As. Click Open. Footing. choose Basic Wall: Foundation . Starting at the upper left corner. From the Options Bar: 4. 2. and save the file with a unique file name.O. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. you will add a footing underneath the foundation wall and then edit the boundary between the two faces. Whenever units of measurement are necessary. From the Common folder. Note: This exercise was created with an imperial template and components. Select Chain. As you circle the model adding the chain of walls.24" Concrete. From the Basics tab of the Design Bar. sketch the chain of walls along the entire perimeter of the building. Note: This file is used with several tutorials.

611 . From the Toolbar. From the Toolbar. select Section and add a section to the West wall. From the Option Bar. select the boundary between the footing and the foundation wall. Next.Completed Footing 5. select and use Zoom in Region to zoom in on the footing that you added in previous steps. Open the section view you added in the previous step by double-clicking the blue section head. 8. It should prehighlight before you select it. select Boundary between faces. select Edit Cut Profile. do not be overly concerned with exact placement. From the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7. click or from the Tools menu. Click Modify after adding the section. Section View of Footing 9. 10. Adding a Section View 6. Use the image below for guidance.

draw the 3 lines in the image below. If that is the case.Selecting a Boundary to Edit 11. Sketching the New Boundary 12. use the Hide/Isolate tool to hide the Level line. Using the sketching tools. click Finish Sketch. When drawing. make sure the lines snap to each other and the boundary line. From the Design Bar. Modified Cut Profile 612 . Note: The Level Line may still cross the old boundary line.

Second. select Condominium. 2. click on it. 613 . Click Open. From the Common folder.rvt. Open the East Elevation view. 3. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. You will also see the improvement of 2D clean up of compound wall when attaching to sloped compound roof. Zoom in on the foundation compound wall – Limestone on CMU and with the mouse cursor. you will learn how to use the wall top/bottom attachment to other walls. 1. you will learn how to use the “Disallow Join” option when editing wall joins. Attach Top/Bottom (Wall to Wall) We will demonstrate how to use the Attach Top/Bottom command in order to attach the bottom of a curtain wall to the top of a compound wall.Update Tutorials Wall Joins and Attachments This exercise will cover many enhancements on wall joins. Exercise: First.

In the option bar. 5. Go to the 3D view and you will see an opening within the foundation Limestone on CMU wall. 6.4. Modify the sketch lines as shown in the image below. click on the Finish Sketch button on the design bar. click on the Edit Elevation Profile button in order to access to this wall profile sketch mode. Once it’s done. 614 .

click on Attach Top/Bottom button. Using Attach Top/Bottom with Roofs You are now using the “Attach Top/Bottom” command in order to attach the top of garage walls to the bottom of sloped roof. Go to the project browser and open Sections – Garage Section view. 8. select Bottom. You will see that there is no 2D layer clean-up when the compound wall intersects the sloped compound roof. for Attach Wall option. Choose Modify and click on the Curtain Wall. 615 . the curtain wall will join automatically the wall below in order to fill in the opening. pick the foundation – Limestone on CMU wall. This was how previous versions of Revit behaved. Then. On the option bar. With the mouse cursor. 2. Zoom into the region where the new Garage CMU with Furring & Gypsum south wall intersects the sloped Garage Roof – 9”. 9. 1.7. On the option bar again.

616 . we will show a new option for Edit Wall Joins to disallow 'lonely end' joins.3. pick the Garage Roof – 9”. With the mouse cursor. for Attach Wall option. you will see the top of the south wall will join to the underneath of roof above and their 2D compound layers will clean-up automatically as well. With the mouse cursor. click on Attach Top/Bottom button. Using the Disallow Join In this portion of the exercise. On the option bar. 5. click on the Garage CMU with Furring & Gypsum south wall. On the option bar again. Go to the project browser and open Floor Plans – Garage Level view. 4. 1. select Top. Then.

2. You will see that the Garage CMU with Furring & Gypsum north and south walls are intersecting and joining to the existing Limestone on CMU walls. Zoom into the extended garage portion. 3. click on the Garage CMU with Furring & Gypsum north or south wall and Drag the blue dot at the end of each wall so that it won’t intersect the Limestone on CMU walls. 4. Assuming that you don’t want the new garage walls to join to the existing building walls. 617 . To do so. Go to the Tool menu and click on Edit Wall Joins command.

618 . place the Edit Wall Joins square box at the lonely end of the Garage CMU with Furring & Gypsum wall. With the mouse cursor.5. You will see that those intersecting walls will no longer join together. With the mouse cursor. pick the Garage CMU with Furring & Gypsum wall and pull the wall end back to intersect the Limestone on CMU wall. On the design bar. click on Modify. Then on the option bar. select Disallow Join.

Modifying the visibility of linked files. Click Open. 2.Detailing and Visibility Settings In this exercise you will learn the following concepts: Adding spot elevations. Adding additional referenced callouts. Duplicate a view with the detailing information. Add a dimension style for inches. Temporarily hiding objects. Specifically modify the dimensions of a crop boundary. Adding a grid to a view. 619 . Temporarily modifying the thickness of lines for detailing.rvt. Spot Elevations 1. From the Common folder. select Urban House. Choose and select the Training Files icon from the left side of the dialog. Open the First Floor Plan view.

Right-click on First Floor in the Project Browser. we will add a couple of elevation markers. select Spot Elevation. Click a second time to locate elevation value. 6. Place a second spot elevation by clicking the room labeled “Lower Courtyard” once.3. Place spot elevation by clicking the room labeled “Den” once. Click a second time to locate elevation value. (Note different values). We now want to make a copy of this floor plan. 4. From the Drafting tab of the design bar. and transfer the annotations. Since our plan shows multiple level. 5. then select Duplicate with 620 .

the Tool Bar. Select a grid junction and adjust it to the inside corner of the exterior Lower Courtyard wall. From . This will make a new copy of the view and replicate the annotation that existed in our previous view. With the grid selected choose the Move command on the Toolbar. 2. Notice the grid spacing value in the options bar. 7.Detailing. by right-clicking on it inside the Project Browser. 621 . 3. This will make a new copy of the view and replicate the annotation that existed in our previous view. we will add a sketch grid. Work Plane Grid 1. select Work Plane Visibility Choose Modify and select the grid. Rename the view to First Floor Plan. To help us with drafting some built-in benches.

622 . select Detail Lines. From the View menu. button once more. by depressing the Work Plane Visibility We now want to add a crop boundary with a specific size. 5. 6.4. select View Properties and toggle on the Crop Region. From the Drafting design bar. Click OK. Select Thin lines from the type selector list and draw two lines on the grid to represent bench seating. Turn off the grid.

Choose OK to accept the new style name of Dimension Style 2. Format button.7. Dimension Formatting 1. 2. 623 . Select the crop region and press Modify on the Options Bar. Select Edit/New. From the design bar. and click Properties. Change the Width to 16” and the Height to 24”. select Dimension. Choose OK to update the crop region size. 8. and Duplicate. We now want to define a new style of dimensions to give us the number of inches in the built-in seating. 3. Select the Linear/Radial Units.

This dimension is dependant on the exact placement of the work plane grid and the detail lines. We have decided that this particular view is for seating only. Hide/Isolate 1. Choose OK to close the Format dialog. Once the Temporary Hide/Isolate tool appears. 2. The tables will disappear and the . and have the same visibility. Select OK to close each of the properties dialog boxes. select the Noguchi table and the Table – Round. Dimension the bench from the wall to the front of the seating. and click Hide Selected. Set the Units to Fractional inches. 5. we will use the Hide/Isolate tool to hide the tables. Select the Hide/Isolate tool . and Round to the Nearest ½”. the value may differ slightly. 6.4. Hide/Isolate tool will change colors to notify you of hidden objects 624 . Un-check Use Project Standards. The dimension should be approximately 30”. Since tables and the chairs are both furniture.

Draw a section at the edge of the rail. 4. DGN. Select in the Options Bar.dwg. select Black and White. 625 . select Link. 1. 3. Under positioning. 2. select Automatically Place. and then DWG. Center-to-center. Close the Hide/Isolate dialog. Rename this BALCONY DETAIL. 5. Now we will import a rail detail. Inside the Import/Link dialog box. This will create a drafting view called Section of First Floor Plan. Under Layer/Level Colors. Select Open. Ref this View choosing the <New Drafting View>. Select from the File menu. Import/Link . DXF. test to make sure they are linked by double clicking the section head to take you to the view.3. First a new drafting view will be made. Navigate to the Training\Metric folder and select Rail Detail. under Import or Link. Once the section is drawn. Importing DWG Files We now want to import a detail to represent how the railing meets the wall. Select the Section tool in the View Menu.

Select Layer “0” and click OK. 8. Right-click on the screen and choose zoom-to-fit. Go to the View Menu and select Thin Lines. The view should now show as this: 626 .6. This will delete the border. 9. Select the imported detail. and chose Delete Selected Layers/Levels from the Options Bar . Now we want to temporarily show the lines without lineweight so that we can draft over it. 7.

627 .

....................................................................................................................................... 59 Components.................................................................. 96 Curtain Roofs .......................................... 125 Annotation .................................... 56 Creating . 123 Dimensions ......................................................... 445 Walls ........................................................................................ 274 Detail_Component ................................................................................................................................................. 52 Roof .............................. 369 Components ............................................ 585 Attachments........................................................ 231 In-Place Families ................ 469 Room Tag ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 120.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 194....................................................................... 482 C Ceilings ................... 56 Components ...................... 335 Annotation Symbol .................................................................... 462 Drawings ....................... 457 Detailing ........................................................................................................................... 208....... 445................. 96....................................................... 610 Editing .............................................................................................................................................................Index 3 3D Sweeps ..................... 613 B Balusters . 231...................... 369 AccuRender Decals ................................................................................................................... 462 Area Analysis Tools ................................................. 56 Compound Ceilings....................................................................... 52................ 605 A AccuRender Decals .................................................................................................................. 469 Annotation Symbol ....................................................................................... 208 Title block ......117................. 71.......................................... 52............. 52 Copying .............................. 71 Alignment ........................................ 205 Compound Walls .................................... 335 Modifying .................................................. 369 Adding........................................................................................................................................... 465............................................................................................................................... 462...................................................................... 202 Color Fill ........................................ 131 Copying ............................................................................................................................................................................... 161 Curtain Walls.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120 628 ............................................. 56 Adding...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 243.................................................................................................................................................. 369 Adding ............................................................................................ 434 Host Openings ...................................................................................................................................................... 610 D Detail Views ................................... 434....... 465 Stairs ....................... 257 Dimension Properties. 67 Cut Profile...................................................................... 155 Curtain Wall Enhancements ............................................................ 194 Furniture Family.................... 243 Facia ........................................................... 462 Creating.....

................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 594 Gutters...... 610 Cut Profile .......................................................... 469 Instance Schedules ....................................................................... 610 F Facia ........................................... 99 Sketching......................................................................... 109 Placing.................................................................................................................................................... 120 Dimensions .............. 231 I In-Place Families............................................... 513 Modifying.............................................. 603 M Material Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 350 Changing ...... 194 H Host Openings.............................................................................................................. 427 Loading Groups .........................................................................................................................Display .................................... 231 Creating ......................................................... 194 Family Editor ................................................................................................................................................................ 243 Creating................................................................................................................ 291 Interior Walls ................ 120 N Nested Families ................................. 384 Note Blocks ........................................................................ 594 Exercise ....................62.............. 350 Formulas ............................................................................................................................. 434 Creating.................................................................... 392 Model Linking............................................................. 109 Draft Views .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 434 G Grouping ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 327 Opening ..... 279 Drawings ................................................................................................................................................. 388 Furniture Family ...................................................................................................................................................... 243 E Editing .......................... 231 629 ........ 381 Nested Family Parameters . 341 O ODBC Export ....... 99 L Light Fixture Family..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16 Door Family ................................................................................................................................................... 107...................................... 469 Creating................................................................................................................ 194 Creating............................................ 379 Fill Pattern Colors........................................ 418 Doors .......................................................

........................................................................... 486 Project Parameters.................................................................................................................... 307 Setting ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 208 Creating........................................................................................................................ 331 Project's Base Elevation ......................... 274................................................................................................................................................ 71 Room Tag ......................................................... 191 Roofs ........................................... 194 Splitting.................................................................................................................................. 354 Raytrace ...... 445 Creating............................................... 331 R Radial array ........................................ 99 Snapping .............. 445 ToolTips..................................... 307 V Vertically Compound Walls ......................................................................................................................................................... 176 Adding..................................... 313 Sketching .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 167 Wall Function ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 619 W Walkthroughs ....................................................................................... 73 T Title block ......................................................... 225 Stairs ................................................................................................... 388 Profile Families .... 354 Roof Height Constraints ............. 105 Stair Calculator....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 372 Wall Floor Joins..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 331 Settings.... 85 Type ............. 613 630 .................................................................. 145 View_fundamentals .............. 331 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 169 Wall Joins ................................................ 296 S Schedules .... 291 U Uniformat .......................................................................................... 465 Creating...................................................71...................................................................... 524 Shared Parameters................................ 76 Shared Coordinates ..... 607 Radiosity .................... 105 Walls .............................................. 573 System_Fundamentals........................................................................................................................................... 496 Project's Base Elevation .P Parameters ................ 208 Structural Tools .................................................................................................................................................. 354 Rendering ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 346 Visibility Settings .............. 85 Soffits ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 465 Room_Schedules ............. 323 Project Sharing .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................... 169 631 ............................... 112 Wrapping .................................................. 105 Windows........................................................ 96 Splitting .... 174 Walls...................................Wall Top/Bottom Attachments...... 105 Creating........................................................................................................................96.....................................................................................